From 26fdacbc0d1cddffe387bb382f35672e1ee5d446 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Karl Berry
array
center
description
displaymath
@@ -141,11 +141,11 @@ into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions.-->
figure
flushleft
flushright
itemize
letter
environment: writing letters
@@ -154,20 +154,20 @@ into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions.-->
minipage
picture
\circle
-\makebox
-\framebox
-\dashbox
-\frame
-\line
-\linethickness
-\thicklines
-\thinlines
-\multiput
-\oval
-\put
-\shortstack
-\vector
+\circle
+\makebox
+\framebox
+\dashbox
+\frame
+\line
+\linethickness
+\thicklines
+\thinlines
+\multiput
+\oval
+\put
+\shortstack
+\vector
quotation
quote
@@ -175,133 +175,134 @@ into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions.-->
table
tabular
thebibliography
theorem
titlepage
verbatim
verse
\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol
: Printing counters
-\usecounter{
counter}
-\value{
counter}
-\setcounter{
counter}{
value}
-\addtocounter{
counter}{
value}
-\refstepcounter{
counter}
-\stepcounter{
counter}
-\day \month \year
: Predefined counters
+\footnote
+\footnotemark
+\footnotetext
+\setlength{\
len}{
value}
-\settodepth
-\settoheight
-\settowidth{\
len}{
text}
-\newcommand
& \renewcommand
+\newcounter
+\newlength
+\newsavebox
+\newenvironment
& \renewenvironment
+\newtheorem
+\newfont
+\protect
\\
[*][morespace]
-\obeycr
& \restorecr
-\newline
-\-
(discretionary hyphen)
-\fussy
-\sloppy
-\hyphenation
-\linebreak
& \nolinebreak
+\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol
: Printing counters
+\usecounter{
counter}
+\value{
counter}
+\setcounter{
counter}{
value}
+\addtocounter{
counter}{
value}
+\refstepcounter{
counter}
+\stepcounter{
counter}
+\day \month \year
: Predefined counters
\hspace
-\hfill
-\SPACE
-\@
-\thinspace
-\/
-\hrulefill
-\dotfill
-\addvspace
-\bigskip \medskip \smallskip
-\vfill
-\vspace[*]{
length}
+\hspace
+\hfill
+\SPACE
+\@
+\thinspace
+\/
+\hrulefill
+\dotfill
+\addvspace
+\bigskip \medskip \smallskip
+\vfill
+\vspace[*]{
length}
\mbox{
text}
-\fbox
and \framebox
+\mbox{
text}
+\fbox
and \framebox
lrbox
-\makebox
-\parbox
-\raisebox
-\savebox
-\sbox{
\boxcmd}{
text}
-\usebox{
\boxcmd
+\makebox
+\parbox
+\raisebox
+\savebox
+\sbox{
\boxcmd}{
text}
+\usebox{
\boxcmd
\rule
-\today
+\rule
+\today
\cc
-\closing
-\encl
-\location
-\makelabels
-\name
-\opening{
text}
-\ps
-\signature{
text}
-\startbreaks
-\stopbreaks
-\telephone
+\cc
+\closing
+\encl
+\location
+\makelabels
+\name
+\opening{
text}
+\ps
+\signature{
text}
+\startbreaks
+\stopbreaks
+\telephone
book
template
@@ -372,7 +373,7 @@ Up: (dir)
This document is an unofficial reference manual for LaTeX, a -document preparation system, version as of September 2009. It is +document preparation system, version as of July 2010. It is intended to cover LaTeX2e, which has been the standard version of LaTeX for many years. @@ -402,18 +403,18 @@ maintainers.
\baselineskip
. The unit of both parameters defaults to
pt. The default \baselineskip
for the Computer Modern typeface
is 1.2 times the \fontsize
.
- The line spacing is also multiplied by the value of the +
The line spacing is also multiplied by the value of the
\baselinestretch
parameter when the type size changes; the
default is 1. However, the best way to “double space” a document,
if you should be unlucky enough to have to produce such, is to use the
setspace
package; see
http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=linespace.
-
\selectfont
\linespread{
factor}
\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{
factor}
, and
+therefore must be followed by \selectfont
to have any effect.
+Best specified in the preamble, or use the setspace
package, as
+described just above.
+
+ The changes made by calling the font commands described above do
not come into effect until \selectfont
is called.
-
\usefont{enc}{family}{series}{shape}
\fontencoding
, \fontfamily
,
+ \usefont{enc}{family}{series}{shape}
\fontencoding
, \fontfamily
,
\fontseries
and \fontshape
with the given parameters,
-followed by \selectfont
.
-
+followed by \selectfont
.
+
+
Miscellaneous commands for controlling the general layout of the page.
\twocolumn[text1col] @@ -892,11 +900,11 @@ starts.These parameters control typesetting in two-column output:
\columnsep
\columnsep
\columnseprule
\columnseprule
\columnwidth
\textwidth
in
+ \columnwidth
\textwidth
in
single-column text.
These parameters control float behavior in two-column output:
\dbltopfraction
\dbltopfraction
\dblfloatpagefraction
\dblfloatpagefraction
\dblfloatsep
\dblfloatsep
\dbltextfloatsep
\dbltextfloatsep
\flushbottom
The \flushbottom
declaration makes all text pages the same
height, adding extra vertical space where necessary to fill out the
page.
@@ -952,7 +960,7 @@ Up: Layout
\raggedbottom
The \raggedbottom
declaration makes all pages the natural
height of the material on that page. No rubber lengths will be
stretched.
@@ -967,45 +975,45 @@ Up: Layout
\headheight
\headheight
book
class, where it varies with the
type size.
- \headsep
\headsep
book
class, where it varies with the type size.
- \footskip
\footskip
book
class, where it varies with the type size.
- \linewidth
\linewidth
article
document in
‘10pt’, it's set to ‘345pt’; in two-column mode, that
becomes ‘229.5pt’.
- \textheight
\textheight
article
or
report
document in ‘10pt’, it's set to
‘43\baselineskip’; for book
, it's ‘41\baselineskip’.
For ‘11pt’, it's ‘38\baselineskip’ and for ‘12pt’,
‘36\baselineskip’.
- \textwidth
\textwidth
article
or report
document, it's
‘345pt’ at ‘10pt’, ‘360pt’ at ‘11pt’, and
‘390pt’ at ‘12pt’. For a book
document, it's
‘4.5in’ at ‘10pt’, and ‘5in’ at ‘11pt’ or ‘12pt’.
- \topmargin
\topmargin
\paperheight − 2in −
\headheight − \headsep − \textheight − \footskip
, and
then divided by two.
- \topskip
\topskip
Sectioning commands provide the means to structure your text into units:
+\part
\chapter
\section
\subsection
\subsubsection
\paragraph
\subparagraph
All sectioning commands take the same general form, e.g., @@ -1046,13 +1054,13 @@ To handle this, the sectioning commands have an optional argument toctitle that, when given, specifies the text for these other places. -
Also, all sectioning commands have *
-forms that print
+
Also, all sectioning commands have *
-forms that print
title as usual, but do not include a number and do not make an
entry in the table of contents. For instance:
\section*{Preamble}-
The \appendix
command changes the way following sectional units
+
The \appendix
command changes the way following sectional units
are numbered. The \appendix
command itself generates no text
and does not affect the numbering of parts. The normal use of this
command is something like
@@ -1062,7 +1070,15 @@ command is something like
\appendix
\chapter{The First Appendix}
-
The secnumdepth
counter controls printing of section numbers.
+The setting
+
+
\setcounter{secnumdepth}{level} ++
suppresses heading numbers at any depth > level, where
+chapter
is level zero. (See \setcounter.)
+
+
One reason for numbering things like figures and equations is to refer the reader to them, as in “See Figure 3 for more details.” @@ -1094,7 +1110,7 @@ Up: Cross references
\label
\label{key} @@ -1133,7 +1149,7 @@ Up: Cross references7.2
-\pageref{
key}
\pageref{key} @@ -1153,7 +1169,7 @@ Up: Cross references7.3
-\ref{
key}
\ref{key} @@ -1174,8 +1190,8 @@ Up: Top8 Environments
-+ LaTeX provides many environments for marking off certain text. Each environment begins and ends in the same manner: @@ -1224,7 +1240,7 @@ Up: Environments
8.1
-abstract
\begin{abstract} ... @@ -1243,7 +1259,7 @@ Up: Environments8.2
-array
\begin{array}{template} @@ -1264,11 +1280,11 @@ be formatted, as follows:
r
Column entries are separated by &
. Column entries may include
+
Column entries are separated by &
. Column entries may include
other LaTeX commands. Each row of the array is terminated with
\\
.
-
In the template, the construct @{
text}
puts text
+
In the template, the construct @{
text}
puts text
between columns in each row.
Here's an example: @@ -1280,7 +1296,7 @@ between columns in each row. \end{array} \end{equation} -
The \arraycolsep
parameter defines half the width of the space
+
The \arraycolsep
parameter defines half the width of the space
separating columns; the default is ‘5pt’. See tabular, for other
parameters which affect formatting in array
environments,
namely \arrayrulewidth
and \arraystretch
.
@@ -1298,7 +1314,7 @@ Up: Environments
center
\begin{center} @@ -1306,7 +1322,7 @@ Synopsis: line2 \\ \end{center}-
The center
environment allows you to create a paragraph
+
The center
environment allows you to create a paragraph
consisting of lines that are centered within the left and right
margins on the current page. Each line is terminated with the
string \\
.
@@ -1325,7 +1341,7 @@ Up: center
\centering
The \centering
declaration corresponds to the center
environment. This declaration can be used inside an environment such
as quote
or in a parbox
. Thus, the text of a figure or
@@ -1357,7 +1373,7 @@ Up: Environments
description
\begin{description} @@ -1366,11 +1382,11 @@ Synopsis: ... \end{description}-
The description
environment is used to make labelled lists. Each
+
The description
environment is used to make labelled lists. Each
label is typeset in bold, flush right. The item text may
contain multiple paragraphs.
-
Another variation: since the bold style is applied to the labels, if +
Another variation: since the bold style is applied to the labels, if
you typeset a label in typewriter using \texttt
, you'll get
bold typewriter: \item[\texttt{bold and typewriter}]
. This
may be too bold, among other issues. To get just typewriter, use
@@ -1390,8 +1406,9 @@ Up: Environments
displaymath
\begin{displaymath} math \end{displaymath} @@ -1419,7 +1436,7 @@ Up: Environments8.6
-document
The
document
environment encloses the body of a document. It is required in every LaTeX document. See Starting & ending. @@ -1434,7 +1451,7 @@ Up: Environments8.7
-enumerate
\begin{enumerate} @@ -1449,7 +1466,7 @@ be nested within other paragraph-making environments, such asitemize
(see itemize) anddescription
(see description). -Each item of an enumerated list begins with an
\item
command. +Each item of an enumerated list begins with an
\item
command. There must be at least one\item
command within the environment.By default, the numbering at each level is done like this: @@ -1461,17 +1478,17 @@ There must be at least one
\item
command within the environment.
The enumerate
environment uses the counters \enumi
+
The enumerate
environment uses the counters \enumi
through \enumiv
counters (see Counters). If the optional
argument to \item
is given, the counter is not incremented for
that item.
-
The enumerate
environment uses the commands \labelenumi
+
The enumerate
environment uses the commands \labelenumi
through \labelenumiv
to produce the default label. So, you can
use \renewcommand
to change the labels (see \newcommand & \renewcommand). For instance, to have the first level use uppercase
letters:
-
\renewcommand{\labelenumi}{\Alph{enumi}}
eqnarray
\begin{eqnarray} (or eqnarray*
)
formula1 \\
formula2 \\
...
\end{eqnarray}
- The eqnarray
environment is used to display a sequence of
+
The eqnarray
environment is used to display a sequence of
equations or inequalities. It is very much like a three-column
array
environment, with consecutive rows separated by \\
and consecutive items within a row separated by an &
.
-
\\*
can also be used to separate equations, with its normal
+
\\*
can also be used to separate equations, with its normal
meaning of not allowing a page break at that line.
-
An equation number is placed on every line unless that line has a +
An equation number is placed on every line unless that line has a
\nonumber
command. Alternatively, The *
-form of the
environment (\begin{eqnarray*} ... \end{eqnarray*}
) will
omit equation numbering entirely, while otherwise being the same as
eqnarray
.
-
The command \lefteqn
is used for splitting long formulas across
+
The command \lefteqn
is used for splitting long formulas across
lines. It typesets its argument in display style flush left in a box of
zero width.
@@ -1521,7 +1538,7 @@ Up: Environments
equation
\begin{equation} @@ -1543,7 +1560,7 @@ Up: Environments8.10
-figure
\begin{figure[*]}[placement] figbody \label{label} @@ -1570,7 +1587,7 @@ output. To ameliorate this, use thestfloats
ordblfloatfix
package, but see the discussion at caveats in the FAQ: http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=2colfloat. -
h
h
t
is
automatically added. To absolutely force a figure to appear “here”,
use the float
and use its H
placement letter. (That
@@ -1587,35 +1604,35 @@ containing no text, only floats.
The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands, etc. you wish. -
The \caption
command specifies caption text for the
+
The \caption
command specifies caption text for the
figure. The caption is numbered by default. If loftitle is
present, it is used in the list of figures instead of text
(see Tables of contents).
-
+
\floatpagefraction
\floatpagefraction
\floatsep
\floatsep
\intextsep
\intextsep
\textfloatsep
\textfloatsep
\textfraction
\textfraction
\topfraction
\topfraction
flushleft
\begin{flushleft} line1 \\ line2 \\ ... \end{flushleft}-
The flushleft
environment allows you to create a paragraph
+
The flushleft
environment allows you to create a paragraph
consisting of lines that are flush to the left-hand margin and ragged
right Each line must be terminated with the string \\
.
@@ -1656,7 +1673,7 @@ Up: flushleft
\raggedright
The \raggedright
declaration corresponds to the
flushleft
environment. This declaration can be used inside an
environment such as quote
or in a parbox
.
@@ -1678,14 +1695,14 @@ Up: Environments
flushright
\begin{flushright} line1 \\ line2 \\ ... \end{flushright}-
The flushright
environment allows you to create a paragraph
+
The flushright
environment allows you to create a paragraph
consisting of lines that are flush to the right-hand margin and ragged
left. Each line must be terminated with the string \\
.
@@ -1703,7 +1720,7 @@ Up: flushright
\raggedleft
The \raggedleft
declaration corresponds to the
flushright
environment. This declaration can be used inside an
environment such as quote
or in a parbox
.
@@ -1725,7 +1742,7 @@ Up: Environments
itemize
\begin{itemize}
@@ -1751,14 +1768,14 @@ There must be at least one \item
command within the environment.
The itemize
environment uses the commands \labelitemi
+
The itemize
environment uses the commands \labelitemi
through \labelitemiv
to produce the default label. So, you can
use \renewcommand
to change the labels. For instance, to have
the first level use diamonds:
\renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$\diamond$}-
The \leftmargini
through \leftmarginvi
parameters define
+
The \leftmargini
through \leftmarginvi
parameters define
the distance between the left margin of the enclosing environment and
the left margin of the list. By convention, \leftmargin
is set
to the appropriate \leftmargin
N when a new level of
@@ -1774,16 +1791,16 @@ This example greatly reduces the margin space for outermost lists:
Some parameters that affect list formatting:
\itemindent
\itemindent
\labelsep
\labelsep
\labelwidth
\labelwidth
\listparindent
\listparindent
\rightmargin
\rightmargin
quote
,
quotation
, and verse
environments, where it is set equal
to \leftmargin
.
@@ -1794,27 +1811,27 @@ to \leftmargin
.
loose, by default).
\itemsep
2pt plus1pt
+\itemsep
- Vertical space between items. The default is
2pt plus1pt
minus1pt
for 10pt
documents, 3pt plus2pt minus1pt
for
11pt
, and 4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt
for 12pt
.
-
\parsep
- Extra vertical space between paragraphs within a list item. Defaults
+
\parsep
- Extra vertical space between paragraphs within a list item. Defaults
are the same as
\itemsep
.
-
\topsep
- Vertical space between the first item and the preceding paragraph.
+
\topsep
- Vertical space between the first item and the preceding paragraph.
For top-level lists, the default is
8pt plus2pt minus4pt
for
10pt
documents, 9pt plus3pt minus5pt
for 11pt
,
and 10pt plus4pt minus6pt
for 12pt
. These are reduced
for nested lists.
-
\partopsep
- Extra space added to
\topsep
when the list environment starts a
+
\partopsep
- Extra space added to
\topsep
when the list environment starts a
paragraph. The default is 2pt plus1pt minus1pt
for 10pt
documents, 3pt plus1pt minus1pt
for 11pt
, and 3pt
plus2pt minus2pt
for 12pt
.
Especially for lists with short items, it may be desirable to elide +
Especially for lists with short items, it may be desirable to elide
space between items. Here is an example defining an itemize*
environment with no extra spacing between items, or between paragraphs
within a single item (\parskip
is not list-specific,
@@ -1838,7 +1855,7 @@ Up: Environments
letter
environment: writing lettersThis environment is used for creating letters. See Letters.
list
The list
environment is a generic environment which is used for
defining many of the more specific environments. It is seldom used in
documents, but often in macros.
@@ -1883,7 +1900,7 @@ Up: Environments
math
\begin{math} @@ -1905,7 +1922,7 @@ Up: Environments8.17
-minipage
\begin{minipage}[position][height][inner-pos]{width} text \end{minipage} @@ -1918,11 +1935,11 @@ other paragraph-making environments can be used inside a minipage.The arguments are the same as for
\parbox
(see \parbox). -By default, paragraphs are not indented in the
minipage
+By default, paragraphs are not indented in the
minipage
environment. You can restore indentation with a command such as\setlength{\parindent}{1pc}
command. -Footnotes in a
minipage
environment are handled in a way that is +Footnotes in a
minipage
environment are handled in a way that is particularly useful for putting footnotes in figures or tables. A\footnote
or\footnotetext
command puts the footnote at the bottom of the minipage instead of at the bottom of the page, and it @@ -1943,12 +1960,12 @@ Up: Environments8.18
-picture
\begin{picture}(width,height)(x offset,y offset) ... picture commands ... \end{picture}-The
picture
environment allows you to create just about any +The
picture
environment allows you to create just about any kind of picture you want containing text, lines, arrows and circles. You tell LaTeX where to put things in the picture by specifying their coordinates. A coordinate is a number that may have a decimal @@ -2005,7 +2022,7 @@ command. The command picture, with its reference point at coordinates (11.3,-.3). The reference points for various objects will be described below. -The
\put
command creates an LR box. You can put anything +The
\put
command creates an LR box. You can put anything that can go in an\mbox
(see \mbox) in the text argument of the\put
command. When you do this, the reference point will be the lower left corner of the box. @@ -2040,7 +2057,7 @@ Up: picture8.18.1
-\circle
\circle[*]{diameter}The
\circle
command produces a circle with a diameter as close @@ -2061,7 +2078,7 @@ Up: picture8.18.2
-\makebox
\makebox(width,height)[position]{...}
The
\makebox
command for the picture environment is similar to @@ -2096,7 +2113,7 @@ Up: picture8.18.3
-\framebox
\framebox(width,height)[pos]{...} @@ -2105,7 +2122,7 @@ Synopsis: section), except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box that it creates. -The
\framebox
command produces a rule of thickness +The
\framebox
command produces a rule of thickness\fboxrule
, and leaves a space\fboxsep
between the rule and the contents of the box. @@ -2121,7 +2138,7 @@ Up: picture8.18.4
-\dashbox
Draws a box with a dashed line. Synopsis:
\dashbox{dlen}(rwidth,rheight)[pos]{text} @@ -2146,7 +2163,7 @@ Up: picture8.18.5
-\frame
\frame{text} @@ -2167,7 +2184,7 @@ Up: picture8.18.6
-\line
\line(xslope,yslope){length} @@ -2192,7 +2209,7 @@ Up: picture8.18.7
-\linethickness
The
\linethickness{
dim}
command declares the thickness of horizontal and vertical lines in a picture environment to be dim, which must be a positive length. @@ -2212,7 +2229,7 @@ Up: picture8.18.8
-\thicklines
The
\thicklines
command is an alternate line thickness for horizontal and vertical lines in a picture environment; cf. \linethickness and \thinlines. @@ -2229,7 +2246,7 @@ Up: picture8.18.9
-\thinlines
The
\thinlines
command is the default line thickness for horizontal and vertical lines in a picture environment; cf. \linethickness and \thicklines. @@ -2246,7 +2263,7 @@ Up: picture8.18.10
-\multiput
\multiput(x,y)(delta_x,delta_y){n}{obj}@@ -2267,7 +2284,7 @@ Up: picture8.18.11
-\oval
\oval(width,height)[portion] @@ -2299,7 +2316,7 @@ Up: picture8.18.12
-\put
The
\put
command places the item specified by the mandatory @@ -2317,7 +2334,7 @@ Up: picture8.18.13
-\shortstack
\shortstack[position]{...\\...\\...} @@ -2331,7 +2348,7 @@ positions are:
c
Objects are separated with \\
.
+
Objects are separated with \\
.
\vector
\vector(x-slope,y-slope){length} @@ -2364,7 +2381,7 @@ Up: Environments8.19
-quotation
\begin{quotation} @@ -2389,7 +2406,7 @@ Up: Environments8.20
-quote
\begin{quote} @@ -2413,7 +2430,7 @@ Up: Environments8.21
-tabbing
\begin{tabbing} @@ -2433,29 +2450,29 @@ environment.The following commands can be used inside a
tabbing
enviroment:
\\
tabbing\\
tabbing\=
(tabbing)\=
(tabbing)\>
(tabbing)\>
(tabbing)\<
\<
\+
\+
\-
\-
\'
(tabbing)\'
(tabbing)\>
,
\<
, \'
, \\
, or \kill
command, to the right
of the previous column, flush against the current column's tab stop.
- \`
(tabbing)\`
(tabbing)\`
command moves all the
text that follows it, up to the \\
or \end{tabbing}
@@ -2463,21 +2480,21 @@ command that ends the line, to the right margin of the tabbing
environment. There must be no \>
or \'
command between
the \`
and the command that ends the line.
- \a
(tabbing)tabbing
environment, the commands \=
, \'
and
+ \a
(tabbing)tabbing
environment, the commands \=
, \'
and
\`
do not produce accents as usual (see Accents). Instead,
the commands \a=
, \a'
and \a`
are used.
- \kill
\\
+ \kill
\\
except that it throws away the current line instead of producing
output for it. The effect of any \=
, \+
or \-
commands in that line remain in effect.
- \poptabs
\pushtabs
.
+ \poptabs
\pushtabs
.
- \pushtabs
\pushtabs
tabbing
environment.
- \tabbingsep
\'
.
+ \tabbingsep
\'
.
table
\begin{table}[placement] @@ -2540,7 +2557,7 @@ Up: Environments8.23
-tabular
\begin{tabular}[pos]{cols} @@ -2558,7 +2575,7 @@ Synopsis:These environments produce a box consisting of a sequence of rows of items, aligned vertically in columns. -
\\
must be used to specify the end of each row of the table, +
\\
must be used to specify the end of each row of the table, except for the last, where it is optional—unless an\hline
command (to put a rule below the table) follows. @@ -2593,8 +2610,8 @@ intercolumn material.
@{
text}
\extracolsep{wd}
command in an @-expression causes
-an extra space of width wd
to appear to the left of all
+text. An \extracolsep{wd}
command in an @-expression
+causes an extra space of width wd
to appear to the left of all
subsequent columns, until countermanded by another \extracolsep
command. Unlike ordinary intercolumn space, this extra space is not
suppressed by an @-expression. An \extracolsep
command can be
@@ -2624,17 +2641,17 @@ which may contain another *-expression
.
\arrayrulewidth
|
, \hline
, and
+\arrayrulewidth
|
, \hline
, and
\vline
in the tabular
and array
environments; the
default is ‘.4pt’.
- \arraystretch
tabular
and array
+ \arraystretch
tabular
and array
environments; default is ‘1’, for no scaling.
- \doublerulesep
||
+ \doublerulesep
||
in the tabular
and array
environments; default is ‘2pt’.
- \tabcolsep
\tabcolsep
\multicolumn
\multicolumn{cols}{pos}{text}@@ -2691,7 +2708,7 @@ Up: tabular
\cline
\cline{i-j} @@ -2712,7 +2729,7 @@ Up: tabular8.23.3
-\hline
The
\hline
command draws a horizontal line the width of the enclosingtabular
orarray
environment. It's most commonly used to draw a line at the top, bottom, and between the rows @@ -2729,7 +2746,7 @@ Up: tabular8.23.4
-\vline
The
\vline
command will draw a vertical line extending the full height and depth of its row. An\hfill
command can be used to move the line to the edge of the column. It can also be used in an @@ -2746,7 +2763,7 @@ Up: Environments8.24
-thebibliography
\begin{thebibliography}{widest-label} @@ -2788,7 +2805,7 @@ Up: thebibliography8.24.1
-\bibitem
\bibitem[label]{cite_key}@@ -2817,7 +2834,7 @@ Up: thebibliography8.24.2
-\cite
\cite[subcite]{keys @@ -2843,7 +2860,7 @@ Up: thebibliography8.24.3
-\nocite
The
\nocite
command produces no text, but writeskey_list
, @@ -2859,7 +2876,7 @@ Up: thebibliography8.24.4 Using BibTeX
-If you use the BibTeX program by Oren Patashnik (highly recommended if you need a bibliography of more than a couple of titles) to maintain your bibliography, you don't use the @@ -2904,7 +2921,7 @@ Up: Environments
8.25
-theorem
\begin{theorem} @@ -2927,7 +2944,7 @@ Up: Environments8.26
-titlepage
\begin{titlepage} @@ -2954,7 +2971,7 @@ Up: Environments8.27
-verbatim
\begin{verbatim} @@ -2983,7 +3000,7 @@ Up: verbatim8.27.1
-\verb
\verbcharliteral-textchar @@ -2995,7 +3012,7 @@ including special characters and spaces, using the typewriter\verb*
and the delimiter char, which begins and ends the verbatim text. The delimiter must not appear in literal-text. -The
*
-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a +The
*
-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a “visible space” character.@@ -3008,7 +3025,7 @@ Up: Environments8.28
-verse
\begin{verse} @@ -3020,1075 +3037,1097 @@ Synopsis:-The
verse
environment is designed for poetry, though you may find other uses for it. -The margins are indented on the left and the right, paragraphs are not +
The margins are indented on the left and the right, paragraphs are not indented, and the text is not justified. Separate the lines of each stanza with
\\
, and use one or more blank lines to separate the stanzas.- +-
-Next: Definitions, -Previous: Page breaking, +Next: Page breaking, +Previous: Environments, Up: Top9 Footnotes
+9 Line breaking
--Footnotes can be produced in one of two ways. They can be produced -with one command, the
\footnote
command. They can also be -produced with two commands, the\footnotemark
and the -\footnotetext
commands. ++The first thing LaTeX does when processing ordinary text is to +translate your input file into a sequence of glyphs and spaces. To +produce a printed document, this sequence must be broken into lines +(and these lines must be broken into pages). + +
LaTeX usually does the line (and page) breaking for you, but in +some environments, you do the line breaking yourself with the +
\\
command, and you can always manually force breaks.9.1
- -\footnote
9.1
-\\
[*][morespace]\footnote[number]{text} --The
\footnote
command places the numbered footnote text -at the bottom of the current page. The optional argument number -changes the default footnote number. ++The
\\
command tells LaTeX to start a new line. It has an +optional argument, morespace, that specifies how much extra +vertical space is to be inserted before the next line. This can be a +negative amount. -This command can only be used in outer paragraph mode; i.e., you -cannot use it in sectioning commands like
\chapter
, in figures, -tables or in atabular
environment. (See following sections.) - +The
\\*
command is the same as the ordinary\\
command +except that it tells LaTeX not to start a new page after the line.- - + +-
-Next: \footnotetext, -Previous: \footnote, -Up: Footnotes +Next: \newline, +Previous: \\, +Up: Line breaking9.2
- -\footnotemark
-With no optional argument, the
\footnotemark
command puts the -current footnote number in the text. This command can be used in -inner paragraph mode. You give the text of the footnote separately, -with the\footnotetext
command. +9.2
-\obeycr
&\restorecr
This command can be used to produce several consecutive footnote -markers referring to the same footnote with +
+The
\obeycr
command makes a return in the input file +(‘^^M’, internally) the same as\\
(followed by +\relax
). So each new line in the input will also be a new line +in the output. -\footnotemark[\value{footnote}] --after the first
\footnote
command. +
\restorecr
restores normal line-breaking behavior.- - + +-
-Next: Footnote parameters, -Previous: \footnotemark, -Up: Footnotes +Next: \- (hyphenation), +Previous: \obeycr & \restorecr, +Up: Line breaking9.3
- -\footnotetext
\footnotetext[number]{text} --The
\footnotetext
command places text at the bottom of -the page as a footnote. This command can come anywhere after the -\footnotemark
command. The\footnotetext
command must -appear in outer paragraph mode. +9.3
-\newline
The optional argument number changes the default footnote number. +
+The
\newline
command breaks the line at the present point, with +no stretching of the text before it. It can only be used in paragraph +mode.- + +-
-Previous: \footnotetext, -Up: Footnotes +Next: \fussy, +Previous: \newline, +Up: Line breaking9.4 Footnote parameters
- --
+\footnoterule
- Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the page's -footnotes. Default dimensions:
0.4pt
thick (or wide), and -0.4\columnwidth
long in the standard document classes (except -slides, where it does not appear). +9.4
-\-
(discretionary hyphen)\footnotesep
- The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote. By -default, this is set to the normal strut for
\footnotesize
-fonts (see Font sizes), therefore there is no extra space between -footnotes. This is ‘6.65pt’ for ‘10pt’, ‘7.7pt’ for -‘11pt’, and ‘8.4pt’ for ‘12pt’. ++The
\-
command tells LaTeX that it may hyphenate the word at +that point. LaTeX is very good at hyphenating, and it will usually +find most of the correct hyphenation points, and almost never use an +incorrect one. The\-
command is used for the exceptional +cases. -When you insert
\-
commands in a word, the word will only be +hyphenated at those points and not at any of the hyphenation points +that LaTeX might otherwise have chosen.- + +-
-Next: Counters, -Previous: Footnotes, -Up: Top +Next: \sloppy, +Previous: \- (hyphenation), +Up: Line breaking10 Definitions
+9.5
-\fussy
-LaTeX has support for making new commands of many different kinds. +
+The declaration
+\fussy
(which is the default) makes TeX +picky about line breaking. This usually avoids too much space between +words, at the cost of an occasional overfull box. - -This command cancels the effect of a previous
\sloppy
command +(see \sloppy.- - + +-
-Next: \newcounter, -Up: Definitions +Next: \hyphenation, +Previous: \fussy, +Up: Line breaking10.1
- -\newcommand
&\renewcommand
-
\newcommand
and\renewcommand
define and redefine a -command, respectively. Synopses: - -\newcommand{cmd}[nargs]{defn} - \renewcommand{cmd}[nargs]{defn} - \newcommand{cmd}[nargs][default]{defn} - \renewcommand{cmd}[nargs][default]{defn} ---
+- cmd
- The command name beginning with
\
. For\newcommand
, it -must not be already defined and must not begin with\end
; for -\renewcommand
, it must already be defined. - -- nargs
- An optional integer from 1 to 9 specifying the number of arguments -that the command will take. The default is for the command to have no -arguments. - -
- default
- If this optional parameter is present, it means that the command's -first argument is optional. When the new command is called, the -default value of the optional argument (i.e., if it is not specified -in the call) is the string ‘def’. +
9.6
-\sloppy
- defn
- The text to be substituted for every occurrence of
cmd
; a -construct of the form#
n in defn is replaced by the -text of the nth argument. +The declaration
\sloppy
makes TeX less fussy about line +breaking. This will avoid overfull boxes, at the cost of loose +interword spacing. -Lasts until a
\fussy
command is issued (see \fussy).- - + +-
-Next: \newlength, -Previous: \newcommand & \renewcommand, -Up: Definitions +Next: \linebreak & \nolinebreak, +Previous: \sloppy, +Up: Line breaking10.2
+\newcounter
9.7
-\hyphenation
\newcounter{cnt}[countername] +\hyphenation{word-one word-two}-The
\newcounter
command defines a new counter named cnt. -The new counter is initialized to zero. - -Given the optional argument
[
countername]
, cnt -will be reset whenever countername is incremented. - -See Counters, for more information about counters. +
The
\hyphenation
command declares allowed hyphenation points +with a-
character in the given words. The words are separated +by spaces. TeX will only hyphenate if the word matches exactly, no +inflections are tried. Multiple\hyphenation
commands +accumulate. Some examples (the default TeX hyphenation patterns +misses the hyphenations in these words): -- - +\hyphenation{ap-pen-dix col-umns data-base data-bases} +++ +-
-Next: \newsavebox, -Previous: \newcounter, -Up: Definitions +Previous: \hyphenation, +Up: Line breaking10.3
+\newlength
9.8
-\linebreak
&\nolinebreak
\newlength{\arg} +\linebreak[priority] + \nolinebreak[priority]-The
\newlength
command defines the mandatory argument as a -length
command with a value of0in
. The argument must -be a control sequence, as in\newlength{\foo}
. An error -occurs if\foo
is already defined. +By default, the
\linebreak
(\nolinebreak
) command forces +(prevents) a line break at the current position. For +\linebreak
, the spaces in the line are stretched out so that it +extends to the right margin as usual. -See Lengths, for how to set the new length to a nonzero value, and -for more information about lengths in general. +
With the optional argument priority, you can convert the command +from a demand to a request. The priority must be a number from +0 to 4. The higher the number, the more insistent the request.
- - +-
-Next: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment, -Previous: \newlength, -Up: Definitions +Next: Footnotes, +Previous: Line breaking, +Up: Top10.4
+\newsavebox
10 Page breaking
-+LaTeX starts new pages asynchronously, when enough material has +accumulated to fill up a page. Usually this happens automatically, +but sometimes you may want to influence the breaks. -
\newsavebox{cmd} --Defines
\
cmd, which must be a command name not already -defined, to refer to a new bin for storing boxes. +- - + +-
-Next: \newtheorem, -Previous: \newsavebox, -Up: Definitions +Next: \clearpage, +Up: Page breaking10.5
- -\newenvironment
&\renewenvironment
\newenvironment{env}[nargs]{begdef}{enddef} - \newenvironment{env}[nargs][default]{begdef}{enddef} - \renewenvironment{env}[nargs]{begdef}{enddef} --These commands define or redefine an environment env, that is, -
\begin{
env} ... \end{
env}
. - --
+- env
- The name of the environment. For
\newenvironment
, env -must not be an existing environment, and the command\
env -must be undefined. For\renewenvironment
, env must be -the name of an existing environment. +10.1
-\cleardoublepage
- nargs
- An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of -the newly-defined environment. The default is no arguments. +
+The
\cleardoublepage
command ends the current page and causes all +figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed. +In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the next page a right-hand +(odd-numbered) page, producing a blank page if necessary. -- default
- If this is specified, the first argument is optional, and default -gives the default value for that argument. +
+ + +-
+Next: \newpage, +Previous: \cleardoublepage, +Up: Page breaking -- begdef
- The text expanded at every occurrence of
\begin{
env}
; a -construct of the form#
n in begdef is replaced by -the text of the nth argument. +- enddef
- The text expanded at every occurrence of
\end{
env}
. It -may not contain any argument parameters. +10.2
-\clearpage
+The
\clearpage
command ends the current page and causes all +figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed.- - + +-
-Next: \newfont, -Previous: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment, -Up: Definitions +Next: \enlargethispage, +Previous: \clearpage, +Up: Page breaking10.6
+\newtheorem
10.3
-\newpage
\newtheorem{newenv}{label}[within] - \newtheorem{newenv}[numbered_like]{label} --This command defines a theorem-like environment. Arguments: +
+The
\newpage
command ends the current page, but does not clear +floats (see\clearpage
above). --
+- newenv
- The name of the environment to be defined; must not be the name of an -existing environment or otherwise defined. +
+ + +-
+Next: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak, +Previous: \newpage, +Up: Page breaking -- label
- The text printed at the beginning of the environment, before the -number. For example, ‘Theorem’. +
- numbered_like
- (Optional.) The name of an already defined theorem-like environment; -the new environment will be numbered just like numbered_like. +
10.4
-\enlargethispage
- within
- (Optional.) The name of an already defined counter, a sectional unit. -The new theorem counter will be reset at the same time as the -within counter. +
\enlargethispage*{size}
-At most one of numbered_like and within can be specified, -not both. +
Enlarge the
\textheight
for the current page by the specified +amount; e.g.\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
will allow one +additional line. + +The starred form tries to squeeze the material together on the page as +much as possible. This is normally used together with an explicit +
\pagebreak
.- - + +-
-Next: \protect, -Previous: \newtheorem, -Up: Definitions +Previous: \enlargethispage, +Up: Page breaking10.7
+\newfont
10.5
-\pagebreak
&\nopagebreak
\newfont{cmd}{fontname} +-\pagebreak[priority] + \nopagebreak[priority]-Defines a control sequence
\
cmd, which must not already -be defined, to make fontname be the current font. The file -looked for on the system is named fontname.tfm. +By default, the
\pagebreak
(\nopagebreak
) command forces +(prevents) a page break at the current position. For +\linebreak
, the vertical space on the page is stretched out +where possible so that it extends to the normal bottom margin. -This is a low-level command for setting up to use an individual font. -More commonly, fonts are defined in families through .fd files. +
With the optional argument priority, you can convert the +
-\pagebreak
command from a demand to a request. The number must +be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the number, the more +insistent the request is.10.8
- -\protect
-Footnotes, line breaks, any command that has an optional argument, and -many more are so-called fragile commands. When a fragile -command is used in certain contexts, called moving arguments, it -must be preceded by
\protect
. In addition, any fragile -commands within the arguments must have their own\protect
. - -Some examples of moving arguments are
\caption
-(see figure),\thanks
(see \maketitle), and -expressions intabular
andarray
environments -(see tabular). +11 Footnotes
-Commands which are not fragile are called robust. They must not -be preceded by
\protect
. ++Footnotes can be produced in one of two ways. They can be produced +with one command, the
\footnote
command. They can also be +produced with two commands, the\footnotemark
and the +\footnotetext
commands. -See also: +
- -
http://www-h.eng.cam.ac.uk/help/tpl/textprocessing/teTeX/latex/latex2e-html/fragile.html
-
http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=protect
-11 Counters
+11.1
-\footnote
-Everything LaTeX numbers for you has a counter associated with -it. The name of the counter is the same as the name of the environment -or command that produces the number, except with no
\
. -(enumi
–enumiv
are used for the nested enumerate -environment.) Below is a list of the counters used in LaTeX's -standard document classes to control numbering. +part paragraph figure enumi - chapter subparagraph table enumii - section page footnote enumiii - subsection equation mpfootnote enumiv - subsubsection ++\footnote[number]{text}-The
\footnote
command places the numbered footnote text +at the bottom of the current page. The optional argument number +changes the default footnote number. + +This command can only be used in outer paragraph mode; i.e., you +cannot use it in sectioning commands like
\chapter
, in figures, +tables or in atabular
environment. (See following sections.) +- - + +-
-Next: \usecounter, -Up: Counters +Next: \footnotetext, +Previous: \footnote, +Up: Footnotes11.1
+\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol
: Printing counters11.2
-\footnotemark
All of these commands take a single counter as an argument, for -instance,
\alph{enumi}
. ++With no optional argument, the
\footnotemark
command puts the +current footnote number in the text. This command can be used in +inner paragraph mode. You give the text of the footnote separately, +with the\footnotetext
command. --
+\alph
- prints counter using lowercase letters: `a', `b', ... +
This command can be used to produce several consecutive footnote +markers referring to the same footnote with -
\Alph
- uses uppercase letters: `A', `B', ... +
\footnotemark[\value{footnote}] ++after the first
\footnote
command. -\arabic
- uses Arabic numbers: `1', `2', ... +
+ + +-
+Next: Symbolic footnotes, +Previous: \footnotemark, +Up: Footnotes -\roman
- uses lowercase roman numerals: `i', `ii', ... +
\roman
- uses uppercase roman numerals: `I', `II', ... +
11.3
-\footnotetext
\fnsymbol
- prints the value of counter in a specific sequence of nine -symbols (conventionally used for labeling footnotes). The value of -counter must be between 1 and 9, inclusive. +
The symbols mostly aren't supported in Info, but here are the names: -
asterix(*) dagger ddagger section-sign paragraph-sign parallel - double-asterix(**) double-dagger double-ddagger +\footnotetext[number]{text}-The
\footnotetext
command places text at the bottom of +the page as a footnote. This command can come anywhere after the +\footnotemark
command. The\footnotetext
command must +appear in outer paragraph mode. + +The optional argument number changes the default footnote number.
- - +-
-Next: \value, -Previous: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol, -Up: Counters +Next: Footnote parameters, +Previous: \footnotetext, +Up: Footnotes11.2
+\usecounter{
counter}
11.4 Symbolic footnotes
-If you want to use symbols for footnotes, rather than increasing +numbers, redefine
\thefootnote
like this: -\usecounter{counter} +\renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}-The
\usecounter
command is used in the second argument of the -list
environment to specify counter to be used to number -the list items. +The
\fnsymbol
command produces a predefined series of symbols +(see \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol). If you want to +use a different symbol as your footnote mark, you'll need to also +redefine\@fnsymbol
.- - +-
-Next: \setcounter, -Previous: \usecounter, -Up: Counters +Previous: Symbolic footnotes, +Up: Footnotes11.3
+\value{
counter}
11.5 Footnote parameters
-+
\footnoterule
- Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the page's +footnotes. Default dimensions:
0.4pt
thick (or wide), and +0.4\columnwidth
long in the standard document classes (except +slides, where it does not appear). -\value{counter} --The
\value
command produces the value of counter. It can -be used anywhere LaTeX expects a number, for example: +\footnotesep
- The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote. By +default, this is set to the normal strut for
\footnotesize
+fonts (see Font sizes), therefore there is no extra space between +footnotes. This is ‘6.65pt’ for ‘10pt’, ‘7.7pt’ for +‘11pt’, and ‘8.4pt’ for ‘12pt’. -\setcounter{myctr}{3} - \addtocounter{myctr}{1} - \hspace{\value{myctr}\parindent} --- - + + ++-
-Next: \addtocounter, -Previous: \value, -Up: Counters +Next: Counters, +Previous: Footnotes, +Up: Top11.4
+\setcounter{
counter}{
value}
12 Definitions
-+LaTeX has support for making new commands of many different kinds. -
\setcounter{\counter}{value} --The
\setcounter
command sets the value of \counter to the -value argument. + +- - + +-
-Next: \refstepcounter, -Previous: \setcounter, -Up: Counters +Next: \newcounter, +Up: Definitions11.5
+\addtocounter{
counter}{
value}
12.1
-\newcommand
&\renewcommand
-The
\addtocounter
command increments counter by the -amount specified by the value argument, which may be negative. ++
\newcommand
and\renewcommand
define and redefine a +command, respectively. Synopses: + +\newcommand{cmd}[nargs]{defn} + \renewcommand{cmd}[nargs]{defn} + \newcommand{cmd}[nargs][default]{defn} + \renewcommand{cmd}[nargs][default]{defn} +++
- cmd
- The command name beginning with
\
. For\newcommand
, it +must not be already defined and must not begin with\end
; for +\renewcommand
, it must already be defined. + +- nargs
- An optional integer from 1 to 9 specifying the number of arguments +that the command will take. The default is for the command to have no +arguments. + +
- default
- If this optional parameter is present, it means that the command's +first argument is optional. When the new command is called, the +default value of the optional argument (i.e., if it is not specified +in the call) is the string ‘def’. + +
- defn
- The text to be substituted for every occurrence of
cmd
; a +construct of the form#
n in defn is replaced by the +text of the nth argument. + +- - + +-
-Next: \stepcounter, -Previous: \addtocounter, -Up: Counters +Next: \newlength, +Previous: \newcommand & \renewcommand, +Up: Definitions11.6
+\refstepcounter{
counter}
12.2
-\newcounter
-The
\refstepcounter
command works in the same way as -\stepcounter
See \stepcounter, except it also defines the -current\ref
value to be the result of\thecounter
. +\newcounter{cnt}[countername] ++The
\newcounter
command defines a new counter named cnt. +The new counter is initialized to zero. + +Given the optional argument
[
countername]
, cnt +will be reset whenever countername is incremented. + +See Counters, for more information about counters.
- - + +-
-Next: \day \month \year, -Previous: \refstepcounter, -Up: Counters +Next: \newsavebox, +Previous: \newcounter, +Up: Definitions11.7
+\stepcounter{
counter}
12.3
-\newlength
-The
\stepcounter
command adds one to counter and -resets all subsidiary counters. +\newlength{\arg} ++The
\newlength
command defines the mandatory argument as a +length
command with a value of0in
. The argument must +be a control sequence, as in\newlength{\foo}
. An error +occurs if\foo
is already defined. + +See Lengths, for how to set the new length to a nonzero value, and +for more information about lengths in general.
- - + +-
-Previous: \stepcounter, -Up: Counters +Next: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment, +Previous: \newlength, +Up: Definitions11.8
+\day \month \year
: Predefined counters12.4
-\newsavebox
-LaTeX defines counters for the day of the month (
\day
, -1–31), month of the year (\month
, 1–12), and year -(\year
, Common Era). When TeX starts up, they are -set to the current values on the system where TeX is running. They -are not updated as the job progresses. +The related command
\today
produces a string representing the -current day (see \today). +\newsavebox{cmd} ++Defines
\
cmd, which must be a command name not already +defined, to refer to a new bin for storing boxes.- + +-
-Next: Making paragraphs, -Previous: Counters, -Up: Top +Next: \newtheorem, +Previous: \newsavebox, +Up: Definitions12 Lengths
+12.5
-\newenvironment
&\renewenvironment
-A
+length
is a measure of distance. Many LaTeX commands take a -length as an argument. +\newenvironment{env}[nargs]{begdef}{enddef} + \newenvironment{env}[nargs][default]{begdef}{enddef} + \renewenvironment{env}[nargs]{begdef}{enddef} ++These commands define or redefine an environment env, that is, +
\begin{
env} ... \end{
env}
. + ++
- env
- The name of the environment. For
\newenvironment
, env +must not be an existing environment, and the command\
env +must be undefined. For\renewenvironment
, env must be +the name of an existing environment. + +- nargs
- An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of +the newly-defined environment. The default is no arguments. + +
- default
- If this is specified, the first argument is optional, and default +gives the default value for that argument. + +
- begdef
- The text expanded at every occurrence of
\begin{
env}
; a +construct of the form#
n in begdef is replaced by +the text of the nth argument. + +- enddef
- The text expanded at every occurrence of
\end{
env}
. It +may not contain any argument parameters. + +- - + +-
-Next: \addtolength, -Up: Lengths +Next: \newfont, +Previous: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment, +Up: Definitions12.1
+\setlength{\
len}{
value}
12.6
-\newtheorem
-The
\setlength
sets the value of \len to the value -argument, which can be expressed in any units that LaTeX -understands, i.e., inches (in
), millimeters (mm
), points -(pt
), big points (bp
, etc. +\newtheorem{newenv}{label}[within] + \newtheorem{newenv}[numbered_like]{label} ++This command defines a theorem-like environment. Arguments: -
- - -+
-Next: \settodepth, -Previous: \setlength, -Up: Lengths ++
- newenv
- The name of the environment to be defined; must not be the name of an +existing environment or otherwise defined. + +
- label
- The text printed at the beginning of the environment, before the +number. For example, ‘Theorem’. + +
- numbered_like
- (Optional.) The name of an already defined theorem-like environment; +the new environment will be numbered just like numbered_like. -
- within
- (Optional.) The name of an already defined counter, a sectional unit. +The new theorem counter will be reset at the same time as the +within counter. -
12.2 \addtolength{\len}{amount}
+ --The
\addtolength
command increments a “length command” -\len by the amount specified in the amount argument, which -may be negative. +At most one of numbered_like and within can be specified, +not both.
- - + +-
-Next: \settoheight, -Previous: \addtolength, -Up: Lengths +Next: \protect, +Previous: \newtheorem, +Up: Definitions12.3
+\settodepth
12.7
-\newfont
The
\settodepth
command sets the value of alength
command -equal to the depth of thetext
argument. +\newfont{cmd}{fontname} ++Defines a control sequence
\
cmd, which must not already +be defined, to make fontname be the current font. The file +looked for on the system is named fontname.tfm. + +This is a low-level command for setting up to use an individual font. +More commonly, fonts are defined in families through .fd files.
- - + +-
-Next: \settowidth, -Previous: \settodepth, -Up: Lengths +Previous: \newfont, +Up: Definitions12.4
- -\settoheight
-
\settoheight{\gnat}{text}
- -The
\settoheight
command sets the value of alength
command -equal to the height of thetext
argument. +12.8
-\protect
- - -+
-Next: Predefined lengths, -Previous: \settoheight, -Up: Lengths ++Footnotes, line breaks, any command that has an optional argument, and +many more are so-called fragile commands. When a fragile +command is used in certain contexts, called moving arguments, it +must be preceded by
\protect
. In addition, any fragile +commands within the arguments must have their own\protect
. -Some examples of moving arguments are
\caption
+(see figure),\thanks
(see \maketitle), and +expressions intabular
andarray
environments +(see tabular). -12.5
+\settowidth{\
len}{
text}
Commands which are not fragile are called robust. They must not +be preceded by
\protect
. --The
\settowidth
command sets the value of the command \len -to the width of the text argument. +See also: +
+ -
http://www-h.eng.cam.ac.uk/help/tpl/textprocessing/teTeX/latex/latex2e-html/fragile.html
+
http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=protect
+12.6 Predefined lengths
+13 Counters
--
\width
- -\height
- -\depth
- -\totalheight
- -These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the box-making -commands (see Boxes). They specify the natural width etc. of the -text in the box.\totalheight
equals\height
+ -\depth
. To make a box with the text stretched to double the -natural size, e.g., say ++Everything LaTeX numbers for you has a counter associated with +it. The name of the counter is the same as the name of the environment +or command that produces the number, except with no
\
. +(enumi
–enumiv
are used for the nested enumerate +environment.) Below is a list of the counters used in LaTeX's +standard document classes to control numbering. -
\makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}
+part paragraph figure enumi + chapter subparagraph table enumii + section page footnote enumiii + subsection equation mpfootnote enumiv + subsubsection ++ -13 Line breaking
+13.1
-\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol
: Printing counters-The first thing LaTeX does when processing ordinary text is to -translate your input file into a sequence of glyphs and spaces. To -produce a printed document, this sequence must be broken into lines -(and these lines must be broken into pages). +
All of these commands take a single counter as an argument, for +instance,
\alph{enumi}
. -LaTeX usually does the line (and page) breaking for you, but in -some environments, you do the line breaking yourself with the -
\\
command, and you can always manually force breaks. ++
\alph
- prints counter using lowercase letters: `a', `b', ... -
+\Alph
- uses uppercase letters: `A', `B', ... - +
\roman
- uses lowercase roman numerals: `i', `ii', ... -
13.1
+\\
[*][morespace]\roman
- uses uppercase roman numerals: `I', `II', ... -
-The
\\
command tells LaTeX to start a new line. It has an -optional argument, morespace, that specifies how much extra -vertical space is to be inserted before the next line. This can be a -negative amount. +\fnsymbol
- prints the value of counter in a specific sequence of nine +symbols (conventionally used for labeling footnotes). The value of +counter must be between 1 and 9, inclusive. -
The
\\*
command is the same as the ordinary\\
command -except that it tells LaTeX not to start a new page after the line. +The symbols mostly aren't supported in Info, but here are the names: +
asterix(*) dagger ddagger section-sign paragraph-sign parallel + double-asterix(**) double-dagger double-ddagger ++- - + +-
-Next: \newline, -Previous: \\, -Up: Line breaking +Next: \value, +Previous: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol, +Up: Counters13.2
+\obeycr
&\restorecr
13.2
-\usecounter{
counter}
-The
\obeycr
command makes a return in the input file -(‘^^M’, internally) the same as\\
(followed by -\relax
). So each new line in the input will also be a new line -in the output. +
\restorecr
restores normal line-breaking behavior. +\usecounter{counter} ++The
\usecounter
command is used in the second argument of the +list
environment to specify counter to be used to number +the list items.- - + +-
-Next: \- (hyphenation), -Previous: \obeycr & \restorecr, -Up: Line breaking +Next: \setcounter, +Previous: \usecounter, +Up: Counters13.3
+\newline
13.3
-\value{
counter}
-The
\newline
command breaks the line at the present point, with -no stretching of the text before it. It can only be used in paragraph -mode. +- - +\value{counter} ++The
\value
command produces the value of counter. It can +be used anywhere LaTeX expects a number, for example: + +\setcounter{myctr}{3} + \addtocounter{myctr}{1} + \hspace{\value{myctr}\parindent} +++ +-
-Next: \fussy, -Previous: \newline, -Up: Line breaking +Next: \addtocounter, +Previous: \value, +Up: Counters13.4
+\-
(discretionary hyphen)13.4
-\setcounter{
counter}{
value}
-The
\-
command tells LaTeX that it may hyphenate the word at -that point. LaTeX is very good at hyphenating, and it will usually -find most of the correct hyphenation points, and almost never use an -incorrect one. The\-
command is used for the exceptional -cases. +When you insert
\-
commands in a word, the word will only be -hyphenated at those points and not at any of the hyphenation points -that LaTeX might otherwise have chosen. +\setcounter{\counter}{value} ++The
\setcounter
command sets the value of \counter to the +value argument.- - + +-
-Next: \hyphenation, -Previous: \- (hyphenation), -Up: Line breaking +Next: \refstepcounter, +Previous: \setcounter, +Up: Counters13.5
- -\fussy
-The declaration
\fussy
(which is the default) makes TeX -picky about line breaking. This usually avoids too much space between -words, at the cost of an occasional overfull box. +13.5
-\addtocounter{
counter}{
value}
This command cancels the effect of a previous
\sloppy
command -(see \sloppy. ++The
\addtocounter
command increments counter by the +amount specified by the value argument, which may be negative.- - + +-
-Previous: \linebreak & \nolinebreak, -Up: Line breaking +Next: \stepcounter, +Previous: \addtocounter, +Up: Counters13.6
- -\sloppy
The declaration
\sloppy
makes TeX less fussy about line -breaking. This will avoid overfull boxes, at the cost of loose -interword spacing. +13.6
-\refstepcounter{
counter}
Lasts until a
\fussy
command is issued (see \fussy). ++The
\refstepcounter
command works in the same way as +\stepcounter
See \stepcounter, except it also defines the +current\ref
value to be the result of\thecounter
.- - + +-
-Next: \linebreak & \nolinebreak, -Previous: \fussy, -Up: Line breaking +Next: \day \month \year, +Previous: \refstepcounter, +Up: Counters13.7
- -\hyphenation
13.7
-\stepcounter{
counter}
\hyphenation{word-one word-two} --The
\hyphenation
command declares allowed hyphenation points -with a-
character in the given words. The words are separated -by spaces. TeX will only hyphenate if the word matches exactly, no -inflections are tried. Multiple\hyphenation
commands -accumulate. Some examples (the default TeX hyphenation patterns -misses the hyphenations in these words): ++The
\stepcounter
command adds one to counter and +resets all subsidiary counters. -\hyphenation{ap-pen-dix col-umns data-base data-bases} --- - ++ +-
-Next: \sloppy, -Previous: \hyphenation, -Up: Line breaking +Previous: \stepcounter, +Up: Counters13.8
- -\linebreak
&\nolinebreak
13.8
-\day \month \year
: Predefined counters\linebreak[priority] - \nolinebreak[priority] --By default, the
\linebreak
(\nolinebreak
) command forces -(prevents) a line break at the current position. For -\linebreak
, the spaces in the line are stretched out so that it -extends to the right margin as usual. ++LaTeX defines counters for the day of the month (
\day
, +1–31), month of the year (\month
, 1–12), and year +(\year
, Common Era). When TeX starts up, they are +set to the current values on the system where TeX is running. They +are not updated as the job progresses. -With the optional argument priority, you can convert the command -from a demand to a request. The priority must be a number from -0 to 4. The higher the number, the more insistent the request. +
The related command
\today
produces a string representing the +current day (see \today).- +-
-Next: Footnotes, -Previous: Line breaking, +Next: Making paragraphs, +Previous: Counters, Up: Top14 Page breaking
+14 Lengths
--LaTeX starts new pages asynchronously, when enough material has -accumulated to fill up a page. Usually this happens automatically, -but sometimes you may want to influence the breaks. +
+A
-length
is a measure of distance. Many LaTeX commands take a +length as an argument.14.1
+\cleardoublepage
14.1
-\setlength{\
len}{
value}
-The
\cleardoublepage
command ends the current page and causes all -figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed. -In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the next page a right-hand -(odd-numbered) page, producing a blank page if necessary. ++The
\setlength
sets the value of \len to the value +argument, which can be expressed in any units that LaTeX +understands, i.e., inches (in
), millimeters (mm
), points +(pt
), big points (bp
, etc.- - + +-
-Next: \newpage, -Previous: \cleardoublepage, -Up: Page breaking +Next: \settodepth, +Previous: \setlength, +Up: Lengths14.2
+\clearpage
14.2 \addtolength{\len}{amount}
--The
\clearpage
command ends the current page and causes all -figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed. ++The
\addtolength
command increments a “length command” +\len by the amount specified in the amount argument, which +may be negative.- - + +-
-Next: \enlargethispage, -Previous: \clearpage, -Up: Page breaking +Next: \settoheight, +Previous: \addtolength, +Up: Lengths14.3
+\newpage
14.3
-\settodepth
-The
\newpage
command ends the current page, but does not clear -floats (see\clearpage
above). +The
\settodepth
command sets the value of alength
command +equal to the depth of thetext
argument.- - + +-
-Next: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak, -Previous: \newpage, -Up: Page breaking +Next: \settowidth, +Previous: \settodepth, +Up: Lengths14.4
+\enlargethispage
14.4
-\settoheight
\enlargethispage*{size}
+The
\settoheight
command sets the value of alength
command +equal to the height of thetext
argument. -Enlarge the
\textheight
for the current page by the specified -amount; e.g.\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
will allow one -additional line. ++ + ++ +
+Next: Predefined lengths, +Previous: \settoheight, +Up: Lengths -The starred form tries to squeeze the material together on the page as -much as possible. This is normally used together with an explicit -
\pagebreak
. +14.5
+ +\settowidth{\
len}{
text}
+The
-\settowidth
command sets the value of the command \len +to the width of the text argument.14.5
- -\pagebreak
&\nopagebreak
14.6 Predefined lengths
-\pagebreak[priority] - \nopagebreak[priority] --By default, the
\pagebreak
(\nopagebreak
) command forces -(prevents) a page break at the current position. For -\linebreak
, the vertical space on the page is stretched out -where possible so that it extends to the normal bottom margin. ++
\width
+ +\height
+ +\depth
+ +\totalheight
+ +These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the box-making +commands (see Boxes). They specify the natural width etc. of the +text in the box.\totalheight
equals\height
+ +\depth
. To make a box with the text stretched to double the +natural size, e.g., say -With the optional argument priority, you can convert the -
\pagebreak
command from a demand to a request. The number must -be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the number, the more -insistent the request is. +
\makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}
@@ -4101,7 +4140,7 @@ Up: Top15 Making paragraphs
-A paragraph is ended by one or more completely blank lines—lines not containing even a
%
. A blank line should not appear where a new paragraph cannot be started, such as in math mode or in the argument of @@ -4125,7 +4164,7 @@ Up: Making paragraphs15.1
-\indent
\indent
produces a horizontal space whose width equals the width of the\parindent
length, the normal paragraph indentation. It is used to add paragraph indentation where it would @@ -4147,7 +4186,7 @@ Up: Making paragraphs15.2
-\noindent
When used at the beginning of the paragraph,
\noindent
suppresses any paragraph indentation. It has no effect when used in the middle of a paragraph. @@ -4164,7 +4203,7 @@ Up: Making paragraphs15.3
-\parskip
\parskip
is a rubber length defining extra vertical space added before each paragraph. The default is0pt plus1pt
. @@ -4178,7 +4217,7 @@ Up: Making paragraphs15.4 Marginal notes
-\marginpar[left]{right} @@ -4196,7 +4235,7 @@ will be placed- in the nearest margin for two-column layout. -
The command
\reversemarginpar
places subsequent marginal notes +The command
\reversemarginpar
places subsequent marginal notes in the opposite (inside) margin.\normalmarginpar
places them in the default position. @@ -4209,13 +4248,13 @@ hyphenation there by beginning the node with\hspace{0pt}
.These parameters affect the formatting of the note:
-
\marginparpush
- Minimum vertical space between notes; default ‘7pt’ for +
\marginparpush
- Minimum vertical space between notes; default ‘7pt’ for ‘12pt’ documents, ‘5pt’ else. -
\marginparsep
- Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default +
\marginparsep
- Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default ‘11pt’ for ‘10pt’ documents, ‘10pt’ else. -
\marginparwidth
- Width of the note itself; default for a one-sided ‘10pt’ document +
\marginparwidth
- Width of the note itself; default for a one-sided ‘10pt’ document is ‘90pt’, ‘83pt’ for ‘11pt’, and ‘68pt’ for ‘12pt’; ‘17pt’ more in each case for a two-sided document. In two column mode, the default is ‘48pt’. @@ -4233,8 +4272,8 @@ Up: Top
16 Math formulas
--There are three environments that put LaTeX in math mode: +
+There are three environments that put LaTeX in math mode:
-
math
- For formulas that appear right in the text. @@ -4243,7 +4282,7 @@ Up: Top number in the right margin.
The
math
environment can be used in both paragraph and LR mode, +The
math
environment can be used in both paragraph and LR mode, but thedisplaymath
andequation
environments can be used only in paragraph mode. Themath
anddisplaymath
environments are used so often that they have the following short forms: @@ -4251,44 +4290,44 @@ environments are used so often that they have the following short forms:\(...\) instead of \begin{math}...\end{math} \[...\] instead of \begin{displaymath}...\end{displaymath}-In fact, the
math
environment is so common that it has an even +In fact, the
math
environment is so common that it has an even shorter form:$ ... $ instead of \(...\)
-The
\boldmath
command changes math letters and symbols to be in +The
\boldmath
command changes math letters and symbols to be in a bold font. It is used outside of math mode. Conversely, the\unboldmath
command changes math glyphs to be in a normal font; it too is used outside of math mode. -The
\displaystyle
declaration forces the size and style of the +The
\displaystyle
declaration forces the size and style of the formula to be that ofdisplaymath
, e.g., with limits above and below summations. For example$\displaystyle \sum_{n=0}^\infty x_n $-16.1 Subscripts & Superscripts
+16.1 Subscripts & superscripts
-To get an expression exp to appear as a subscript, you just type
_{
exp}
. To get exp to appear as a superscript, you type^{
exp}
. LaTeX handles @@ -4300,439 +4339,439 @@ superscript.
Next: Math functions, -Previous: Subscripts & Superscripts, +Previous: Subscripts & superscripts, Up: Math formulas16.2 Math symbols
-LaTeX provides almost any mathematical symbol you're likely to need. The commands for generating them can be used only in math mode. For example, if you include
$\pi$
in your source, you will get the pi symbol (\pi) in your output.-
@@ -4747,78 +4786,78 @@ Up: Math formulas\|
- \| +
\|
- \| -
\aleph
- \aleph +
\aleph
- \aleph -
\alpha
- \alpha +
\alpha
- \alpha -
\amalg
- \amalg (binary operation) +
\amalg
- \amalg (binary operation) -
\angle
- \angle +
\angle
- \angle -
\approx
- \approx (relation) +
\approx
- \approx (relation) -
\ast
- \ast (binary operation) +
\ast
- \ast (binary operation) -
\asymp
- \asymp (relation) +
\asymp
- \asymp (relation) -
\backslash
- \ (delimiter) +
\backslash
- \ (delimiter) -
\beta
- \beta +
\beta
- \beta -
\bigcap
- \bigcap +
\bigcap
- \bigcap -
\bigcirc
- \bigcirc (binary operation) +
\bigcirc
- \bigcirc (binary operation) -
\bigcup
- \bigcup +
\bigcup
- \bigcup -
\bigodot
- \bigodot +
\bigodot
- \bigodot -
\bigoplus
- \bigoplus +
\bigoplus
- \bigoplus -
\bigotimes
- \bigotimes +
\bigotimes
- \bigotimes -
\bigtriangledown
- \bigtriangledown (binary operation) +
\bigtriangledown
- \bigtriangledown (binary operation) -
\bigtriangleup
- \bigtriangleup (binary operation) +
\bigtriangleup
- \bigtriangleup (binary operation) -
\bigsqcup
- \bigsqcup +
\bigsqcup
- \bigsqcup -
\biguplus
- \biguplus +
\biguplus
- \biguplus -
\bigcap
- \bigvee +
\bigcap
- \bigvee -
\bigwedge
- \bigwedge +
\bigwedge
- \bigwedge -
\bot
- \bot +
\bot
- \bot -
\bowtie
- \bowtie (relation) +
\bowtie
- \bowtie (relation) -
\Box
- (square open box symbol) +
\Box
- (square open box symbol) -
\bullet
- \bullet (binary operation) +
\bullet
- \bullet (binary operation) -
\cap
- \cap (binary operation) +
\cap
- \cap (binary operation) -
\cdot
- \cdot (binary operation) +
\cdot
- \cdot (binary operation) -
\chi
- \chi +
\chi
- \chi -
\circ
- \circ (binary operation) +
\circ
- \circ (binary operation) -
\clubsuit
- \clubsuit +
\clubsuit
- \clubsuit -
\cong
- \cong (relation) +
\cong
- \cong (relation) -
\coprod
- \coprod +
\coprod
- \coprod -
\cup
- \cup (binary operation) +
\cup
- \cup (binary operation) -
\dagger
- \dagger (binary operation) +
\dagger
- \dagger (binary operation) -
\dashv
- \dashv (relation) +
\dashv
- \dashv (relation) -
\ddagger
- \dagger (binary operation) +
\ddagger
- \dagger (binary operation) -
\Delta
- \Delta +
\Delta
- \Delta -
\delta
- \delta +
\delta
- \delta -
\Diamond
- bigger \diamond +
\Diamond
- bigger \diamond -
\diamond
- \diamond (binary operation) +
\diamond
- \diamond (binary operation) -
\diamondsuit
- \diamondsuit +
\diamondsuit
- \diamondsuit -
\div
- \div (binary operation) +
\div
- \div (binary operation) -
\doteq
- \doteq (relation) +
\doteq
- \doteq (relation) -
\downarrow
- \downarrow (delimiter) +
\downarrow
- \downarrow (delimiter) -
\Downarrow
- \Downarrow (delimiter) +
\Downarrow
- \Downarrow (delimiter) -
\ell
- \ell +
\ell
- \ell -
\emptyset
- \emptyset +
\emptyset
- \emptyset -
\epsilon
- \epsilon +
\epsilon
- \epsilon -
\equiv
- \equiv (relation) +
\equiv
- \equiv (relation) -
\eta
- \eta +
\eta
- \eta -
\exists
- \exists +
\exists
- \exists -
\flat
- \flat +
\flat
- \flat -
\forall
- \forall +
\forall
- \forall -
\frown
- \frown (relation) +
\frown
- \frown (relation) -
\Gamma
- \Gamma +
\Gamma
- \Gamma -
\gamma
- \gamma +
\gamma
- \gamma -
\ge
- \ge +
\ge
- \ge -
\geq
- \geq (relation) +
\geq
- \geq (relation) -
\gets
- \gets +
\gets
- \gets -
\gg
- \gg (relation) +
\gg
- \gg (relation) -
\hbar
- \hbar +
\hbar
- \hbar -
\heartsuit
- \heartsuit +
\heartsuit
- \heartsuit -
\hookleftarrow
- \hookleftarrow +
\hookleftarrow
- \hookleftarrow -
\hookrightarrow
- \hookrightarrow +
\hookrightarrow
- \hookrightarrow -
\iff
- \iff +
\iff
- \iff -
\Im
- \Im +
\Im
- \Im -
\in
- \in (relation) +
\in
- \in (relation) -
\infty
- \infty +
\infty
- \infty -
\int
- \int +
\int
- \int -
\iota
- \iota +
\iota
- \iota -
\Join
- condensed bowtie symbol (relation) +
\Join
- condensed bowtie symbol (relation) -
\kappa
- \kappa +
\kappa
- \kappa -
\Lambda
- \Lambda +
\Lambda
- \Lambda -
\lambda
- \lambda +
\lambda
- \lambda -
\land
- \land +
\land
- \land -
\langle
- \langle (delimiter) +
\langle
- \langle (delimiter) -
\lbrace
- \lbrace (delimiter) +
\lbrace
- \lbrace (delimiter) -
\lbrack
- \lbrack (delimiter) +
\lbrack
- \lbrack (delimiter) -
\lceil
- \lceil (delimiter) +
\lceil
- \lceil (delimiter) -
\le
- \le +
\le
- \le -
\leadsto
- +
\leadsto
- -
\Leftarrow
- \Leftarrow +
\Leftarrow
- \Leftarrow -
\leftarrow
- \leftarrow +
\leftarrow
- \leftarrow -
\leftharpoondown
- \leftharpoondown +
\leftharpoondown
- \leftharpoondown -
\leftharpoonup
- \leftharpoonup +
\leftharpoonup
- \leftharpoonup -
\Leftrightarrow
- \Leftrightarrow +
\Leftrightarrow
- \Leftrightarrow -
\leftrightarrow
- \leftrightarrow +
\leftrightarrow
- \leftrightarrow -
\leq
- \leq (relation) +
\leq
- \leq (relation) -
\lfloor
- \lfloor (delimiter) +
\lfloor
- \lfloor (delimiter) -
\lhd
- (left-pointing arrow head) +
\lhd
- (left-pointing arrow head) -
\ll
- \ll (relation) +
\ll
- \ll (relation) -
\lnot
- \lnot +
\lnot
- \lnot -
\longleftarrow
- \longleftarrow +
\longleftarrow
- \longleftarrow -
\longleftrightarrow
- \longleftrightarrow +
\longleftrightarrow
- \longleftrightarrow -
\longmapsto
- \longmapsto +
\longmapsto
- \longmapsto -
\longrightarrow
- \longrightarrow +
\longrightarrow
- \longrightarrow -
\lor
- \lor +
\lor
- \lor -
\mapsto
- \mapsto +
\mapsto
- \mapsto -
\mho
- +
\mho
- -
\mid
- \mid (relation) +
\mid
- \mid (relation) -
\models
- \models (relation) +
\models
- \models (relation) -
\mp
- \mp (binary operation) +
\mp
- \mp (binary operation) -
\mu
- \mu +
\mu
- \mu -
\nabla
- \nabla +
\nabla
- \nabla -
\natural
- \natural +
\natural
- \natural -
\ne
- \ne +
\ne
- \ne -
\nearrow
- \nearrow +
\nearrow
- \nearrow -
\neg
- \neg +
\neg
- \neg -
\neq
- \neq (relation) +
\neq
- \neq (relation) -
\ni
- \ni (relation) +
\ni
- \ni (relation) -
\not
- Overstrike a following operator with a /, as in \not=. +
\not
- Overstrike a following operator with a /, as in \not=. -
\notin
- \ni +
\notin
- \ni -
\nu
- \nu +
\nu
- \nu -
\nwarrow
- \nwarrow +
\nwarrow
- \nwarrow -
\odot
- \odot (binary operation) +
\odot
- \odot (binary operation) -
\oint
- \oint +
\oint
- \oint -
\Omega
- \Omega +
\Omega
- \Omega -
\omega
- \omega +
\omega
- \omega -
\ominus
- \ominus (binary operation) +
\ominus
- \ominus (binary operation) -
\oplus
- \oplus (binary operation) +
\oplus
- \oplus (binary operation) -
\oslash
- \oslash (binary operation) +
\oslash
- \oslash (binary operation) -
\otimes
- \otimes (binary operation) +
\otimes
- \otimes (binary operation) -
\owns
- \owns +
\owns
- \owns -
\parallel
- \parallel (relation) +
\parallel
- \parallel (relation) -
\partial
- \partial +
\partial
- \partial -
\perp
- \perp (relation) +
\perp
- \perp (relation) -
\phi
- \phi +
\phi
- \phi -
\Pi
- \Pi +
\Pi
- \Pi -
\pi
- \pi +
\pi
- \pi -
\pm
- \pm (binary operation) +
\pm
- \pm (binary operation) -
\prec
- \prec (relation) +
\prec
- \prec (relation) -
\preceq
- \preceq (relation) +
\preceq
- \preceq (relation) -
\prime
- \prime +
\prime
- \prime -
\prod
- \prod +
\prod
- \prod -
\propto
- \propto (relation) +
\propto
- \propto (relation) -
\Psi
- \Psi +
\Psi
- \Psi -
\psi
- \psi +
\psi
- \psi -
\rangle
- \rangle (delimiter) +
\rangle
- \rangle (delimiter) -
\rbrace
- \rbrace (delimiter) +
\rbrace
- \rbrace (delimiter) -
\rbrack
- \rbrack (delimiter) +
\rbrack
- \rbrack (delimiter) -
\rceil
- \rceil (delimiter) +
\rceil
- \rceil (delimiter) -
\Re
- \Re +
\Re
- \Re -
\rfloor
- \rfloor +
\rfloor
- \rfloor -
\rhd
- (binary operation) +
\rhd
- (binary operation) -
\rho
- \rho +
\rho
- \rho -
\Rightarrow
- \Rightarrow +
\Rightarrow
- \Rightarrow -
\rightarrow
- \rightarrow +
\rightarrow
- \rightarrow -
\rightharpoondown
- \rightharpoondown +
\rightharpoondown
- \rightharpoondown -
\rightharpoonup
- \rightharpoonup +
\rightharpoonup
- \rightharpoonup -
\rightleftharpoons
- \rightleftharpoons +
\rightleftharpoons
- \rightleftharpoons -
\searrow
- \searrow +
\searrow
- \searrow -
\setminus
- \setminus (binary operation) +
\setminus
- \setminus (binary operation) -
\sharp
- \sharp +
\sharp
- \sharp -
\Sigma
- \Sigma +
\Sigma
- \Sigma -
\sigma
- \sigma +
\sigma
- \sigma -
\sim
- \sim (relation) +
\sim
- \sim (relation) -
\simeq
- \simeq (relation) +
\simeq
- \simeq (relation) -
\smallint
- \smallint +
\smallint
- \smallint -
\smile
- \smile (relation) +
\smile
- \smile (relation) -
\spadesuit
- \spadesuit +
\spadesuit
- \spadesuit -
\sqcap
- \sqcap (binary operation) +
\sqcap
- \sqcap (binary operation) -
\sqcup
- \sqcup (binary operation) +
\sqcup
- \sqcup (binary operation) -
\sqsubset
- (relation) +
\sqsubset
- (relation) -
\sqsubseteq
- \sqsubseteq (relation) +
\sqsubseteq
- \sqsubseteq (relation) -
\sqsupset
- (relation) +
\sqsupset
- (relation) -
\sqsupseteq
- \sqsupseteq (relation) +
\sqsupseteq
- \sqsupseteq (relation) -
\star
- \star (binary operation) +
\star
- \star (binary operation) -
\subset
- \subset (relation) +
\subset
- \subset (relation) -
\subseteq
- \subseteq (relation) +
\subseteq
- \subseteq (relation) -
\succ
- \succ (relation) +
\succ
- \succ (relation) -
\succeq
- \succeq (relation) +
\succeq
- \succeq (relation) -
\sum
- \sum +
\sum
- \sum -
\supset
- \supset (relation) +
\supset
- \supset (relation) -
\supseteq
- \supseteq (relation) +
\supseteq
- \supseteq (relation) -
\surd
- \surd +
\surd
- \surd -
\swarrow
- \swarrow +
\swarrow
- \swarrow -
\tau
- \tau +
\tau
- \tau -
\theta
- \theta +
\theta
- \theta -
\times
- \times (binary operation) +
\times
- \times (binary operation) -
\to
- \to +
\to
- \to -
\top
- \top +
\top
- \top -
\triangle
- \triangle +
\triangle
- \triangle -
\triangleleft
- \triangleleft (binary operation) +
\triangleleft
- \triangleleft (binary operation) -
\triangleright
- \triangleright (binary operation) +
\triangleright
- \triangleright (binary operation) -
\unlhd
- left-pointing arrowhead with line under (binary operation) +
\unlhd
- left-pointing arrowhead with line under (binary operation) -
\unrhd
- right-pointing arrowhead with line under (binary operation) +
\unrhd
- right-pointing arrowhead with line under (binary operation) -
\Uparrow
- \Uparrow (delimiter) +
\Uparrow
- \Uparrow (delimiter) -
\uparrow
- \uparrow (delimiter) +
\uparrow
- \uparrow (delimiter) -
\Updownarrow
- \Updownarrow (delimiter) +
\Updownarrow
- \Updownarrow (delimiter) -
\updownarrow
- \updownarrow (delimiter) +
\updownarrow
- \updownarrow (delimiter) -
\uplus
- \uplus (binary operation) +
\uplus
- \uplus (binary operation) -
\Upsilon
- \Upsilon +
\Upsilon
- \Upsilon -
\upsilon
- \upsilon +
\upsilon
- \upsilon -
\varepsilon
- \varepsilon +
\varepsilon
- \varepsilon -
\varphi
- \varphi +
\varphi
- \varphi -
\varpi
- \varpi +
\varpi
- \varpi -
\varrho
- \varrho +
\varrho
- \varrho -
\varsigma
- \varsigma +
\varsigma
- \varsigma -
\vartheta
- \vartheta +
\vartheta
- \vartheta -
\vdash
- \vdash (relation) +
\vdash
- \vdash (relation) -
\vee
- \vee (binary operation) +
\vee
- \vee (binary operation) -
\Vert
- \Vert (delimiter) +
\Vert
- \Vert (delimiter) -
\vert
- \vert (delimiter) +
\vert
- \vert (delimiter) -
\wedge
- \wedge (binary operation) +
\wedge
- \wedge (binary operation) -
\wp
- \wp +
\wp
- \wp -
\wr
- \wr (binary operation) +
\wr
- \wr (binary operation) -
\Xi
- \Xi +
\Xi
- \Xi -
\xi
- \xi +
\xi
- \xi -
\zeta
- \zeta +
\zeta
- \zeta
16.3 Math functions
-These commands produce roman function names in math mode with proper spacing.
-
@@ -4833,46 +4872,46 @@ Up: Math formulas\arccos
- \arccos +
\arccos
- \arccos -
\arcsin
- \arcsin +
\arcsin
- \arcsin -
\arctan
- \arctan +
\arctan
- \arctan -
\arg
- \arg +
\arg
- \arg -
\bmod
- Binary modulo operator (x \bmod y) +
\bmod
- Binary modulo operator (x \bmod y) -
\cos
- \cos +
\cos
- \cos -
\cosh
- \cosh +
\cosh
- \cosh -
\cot
- \cos +
\cot
- \cos -
\coth
- \cosh +
\coth
- \cosh -
\csc
- \csc +
\csc
- \csc -
\deg
- \deg +
\deg
- \deg -
\det
- \deg +
\det
- \deg -
\dim
- \dim +
\dim
- \dim -
\exp
- \exp +
\exp
- \exp -
\gcd
- \gcd +
\gcd
- \gcd -
\hom
- \hom +
\hom
- \hom -
\inf
- \inf +
\inf
- \inf -
\ker
- \ker +
\ker
- \ker -
\lg
- \lg +
\lg
- \lg -
\lim
- \lim +
\lim
- \lim -
\liminf
- \liminf +
\liminf
- \liminf -
\limsup
- \limsup +
\limsup
- \limsup -
\ln
- \ln +
\ln
- \ln -
\log
- \log +
\log
- \log -
\max
- \max +
\max
- \max -
\min
- \min +
\min
- \min -
\pmod
- parenthesized modulus, as in (\pmod 2^n - 1) +
\pmod
- parenthesized modulus, as in (\pmod 2^n - 1) -
\Pr
- \Pr +
\Pr
- \Pr -
\sec
- \sec +
\sec
- \sec -
\sin
- \sin +
\sin
- \sin -
\sinh
- \sinh +
\sinh
- \sinh -
\sup
- \sup +
\sup
- \sup -
\tan
- \tan +
\tan
- \tan -
\tanh
- \tanh +
\tanh
- \tanh
16.4 Math accents
-LaTeX provides a variety of commands for producing accented letters in math. These are different from accents in normal text (see Accents).
-
\acute
- Math acute accent: \acutex. +
\acute
- Math acute accent: \acutex. -
\bar
- Math bar-over accent: \barx. +
\bar
- Math bar-over accent: \barx. -
\breve
- Math breve accent: \brevex. +
\breve
- Math breve accent: \brevex. -
\check
- Math hác<ek (check) accent: \checkx. +
\check
- Math hác<ek (check) accent: \checkx. -
\ddot
- Math dieresis accent: \ddotx. +
\ddot
- Math dieresis accent: \ddotx. -
\dot
- Math dot accent: \dotx. +
\dot
- Math dot accent: \dotx. -
\grave
- Math grave accent: \gravex. +
\grave
- Math grave accent: \gravex. -
\hat
- Math hat (circumflex) accent: \hatx. +
\hat
- Math hat (circumflex) accent: \hatx. -
\imath
- Math dotless i. +
\imath
- Math dotless i. -
\jmath
- Math dotless j. +
\jmath
- Math dotless j. -
\tilde
- Math tilde accent: \tildex. +
\tilde
- Math tilde accent: \tildex. -
\vec
- Math vector symbol: \vecx. +
\vec
- Math vector symbol: \vecx. -
\widehat
- Math wide hat accent: \widehatx+y. +
\widehat
- Math wide hat accent: \widehatx+y. -
\widehat
- Math wide tilde accent: \widetildex+y. +
\widehat
- Math wide tilde accent: \widetildex+y.
-Next: Math Miscellany, +Next: Math miscellany, Previous: Math accents, Up: Math formulas @@ -4880,71 +4919,72 @@ Up: Math formulas16.5 Spacing in math mode
-In a
math
environment, LaTeX ignores the spaces you type and puts in the spacing according to the normal rules for mathematics texts. If you want different spacing, LaTeX provides the following commands for use in math mode:-
-\;
- A thick space (5\over18\,quad). -
\:
\>
- Both of these produce a medium space (2\over9\,quad). -
\,
- A thin space (1\over6\,quad); not restricted to math mode. +
\;
- A thick space (5\over18\,quad). +
\:
\>
- Both of these produce a medium space (2\over9\,quad). +
\,
- A thin space (1\over6\,quad); not restricted to math mode.
\!
- A negative thin space (-1\over6\,quad).
16.6 Math Miscellany
+16.6 Math miscellany
--
\*
- A “discretionary” multiplication symbol, at which a line break is +
\*
- A “discretionary” multiplication symbol, at which a line break is allowed. -
\cdots
- A horizontal ellipsis with the dots raised to the center of the line. +
\cdots
- A horizontal ellipsis with the dots raised to the center of the line. -
\ddots
- A diagonal ellipsis: \ddots. +
\ddots
- A diagonal ellipsis: \ddots. -
\frac{num}{den}
- Produces the fraction
num
divided byden
. +\frac{num}{den}
- Produces the fraction
num
divided byden
. -\left
delim1... \right
delim2- The two delimiters need not match; ‘.’ acts as a null delimiter, +
\left
delim1... \right
delim2- The two delimiters need not match; ‘.’ acts as a null delimiter, producing no output. The delimiters are sized according to the math in between. Example:
\left( \sum_i=1^10 a_i \right]
. -\overbrace{
text}
- Generates a brace over text. +
\overbrace{
text}
- Generates a brace over text. For example, \overbracex+\cdots+x^k \rm\;times. -
\overline{
text}
- Generates a horizontal line over tex. +
\overline{
text}
- Generates a horizontal line over tex. For exampe, \overlinex+y. -
\sqrt[
root]{arg}
- Produces the representation of the square root of arg. The +
\sqrt[
root]{arg}
- Produces the representation of the square root of arg. The optional argument root determines what root to produce. For example, the cube root of
x+y
would be typed as$\sqrt[3]{x+y}$
. -\stackrel{
text}{
relation}
- Puts text above relation. For example, +
\stackrel{
text}{
relation}
- Puts text above relation. For example,
\stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}
. -\underbrace{math}
- Generates math with a brace underneath. +
\underbrace{math}
- Generates math with a brace underneath. -
\underline{text}
- Causes text, which may be either math mode or not, to be -underlined. +
\underline{text}
- Causes text, which may be either math mode or not, to be +underlined. The line is always below the text, taking account of +descenders. -
\vdots
- Produces a vertical ellipsis. +
\vdots
- Produces a vertical ellipsis.
-Next: Page Styles, +Next: Page styles, Previous: Math formulas, Up: Top @@ -4952,7 +4992,7 @@ Up: Top17 Modes
-When LaTeX is processing your input text, it is always in one of three modes: @@ -4991,7 +5031,7 @@ LaTeX is in paragraph mode while making a box, it is said to be in in, is called “outer paragraph mode”.
-18 Page Styles
+18 Page styles
-The
\documentclass
command determines the size and position of the page's head and foot. The page style determines what goes in them. @@ -5017,32 +5057,32 @@ the page's head and foot. The page style determines what goes in them.
Next: \pagenumbering, -Up: Page Styles +Up: Page styles18.1
-\maketitle
The
\maketitle
command generates a title on a separate title page—except in thearticle
class, where the title is placed at the top of the first page. Information used to produce the title is obtained from the following declarations:-
@@ -5053,13 +5093,13 @@ document. Use\author{
name\and
name2}
- The
\author
command declares the document author(s), where the +\author{
name\and
name2}
- The
\author
command declares the document author(s), where the argument is a list of authors separated by\and
commands. Use\\
to separate lines within a single author's entry—for example, to give the author's institution or address. -\date{
text}
- The
\date
command declares text to be the document's +\date{
text}
- The
\date
command declares text to be the document's date. With no\date
command, the current date (see \today) is used. -\thanks{
text}
- The
\thanks
command produces a\footnote
to the title, +\thanks{
text}
- The
\thanks
command produces a\footnote
to the title, usually used for credit acknowledgements. -\title{
text}
- The
\title
command declares text to be the title of the +\title{
text}
- The
\title
command declares text to be the title of the document. Use\\
to force a line break, as usual.\\
to force a line break, as usual.
Next: \pagestyle, Previous: \maketitle, -Up: Page Styles +Up: Page styles18.2
-\pagenumbering
\pagenumbering{style} @@ -5080,13 +5120,13 @@ Synopsis:
Next: \thispagestyle, Previous: \pagenumbering, -Up: Page Styles +Up: Page styles18.3
-\pagestyle
\pagestyle{style} @@ -5110,14 +5150,14 @@ goes in the headers.Here are the descriptions of
\markboth
and\markright
:-
@@ -5126,13 +5166,13 @@ the page.\markboth{
left}{
right}
- Sets both the left and the right heading. A “left-hand heading” +
\markboth{
left}{
right}
- Sets both the left and the right heading. A “left-hand heading” (left) is generated by the last
\markboth
command before the end of the page, while a “right-hand heading” (right is generated by the first\markboth
or\markright
that comes on the page if there is one, otherwise by the last one before the page. -\markright{
right}
- Sets the right heading, leaving the left heading unchanged. +
\markright{
right}
- Sets the right heading, leaving the left heading unchanged.
Previous: \pagestyle, -Up: Page Styles +Up: Page styles18.4
-\thispagestyle{
style}
The
\thispagestyle
command works in the same manner as the\pagestyle
command (see previous section) except that it changes to style for the current page only. @@ -5141,14 +5181,14 @@ changes to style for the current page only.
Next: Boxes, -Previous: Page Styles, +Previous: Page styles, Up: Top19 Spaces
-LaTeX has many ways to produce white (or filled) space.
Another space-producing command is
\,
to produce a “thin” @@ -5159,11 +5199,11 @@ more often useful in math mode (see Spacing inHorizontal space
19.1
-\hspace
\hspace[*]{length} @@ -5207,19 +5247,19 @@ form.
-Next: \hrulefill, -Previous: \/, +Next: \SPACE, +Previous: \hspace, Up: Spaces19.2
-\hfill
The
\hfill
fill command produces a “rubber length” which has +The
\hfill
fill command produces a “rubber length” which has no natural space but can stretch or shrink horizontally as far as needed. -The
\fill
parameter is the rubber length itself (technically, +The
\fill
parameter is the rubber length itself (technically, the glue value ‘0pt plus1fill’); thus,\hspace\fill
is equivalent to\hfill
. @@ -5228,14 +5268,14 @@ equivalent to\hfill
.
Next: \AT, -Previous: \hspace, +Previous: \hfill, Up: Spaces
\SPACE
The \
(space) command produces a normal interword space. It's
useful after punctuation which shouldn't end a sentence. For example
Knuth's article in Proc.\ Amer.\ Math\. Soc.\ is fundamental
.
@@ -5257,7 +5297,7 @@ Up: Spaces
\@
The \@
command makes the following punctuation character end a
sentence even if it normally would not. This is typically used after
a capital letter. Here are side-by-side examples with and without
@@ -5286,7 +5326,7 @@ Up: Spaces
\thinspace
\thinspace
produces an unbreakable and unstretchable space that
is 1/6 of an em. This is the proper space to use in nested quotes, as
in '”.
@@ -5295,7 +5335,7 @@ in '”.
\/
The \/
command produces an italic correction. This is a
small space defined by the font designer for a given character,
to avoid the character colliding with whatever follows. The italic
@@ -5326,14 +5366,14 @@ with pdfTeX.
\hrulefill
The \hrulefill
fill command produces a “rubber length” which can
stretch or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with a horizontal
rule.
@@ -5350,7 +5390,7 @@ Up: Spaces
\dotfill
The \dotfill
command produces a “rubber length” that fills
with dots instead of just white space.
@@ -5367,7 +5407,7 @@ Up: Spaces
\addvspace
The \addvspace
command normally adds a vertical space of height
@@ -5391,13 +5431,13 @@ Up: Spaces
These commands produce a given amount of space.
\bigskip
\vspace{bigskipamount}
, ordinarily about one line
+\bigskip
\vspace{bigskipamount}
, ordinarily about one line
space (with stretch and shrink).
- \medskip
\vspace{medskipamount}
, ordinarily
+ \medskip
\vspace{medskipamount}
, ordinarily
about half of a line space (with stretch and shrink).
- \smallskip
\vspace{smallskipamount}
, ordinarily about a
+ \smallskip
\vspace{smallskipamount}
, ordinarily about a
quarter of a line space (with stretch and shrink).
\vfill
The \vfill
fill command produces a rubber length (glue) which
can stretch or shrink vertically as far as needed. It's equivalent to
\vspace{\fill}
(see \hfill).
@@ -5432,7 +5472,7 @@ Up: Spaces
\vspace[*]{
length}
\vspace[*]{length} @@ -5455,7 +5495,7 @@ Up: Top20 Boxes
-All the predefined length parameters (see Predefined lengths) can be used in the arguments of the box-making commands. @@ -5482,8 +5522,8 @@ Up: Boxes
20.1
-\mbox{
text}-The
\mbox
command creates a box just wide enough to hold the ++The
\mbox
command creates a box just wide enough to hold the text created by its argument. The text is not broken into lines, so it can be used to prevent hyphenation. @@ -5499,7 +5539,7 @@ Up: Boxes20.2
-\fbox
and\framebox
\fbox{text} @@ -5513,7 +5553,7 @@ specification of the box width with the optional width argument (a dimension), and positioning with the optional position argument. -Both commands produce a rule of thickness
\fboxrule
(default +Both commands produce a rule of thickness
\fboxrule
(default ‘.4pt’), and leave a space of\fboxsep
(default ‘3pt’) between the rule and the contents of the box. @@ -5531,7 +5571,7 @@ Up: Boxes20.3
-lrbox
\begin{lrbox}{cmd} text \end{lrbox}
This is the environment form of
\sbox
. @@ -5551,7 +5591,7 @@ Up: Boxes20.4
-\makebox
\makebox[width][position]{text} @@ -5585,7 +5625,7 @@ Up: Boxes20.5
-\parbox
\parbox[position][height][inner-pos]{width}{text} @@ -5634,7 +5674,7 @@ Up: Boxes20.6
-\raisebox
\raisebox{distance}[height][depth]{text} @@ -5661,7 +5701,7 @@ Up: Boxes20.7
-\savebox
\savebox{\boxcmd}[width][pos]{text} @@ -5683,7 +5723,7 @@ Up: Boxes20.8
-\sbox{
\boxcmd}{
text}
\sbox{\boxcmd}{text} @@ -5705,7 +5745,7 @@ Up: Boxes20.9
-\usebox{
\boxcmd\usebox{\boxcmd} @@ -5746,28 +5786,28 @@ Up: Special insertions21.1 Reserved characters
-The following characters play a special role in LaTeX and are called “reserved characters” or “special characters”.
# $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }-Whenever you write one of these characters into your file, LaTeX +
Whenever you write one of these characters into your file, LaTeX will do something special. If you simply want the character to be printed as itself, include a
\
in front of the character. For example,\$
will produce$
in your output. -One exception to this rule is
\
itself, because\\
has +One exception to this rule is
\
itself, because\\
has its own special (context-dependent) meaning. A roman \ is produced by typing$\backslash$
in your file, and a typewriter\
is produced by using ‘\’ in a verbatim command (see verbatim). -Also,
\~
and\^
place tilde and circumflex accents over +Also,
\~
and\^
place tilde and circumflex accents over the following letter, as in õ and ô (see Accents); to get a standalone~
or^
, you can again use a verbatim command. -Finally, you can access any character of the current font once you know its number by using the
\symbol
command. For example, the visible space character used in the\verb*
command has the code @@ -5788,32 +5828,117 @@ Up: Special insertions21.2 Text symbols
-LaTeX provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols -in running text. +
LaTeX provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols +in running text. Some of these, especially the more obscure ones, are +not available in OT1; you may need to load the
textcomp
package.-
@@ -5828,48 +5953,62 @@ Up: Special insertions\copyright
- The copyright symbol, ©. +
\copyright
\textcopyright
- The copyright symbol, ©. + +
\dag
- The dagger symbol (in text). + +
\ddag
- The double dagger symbol (in text). + +
\LaTeX
- The LaTeX logo. + +
\guillemotleft
(«)\guillemotright
(»)\guilsinglleft
(‹)\guilsinglright
(›)- Double and single angle quotation marks, commonly used in French: +«, », ‹, ›. + +
\ldots
\dots
\textellipsis
- An ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): `...'.
\ldots
+and\dots
also work in math mode. + +\lq
- Left (opening) quote: `. + +
\P
\textparagraph
- Paragraph sign (pilcrow). + +
\pounds
\textsterling
- English pounds sterling: £. + +
\quotedblbase
(„)\quotesinglbase
(‚)- Double and single quotation marks on the baseline: +„ and ‚. + +
\rq
- Right (closing) quote: '. + +
\S
- Section symbol. + +
\TeX
- The TeX logo. + +
\textasciicircum
- ASCII circumflex: ^. + +
\textasciitilde
- ASCII tilde: ~. + +
\textasteriskcentered
- Centered asterisk: *. + +
\textbackslash
- Backslash: \. + +
\textbar
- Vertical bar: |. + +
\textbardbl
- Double vertical bar. + +
\textbigcircle
- Big circle symbol. + +
\textbraceleft
- Left brace: {. + +
\textbraceright
- Right brace: }. + +
\textbullet
- Bullet: •. + +
\textcircled{
letter}
- letter in a circle, as in ®. -
\dag
- The dagger symbol (in text). +
\textcompwordmark
\textcapitalwordmark
\textascenderwordmark
- Composite word mark (invisible). The
\textcapital...
form +has the cap height of the font, while the\textascender...
form +has the ascender height. -\ddag
- The double dagger symbol (in text). +
\textdagger
- Dagger: \dag. -
\LaTeX
- The LaTeX logo. +
\textdaggerdbl
- Double dagger: \ddag. -
\ldots
- An ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): `...'. This -command also works in math mode. +
\textdollar
(or$
)- Dollar sign: $. -
\lq
- Left (opening) quote: `. +
\textemdash
(or---
)- Em-dash: — (for punctuation). -
\P
- Paragraph sign (pilcrow). +
\textendash
(or--
)- En-dash: — (for ranges). -
\pounds
- English pounds sterling. +
\texteuro
- The Euro symbol: €. -
\rq
- Right (closing) quote: '. +
\textexclamdown
(or!`
)- Upside down exclamation point: ¡. -
\S
- Section symbol. +
\textgreater
- Greater than: >. -
\TeX
- The TeX logo. +
\textless
- Less than: <. + +
\textleftarrow
- Left arrow. + +
\textordfeminine
\textordmasculine
- Feminine and masculine ordinal symbols: ª, º. + +
\textordfeminine
- Feminine ordinal symbol: ®. + +
\textperiodcentered
- Centered period: \cdot. + +
\textquestiondown
(or?`
)- Upside down questionation point: ¿. + +
\textquotedblleft
(or``
)- Double left quote: “. + +
\textquotedblright
(or'
)- Double right quote: ”. + +
\textquoteleft
(or`
)- Single left quote: `. + +
\textquoteright
(or'
)- Single right quote: '. + +
\textquotestraightbase
\textquotestraightdblbase
- Single and double straight quotes on the baseline. + +
\textregistered
- Registered symbol: ®. + +
\textrightarrow
- Right arrow. + +
\textthreequartersemdash
- “Three-quarters” em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash. + +
\texttrademark
- Trademark symbol: ^\hboxTM. + +
\texttwelveudash
- Xx 12u-. + +
\textunderscore
- Underscore: _. + +
\textvisiblespace
- Visible space symbol.
21.3 Accents
-LaTeX has wide support for many of the world's scripts and languages, through the
babel
package and related support. This -section does not attempt to cover all that support. It merely the -core LaTeX commands for creating accented characters. +section does not attempt to cover all that support. It merely lists +the core LaTeX commands for creating accented characters. + +The
\capital...
commands produce alternative forms for use with +capital letters. These are not available with OT1.-
@@ -5885,22 +6024,32 @@ Up: Special insertions\"
- Produces an umlaut, as in ö. +
\"
\capitaldieresis
- Produces an umlaut (dieresis), as in ö. -
\'
- Produces an acute accent, as in ó. In the
tabbing
+\'
\capitalacute
- Produces an acute accent, as in ó. In the
tabbing
environment, pushes current column to the right of the previous column (see tabbing). -\.
- Produces a dot accent over the following, as in o.. +
\.
- Produces a dot accent over the following, as in o.. -
\=
- Produces a macron (overbar) accent over the following, as in o¯. +
\=
\capitalmacron
- Produces a macron (overbar) accent over the following, as in o¯. -
\^
- Produces a circumflex (hat) accent over the following, as in ô. +
\^
\capitalcircumflex
- Produces a circumflex (hat) accent over the following, as in ô. -
\`
- Produces a grave accent over the following, as in ò. In the +
\`
\capitalgrave
- Produces a grave accent over the following, as in ò. In the
tabbing
environment, move following text to the right margin (see tabbing). -\~
- Produces a tilde accent over the following, as in ñ. +
\~
\capitaltilde
- Produces a tilde accent over the following, as in ñ. + +
\b
- Produces a bar accent under the following, as in o_. + +
\c
\capitalcedilla
- Produces a cedilla accent under the following, as in ç. -
\b
- Produces a bar accent under the following, as in o_. +
\d
\capitaldotaccent
- Produces a dot accent under the following, as in .o. -
\c
- Produces a cedilla accent under the following, as in +
\H
\capitalhungarumlaut
- Produces a long Hungarian umlaut accent over the following, as in o''. -
\d
- Produces a dot accent under the following, as in .o. +
\i
- Produces a dotless i, as in `i'. -
\H
- Produces a long Hungarian umlaut accent over the following, as in o''. +
\j
- Produces a dotless j, as in `j'. -
\i
- Produces a dotless i, as in `i'. +
\k
\capitalogonek
- Produces a letter with ogonek, as in `o'. Not available in +the OT1 encoding. -
\j
- Produces a dotless j, as in `j'. +
\r
\capitalring
- Produces a ring accent, as in `o*'. -
\t
- Produces a tie-after accent, as in `oo['. +
\t
\capitaltie
\newtie
\capitalnewtie
- Produces a tie-after accent, as in `oo['. The +
\newtie
form is centered in its box. -\u
- Produces a breve accent, as in `o('. +
\u
\capitalbreve
- Produces a breve accent, as in `o('. -
\v
- Produces a hác<ek (check) accent, as in `o<'. +
\underbar
- Not exactly an accent, this produces a bar under the argument text. +The argument is always processed in horizontal mode. The bar is +always a fixed position under the baseline, thus crossing through +descenders. See also
\underline
in Math miscellany. + +\v
\capitalcaron
- Produces a hác<ek (check, caron) accent, as in `o<'.
21.4 Non-English characters
-Here are the basic LaTeX commands for inserting characters commonly used in languages other than English.
-
@@ -5916,7 +6065,7 @@ Up: Special insertions\aa
\AA
- å and Å. +
\aa
\AA
- å and Å. + +
\ae
\AE
- æ and Æ. + +
\dh
\DH
- Icelandic letter eth: and . + +
\dj
\DJ
- xxxx -
\ae
\AE
- æ and Æ. +
\ij
\IJ
- ij and IJ (except somewhat closer together than appears here). -
\l
\L
- /l and /L. +
\l
\L
- /l and /L. -
\o
\O
- ø and Ø. +
\ng
\NG
- xxxx -
\oe
\OE
- œ and Œ. +
\o
\O
- ø and Ø. -
\ss
- ß. +
\oe
\OE
- œ and Œ. + +
\ss
\SS
- ß and SS. + +
\th
\TH
- Icelandic letter thorn: and .
21.5
-\rule
\rule[raise]{width}{thickness} @@ -5943,14 +6092,14 @@ Up: Special insertions21.6
-\today
The
\today
command produces today's date, in the format ‘month dd, yyyy’; for example, `July 4, 1976'. It uses the predefined counters\day
,\month
, and\year
(see \day \month \year) to do this. It is not updated as the program runs. -The
datetime
package, among others, can produce a wide variety +The
datetime
package, among others, can produce a wide variety of other date formats.@@ -5964,7 +6113,7 @@ Up: Top22 Splitting the input
-A large document requires a lot of input. Rather than putting the whole input in a single large file, it's more efficient to split it into several smaller ones. Regardless of how many separate files you use, @@ -5988,7 +6137,7 @@ Up: Splitting the inp
22.1
-\include
\include{file} @@ -6002,7 +6151,7 @@ command executes\clearpage
to start a new page only run if file is listed as an argument to\includeonly
. See the next section. -The
\include
command may not appear in the preamble or in a file +The
\include
command may not appear in the preamble or in a file read by another\include
command.@@ -6017,7 +6166,7 @@ Up: Splitting the inp22.2 \
-includeonly
\includeonly{file1,file2,...} @@ -6041,7 +6190,7 @@ Up: Splitting the inp22.3 \input
-\input{file} @@ -6083,8 +6232,8 @@ Up: Front/back matt23.1 Tables of contents
--A table of contents is produced with the
\tableofcontents
++A table of contents is produced with the
\tableofcontents
command. You put the command right where you want the table of contents to go; LaTeX does the rest for you. A previous run must have generated a .toc file. @@ -6094,11 +6243,11 @@ not automatically start a new page. If you want a new page after the table of contents, write a\newpage
command after the\tableofcontents
command. -The analogous commands
\listoffigures
and\listoftables
+The analogous commands
\listoffigures
and\listoftables
produce a list of figures and a list of tables, respectively. Everything works exactly the same as for the table of contents. -The command
\nofiles
overrides these commands, and +The command
\nofiles
overrides these commands, and prevents any of these lists from being generated.25.2
-\typeout{
msg}
\typeout{msg} @@ -6617,17 +6766,17 @@ printed, independent of surrounding spaces. A^^J
inmsg
prints a newline.- +-
Next: Document templates, -Previous: Terminal Input/Output, +Previous: Terminal input/output, Up: Top26 Command Line
+26 Command line
-The input file specification indicates the file to be formatted; TeX uses .tex as a default file extension. If you omit the input file entirely, TeX accepts input from the terminal. You @@ -6638,22 +6787,22 @@ command; e.g.
will process foo.tex without pausing after every error. -
If LaTeX stops in the middle of the document and gives you a +
If LaTeX stops in the middle of the document and gives you a ‘*’ prompt, it is waiting for input. You can type
\stop
(and return) and it will prematurely end the document.
-Next: Command Index, -Previous: Command Line, +Next: Concept Index, +Previous: Command line, Up: TopAppendix A Document templates
-Although not reference material, perhaps these document templates will be useful. @@ -6821,7 +6970,8 @@ Email \verb|tugboat@tug.org| if problems or questions.
@@ -6829,349 +6979,435 @@ Up: TopConcept Index
-
@@ -7181,377 +7417,407 @@ Up: Top- ‘*’ prompt: Command Line
-- *-form of sectioning commands: Sectioning
-- .glo file: Glossaries
-- .idx file: Indexes
-- .ind file: Indexes
-- `see' and `see also' index entries: Indexes
-- abstracts: abstract
-- accents: Accents
-- accents, mathematical: Math accents
-- accessing any character of a font: Reserved characters
-- acute accent: Accents
-- acute accent, math: Math accents
-- ae ligature: Non-English characters
-- aligning Equations: eqnarray
-- alignment via tabbing: tabbing
-- appendix, creating: Sectioning
-- aring: Non-English characters
-- arrays, math: array
-- author, for titlepage: \maketitle
-- bar-over accent: Accents
-- bar-over accent, math: Math accents
-- bar-under accent: Accents
-- bibliography, creating (automatically): Using BibTeX
-- bibliography, creating (manually): thebibliography
-- bibTeX, using: Using BibTeX
+- ‘*’ prompt: Command line
+- *-form of sectioning commands: Sectioning
+- .glo file: Glossaries
+- .idx file: Indexes
+- .ind file: Indexes
+- `see' and `see also' index entries: Indexes
+- abstracts: abstract
+- accents: Accents
+- accents, mathematical: Math accents
+- accessing any character of a font: Reserved characters
+- acute accent: Accents
+- acute accent, math: Math accents
+- ae ligature: Non-English characters
+- aligning Equations: eqnarray
+- alignment via tabbing: tabbing
+- appendix, creating: Sectioning
+- aring: Non-English characters
+- arrays, math: array
+- arrow, left, in text: Text symbols
+- arrow, right, in text: Text symbols
+- ascender height: Text symbols
+- ASCII circumflex, in text: Text symbols
+- ASCII tilde, in text: Text symbols
+- asterisk, centered, in text: Text symbols
+- author, for titlepage: \maketitle
+- backslash, in text: Text symbols
+- bar, double vertical, in text: Text symbols
+- bar, vertical, in text: Text symbols
+- bar-over accent: Accents
+- bar-over accent, math: Math accents
+- bar-under accent: Accents
+- bibliography, creating (automatically): Using BibTeX
+- bibliography, creating (manually): thebibliography
+- bibTeX, using: Using BibTeX
+- big circle symbols, in text: Text symbols
- black boxes, omitting: Document class options
- bold font: Font styles
-- bold typewriter, avoiding: description
-- boxes: Boxes
-- breaking lines: Line breaking
-- breaking pages: Page breaking
-- breve accent: Accents
-- breve accent, math: Math accents
-- bullet symbol: Math symbols
-- bulleted lists: itemize
+- bold typewriter, avoiding: description
+- boxes: Boxes
+- brace, left, in text: Text symbols
+- brace, right, in text: Text symbols
+- breaking lines: Line breaking
+- breaking pages: Page breaking
+- breve accent: Accents
+- breve accent, math: Math accents
+- bullet symbol: Math symbols
+- bullet, in text: Text symbols
+- bulleted lists: itemize
- calligraphic letters for math: Font styles
-- cc list, in letters: \cc
-- cedilla accent: Accents
-- centering text, declaration for: \centering
-- centering text, environment for: center
-- characters, accented: Accents
-- characters, non-English: Non-English characters
-- characters, reserved: Reserved characters
-- check accent: Accents
-- check accent, math: Math accents
-- circumflex accent: Accents
-- circumflex accent, math: Math accents
+- cap height: Text symbols
+- caron accent: Accents
+- cc list, in letters: \cc
+- cedilla accent: Accents
+- centered asterisk, in text: Text symbols
+- centered period, in text: Text symbols
+- centering text, declaration for: \centering
+- centering text, environment for: center
+- characters, accented: Accents
+- characters, non-English: Non-English characters
+- characters, reserved: Reserved characters
+- check accent: Accents
+- check accent, math: Math accents
+- circle symbol, big, in text: Text symbols
+- circled letter, in text: Text symbols
+- circumflex accent: Accents
+- circumflex accent, math: Math accents
+- circumflex, ASCII, in text: Text symbols
- class options: Document class options
- classes of documents: Document classes
-- closing letters: \closing
-- closing quote: Text symbols
-- code, typesetting: verbatim
-- command Line: Command Line
-- commands, defining new ones: \newcommand & \renewcommand
-- computer programs, typesetting: verbatim
-- copyright symbol: Text symbols
-- counters, a list of: Counters
-- counters, defining new: \newcounter
-- counters, getting value of: \value
-- counters, setting: \setcounter
-- creating letters: Letters
-- creating pictures: picture
-- creating tables: table
-- credit footnote: \maketitle
-- cross references: Cross references
-- cross referencing with page number: \pageref
-- cross referencing, symbolic: \ref
-- dagger, in text: Text symbols
-- date, for titlepage: \maketitle
-- -
datetime
package: \today- defining a new command: \newcommand & \renewcommand
-- defining new environments: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment
-- defining new fonts: \newfont
-- defining new theorems: \newtheorem
-- definitions: Definitions
-- description lists, creating: description
-- discretionary multiplication: Math Miscellany
-- displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation: quotation
-- displaying quoted text without paragraph indentation: quote
+- closing letters: \closing
+- closing quote: Text symbols
+- code, typesetting: verbatim
+- command line: Command line
+- commands, defining new ones: \newcommand & \renewcommand
+- composite word mark, in text: Text symbols
+- computer programs, typesetting: verbatim
+- copyright symbol: Text symbols
+- counters, a list of: Counters
+- counters, defining new: \newcounter
+- counters, getting value of: \value
+- counters, setting: \setcounter
+- creating letters: Letters
+- creating pictures: picture
+- creating tables: table
+- credit footnote: \maketitle
+- cross references: Cross references
+- cross referencing with page number: \pageref
+- cross referencing, symbolic: \ref
+- currency, dollar: Text symbols
+- currency, euro: Text symbols
+- dagger, double, in text: Text symbols
+- dagger, in text: Text symbols
+- date, for titlepage: \maketitle
+- +
datetime
package: \today- defining a new command: \newcommand & \renewcommand
+- defining new environments: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment
+- defining new fonts: \newfont
+- defining new theorems: \newtheorem
+- definitions: Definitions
+- description lists, creating: description
+- dieresis accent: Accents
+- discretionary multiplication: Math miscellany
+- displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation: quotation
+- displaying quoted text without paragraph indentation: quote
- document class options: Document class options
- document classes: Document classes
-- document templates: Document templates
-- dot accent: Accents
-- dot over accent, math: Math accents
-- dot-over accent: Accents
-- dot-under accent: Accents
-- dotless i: Accents
-- dotless i, math: Math accents
-- dotless j: Accents
-- dotless j, math: Math accents
-- double dagger, in text: Text symbols
-- double dot accent, math: Math accents
-- ellipsis: Text symbols
+- document templates: Document templates
+- dollar sign: Text symbols
+- dot accent: Accents
+- dot over accent, math: Math accents
+- dot-over accent: Accents
+- dot-under accent: Accents
+- dotless i: Accents
+- dotless i, math: Math accents
+- dotless j: Accents
+- dotless j, math: Math accents
+- double angle quotation marks: Text symbols
+- double dagger, in text: Text symbols
+- double dot accent, math: Math accents
+- double guillemets: Text symbols
+- double left quote: Text symbols
+- double low-9 quotation mark: Text symbols
+- double quote, straight base: Text symbols
+- double right quote: Text symbols
+- double spacing: Low-level font commands
+- double vertical bar, in text: Text symbols
+- e-dash: Text symbols
+- ellipsis: Text symbols
+- em-dash: Text symbols
+- em-dash, three-quarters: Text symbols
- emphasis: Font styles
-- enclosure list: \encl
+- enclosure list: \encl
- ending & starting: Starting & ending
-- enlarge current page: \enlargethispage
-- environments: Environments
-- environments, defining: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment
-- equation number, cross referencing: \ref
-- equation numbers, omitting: eqnarray
-- equations, aligning: eqnarray
-- equations, environment for: equation
-- es-zet German letter: Non-English characters
-- exponent: Subscripts & Superscripts
-- figure number, cross referencing: \ref
-- figures, footnotes in: minipage
-- figures, inserting: figure
+- enlarge current page: \enlargethispage
+- environments: Environments
+- environments, defining: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment
+- equation number, cross referencing: \ref
+- equation numbers, omitting: eqnarray
+- equations, aligning: eqnarray
+- equations, environment for: equation
+- es-zet German letter: Non-English characters
+- eth, Icelandic letter: Non-English characters
+- euro symbol: Text symbols
+- exclamation point, upside-down: Text symbols
+- exponent: Subscripts & superscripts
+- feminine ordinal symbol: Text symbols
+- figure number, cross referencing: \ref
+- figures, footnotes in: minipage
+- figures, inserting: figure
- fixed-width font: Font styles
-- -
float
package: figure- flushing floats and starting a page: \clearpage
+- +
float
package: figure- flushing floats and starting a page: \clearpage
- font commands, low-level: Low-level font commands
- font sizes: Font sizes
- font styles: Font styles
- fonts: Typefaces
-- fonts, new commands for: \newfont
-- footer style: \pagestyle
-- footer, parameters for: Page layout parameters
-- footnote number, cross referencing: \ref
-- footnote parameters: Footnote parameters
-- footnotes in figures: minipage
-- footnotes, creating: Footnotes
-- formulas, environment for: equation
-- formulas, math: Math formulas
-- fragile commands: \protect
-- functions, math: Math functions
+- fonts, new commands for: \newfont
+- footer style: \pagestyle
+- footer, parameters for: Page layout parameters
+- footnote number, cross referencing: \ref
+- footnote parameters: Footnote parameters
+- footnotes in figures: minipage
+- footnotes, creating: Footnotes
+- footnotes, symbolic instead of numbered: Symbolic footnotes
+- formulas, environment for: equation
+- formulas, math: Math formulas
+- fragile commands: \protect
+- French quotation marks: Text symbols
+- functions, math: Math functions
- global options: Document class options
-- glossaries: Glossaries
-- grave accent: Accents
-- grave accent, math: Math accents
-- greek letters: Math symbols
-- hác<ek accent, math: Math accents
-- hacek accent: Accents
-- hat accent: Accents
-- hat accent, math: Math accents
-- header style: \pagestyle
-- header, parameters for: Page layout parameters
-- hungarian umlaut accent: Accents
-- hyphenation, defining: \hyphenation
-- hyphenation, forcing: \- (hyphenation)
-- hyphenation, preventing: \mbox
-- in-line formulas: math
-- indent, forcing: \indent
-- indent, suppressing: \noindent
-- indentation of paragraphs, in minipage: minipage
-- indexes: Indexes
-- input file: Splitting the input
-- input/Output: Terminal Input/Output
-- inserting figures: figure
+- glossaries: Glossaries
+- grave accent: Accents
+- grave accent, math: Math accents
+- greater than symbol, in text: Text symbols
+- greek letters: Math symbols
+- hác<ek accent, math: Math accents
+- hacek accent: Accents
+- hat accent: Accents
+- hat accent, math: Math accents
+- header style: \pagestyle
+- header, parameters for: Page layout parameters
+- hungarian umlaut accent: Accents
+- hyphenation, defining: \hyphenation
+- hyphenation, forcing: \- (hyphenation)
+- hyphenation, preventing: \mbox
+- Icelandic eth: Non-English characters
+- Icelandic thorn: Non-English characters
+- ij letter, Dutch: Non-English characters
+- in-line formulas: math
+- indent, forcing: \indent
+- indent, suppressing: \noindent
+- indentation of paragraphs, in minipage: minipage
+- indexes: Indexes
+- input file: Splitting the input
+- input/output: Terminal input/output
+- inserting figures: figure
- italic font: Font styles
-- justification, ragged left: \raggedleft
-- justification, ragged right: \raggedright
+- justification, ragged left: \raggedleft
+- justification, ragged right: \raggedright
- Knuth, Donald E.: Top
-- labelled lists, creating: description
+- labelled lists, creating: description
- Lamport, Leslie: Top
-- LaTeX logo: Text symbols
+- LaTeX logo: Text symbols
- LaTeX overview: Overview
- LaTeX Project team: Top
-- layout commands: Layout
-- layout, page parameters for: Page layout parameters
-- left quote: Text symbols
-- left-justifying text: \raggedright
-- left-justifying text, environment for: flushleft
-- left-to-right mode: Modes
-- lengths, adding to: \addtolength
-- lengths, defining and using: Lengths
-- lengths, defining new: \newlength
-- lengths, predefined: Predefined lengths
-- lengths, setting: \setlength
-- letters: Letters
-- letters, accented: Accents
-- letters, ending: \closing
-- letters, non-English: Non-English characters
-- letters, starting: \opening
-- line break, forcing: \\
-- line breaking: Line breaking
-- line breaks, forcing: \linebreak & \nolinebreak
-- line breaks, preventing: \linebreak & \nolinebreak
-- lines in tables: tabular
-- lining text up in columns using tab stops: tabbing
-- lining text up in tables: tabular
-- list items, specifying counter: \usecounter
-- lists of items: itemize
-- lists of items, generic: list
-- lists of items, numbered: enumerate
+- layout commands: Layout
+- layout, page parameters for: Page layout parameters
+- left angle quotation marks: Text symbols
+- left arrow, in text: Text symbols
+- left brace, in text: Text symbols
+- left quote: Text symbols
+- left quote, double: Text symbols
+- left quote, single: Text symbols
+- left-justifying text: \raggedright
+- left-justifying text, environment for: flushleft
+- left-to-right mode: Modes
+- lengths, adding to: \addtolength
+- lengths, defining and using: Lengths
+- lengths, defining new: \newlength
+- lengths, predefined: Predefined lengths
+- lengths, setting: \setlength
+- less than symbol, in text: Text symbols
+- letters: Letters
+- letters, accented: Accents
+- letters, ending: \closing
+- letters, non-English: Non-English characters
+- letters, starting: \opening
+- line break, forcing: \\
+- line breaking: Line breaking
+- line breaks, forcing: \linebreak & \nolinebreak
+- line breaks, preventing: \linebreak & \nolinebreak
+- lines in tables: tabular
+- lining text up in columns using tab stops: tabbing
+- lining text up in tables: tabular
+- list items, specifying counter: \usecounter
+- lists of items: itemize
+- lists of items, generic: list
+- lists of items, numbered: enumerate
- loading additional packages: Document class options
-- logo, LaTeX: Text symbols
-- logo, TeX: Text symbols
+- logo, LaTeX: Text symbols
+- logo, TeX: Text symbols
+- low-9 quotation marks, single and double: Text symbols
- low-level font commands: Low-level font commands
-- lR mode: Modes
-- macron accent: Accents
-- macron accent, math: Math accents
-- -
makeidx
package: Indexes- makeindex program: Indexes
-- making a title page: titlepage
-- making paragraphs: Making paragraphs
-- marginal notes: Marginal notes
-- math accents: Math accents
-- math formulas: Math formulas
-- math functions: Math functions
-- math Miscellany: Math Miscellany
-- math mode: Modes
-- math mode, entering: Math formulas
-- math mode, spacing: Spacing in math mode
-- math symbols: Math symbols
-- minipage, creating a: minipage
-- modes: Modes
+- lR mode: Modes
+- macron accent: Accents
+- macron accent, math: Math accents
+- +
makeidx
package: Indexes- makeindex program: Indexes
+- making a title page: titlepage
+- making paragraphs: Making paragraphs
+- marginal notes: Marginal notes
+- masculine ordinal symbol: Text symbols
+- math accents: Math accents
+- math formulas: Math formulas
+- math functions: Math functions
+- math miscellany: Math miscellany
+- math mode: Modes
+- math mode, entering: Math formulas
+- math mode, spacing: Spacing in math mode
+- math symbols: Math symbols
+- minipage, creating a: minipage
+- modes: Modes
- monospace font: Font styles
-- moving arguments: \protect
-- multicolumn text: \twocolumn
-- -
multind
package: Indexes- multiplication symbol, discretionary line break: Math Miscellany
-- nested
-\include
, not allowed: \include- new commands, defining: \newcommand & \renewcommand
-- new line, output as input: \obeycr & \restorecr
-- new line, starting: \\
-- new line, starting (paragraph mode): \newline
-- new page, starting: \newpage
-- non-English characters: Non-English characters
-- notes in the margin: Marginal notes
-- null delimiter: Math Miscellany
-- numbered items, specifying counter: \usecounter
+- moving arguments: \protect
+- multicolumn text: \twocolumn
+- +
multind
package: Indexes- multiplication symbol, discretionary line break: Math miscellany
+- nested
+\include
, not allowed: \include- new commands, defining: \newcommand & \renewcommand
+- new line, output as input: \obeycr & \restorecr
+- new line, starting: \\
+- new line, starting (paragraph mode): \newline
+- new page, starting: \newpage
+- non-English characters: Non-English characters
+- notes in the margin: Marginal notes
+- null delimiter: Math miscellany
+- numbered items, specifying counter: \usecounter
- oblique font: Font styles
-- oe ligature: Non-English characters
-- one-column output: \onecolumn
-- opening quote: Text symbols
+- oe ligature: Non-English characters
+- ogonek: Accents
+- one-column output: \onecolumn
+- opening quote: Text symbols
- options, document class: Document class options
- options, global: Document class options
-- oslash: Non-English characters
-- overbar accent: Accents
-- overdot accent, math: Math accents
+- ordinals, feminine and masculine: Text symbols
+- oslash: Non-English characters
+- overbar accent: Accents
+- overdot accent, math: Math accents
- overview of LaTeX: Overview
- packages, loading: Document class options
-- page break, forcing: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak
-- page break, preventing: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak
-- page breaking: Page breaking
-- page layout parameters: Page layout parameters
-- page number, cross referencing: \pageref
-- page numbering style: \pagenumbering
-- page styles: Page Styles
-- paragraph indentation, in minipage: minipage
-- paragraph indentations in quoted text: quotation
-- paragraph indentations in quoted text, omitting: quote
-- paragraph mode: Modes
-- paragraph sign: Text symbols
-- paragraphs: Making paragraphs
-- parameters, page layout: Page layout parameters
-- pictures, creating: picture
-- pilcrow: Text symbols
-- poetry, an environment for: verse
-- polish l: Non-English characters
-- postscript, in letters: \ps
-- pounds symbol: Text symbols
+- page break, forcing: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak
+- page break, preventing: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak
+- page breaking: Page breaking
+- page layout parameters: Page layout parameters
+- page number, cross referencing: \pageref
+- page numbering style: \pagenumbering
+- page styles: Page styles
+- paragraph indentation, in minipage: minipage
+- paragraph indentations in quoted text: quotation
+- paragraph indentations in quoted text, omitting: quote
+- paragraph mode: Modes
+- paragraph symbol: Text symbols
+- paragraphs: Making paragraphs
+- parameters, for footnotes: Footnote parameters
+- parameters, page layout: Page layout parameters
+- period, centered, in text: Text symbols
+- pictures, creating: picture
+- pilcrow: Text symbols
+- poetry, an environment for: verse
+- polish l: Non-English characters
+- postscript, in letters: \ps
+- pounds symbol: Text symbols
- preamble, defined: Starting & ending
-- predefined lengths: Predefined lengths
-- prompt, ‘*’: Command Line
-- quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying: quotation
-- quoted text without paragraph indentation, displaying: quote
-- ragged left text: \raggedleft
-- ragged left text, environment for: flushright
-- ragged right text: \raggedright
-- ragged right text, environment for: flushleft
-- redefining environments: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment
-- remarks in the margin: Marginal notes
-- reserved characters: Reserved characters
-- right quote: Text symbols
-- right-justifying text: \raggedleft
-- right-justifying text, environment for: flushright
-- robust commands: \protect
+- predefined lengths: Predefined lengths
+- prompt, ‘*’: Command line
+- questionation point, upside-down: Text symbols
+- quotation marks, French: Text symbols
+- quote, straight base: Text symbols
+- quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying: quotation
+- quoted text without paragraph indentation, displaying: quote
+- ragged left text: \raggedleft
+- ragged left text, environment for: flushright
+- ragged right text: \raggedright
+- ragged right text, environment for: flushleft
+- redefining environments: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment
+- registered symbol: Text symbols
+- remarks in the margin: Marginal notes
+- reserved characters: Reserved characters
+- right angle quotation marks: Text symbols
+- right arrow, in text: Text symbols
+- right brace, in text: Text symbols
+- right quote: Text symbols
+- right quote, double: Text symbols
+- right quote, single: Text symbols
+- right-justifying text: \raggedleft
+- right-justifying text, environment for: flushright
+- ring accent: Accents
+- robust commands: \protect
- roman font: Font styles
-- running header and footer: Page layout parameters
-- running header and footer style: \pagestyle
+- running header and footer: Page layout parameters
+- running header and footer style: \pagestyle
- sans serif font: Font styles
- script letters for math: Font styles
-- section number, cross referencing: \ref
-- section symbol: Text symbols
-- sectioning: Sectioning
+- section number, cross referencing: \ref
+- section numbers, printing: Sectioning
+- section symbol: Text symbols
+- sectioning: Sectioning
- -
setspace
package: Low-level font commands- setting counters: \setcounter
-- sharp S letters: Non-English characters
-- -
showidx
package: Indexes- simulating typed text: verbatim
+- setting counters: \setcounter
+- sharp S letters: Non-English characters
+- +
showidx
package: Indexes- simulating typed text: verbatim
+- single angle quotation marks: Text symbols
+- single guillemets: Text symbols
+- single left quote: Text symbols
+- single low-9 quotation mark: Text symbols
+- single right quote: Text symbols
- sizes of text: Font sizes
- slanted font: Font styles
- small caps font: Font styles
-- space, inserting vertical: \addvspace
-- spaces: Spaces
-- spacing within math mode: Spacing in math mode
-- special characters: Non-English characters
-- splitting the input file: Splitting the input
+- space, inserting vertical: \addvspace
+- spaces: Spaces
+- spacing within math mode: Spacing in math mode
+- Spanish ordinals, feminine and masculine: Text symbols
+- special characters: Non-English characters
+- splitting the input file: Splitting the input
- starting & ending: Starting & ending
-- starting a new page: \newpage
-- starting a new page and clearing floats: \clearpage
-- starting on a right-hand page: \cleardoublepage
-- sterling symbol: Text symbols
-- stretch, omitting vertical: \raggedbottom
+- starting a new page: \newpage
+- starting a new page and clearing floats: \clearpage
+- starting on a right-hand page: \cleardoublepage
+- sterling symbol: Text symbols
+- straight double quote, base: Text symbols
+- straight quote, base: Text symbols
+- stretch, omitting vertical: \raggedbottom
- styles of text: Font styles
-- styles, page: Page Styles
-- subscript: Subscripts & Superscripts
-- superscript: Subscripts & Superscripts
-- symbols, math: Math symbols
-- tab stops, using: tabbing
-- table of contents entry, manually adding: \addcontentsline
-- table of contents, creating: Tables of contents
-- tables, creating: table
-- terminal Input/Output: Terminal Input/Output
-- TeX logo: Text symbols
-- text symbols: Text symbols
-- thanks, for titlepage: \maketitle
-- theorems, defining: \newtheorem
-- theorems, typesetting: theorem
-- tie-after accent: Accents
-- tilde accent: Accents
-- tilde accent, math: Math accents
-- title pages, creating: titlepage
-- title, for titlepage: \maketitle
-- titles, making: \maketitle
-- two-column output: \twocolumn
-- typed text, simulating: verbatim
+- styles, page: Page styles
+- subscript: Subscripts & superscripts
+- superscript: Subscripts & superscripts
+- symbols, math: Math symbols
+- tab stops, using: tabbing
+- table of contents entry, manually adding: \addcontentsline
+- table of contents, creating: Tables of contents
+- tables, creating: table
+- terminal input/output: Terminal input/output
+- TeX logo: Text symbols
+- text symbols: Text symbols
+- thanks, for titlepage: \maketitle
+- theorems, defining: \newtheorem
+- theorems, typesetting: theorem
+- thorn, Icelandic letter: Non-English characters
+- three-quarters em-dash: Text symbols
+- tie-after accent: Accents
+- tilde accent: Accents
+- tilde accent, math: Math accents
+- tilde, ASCII, in text: Text symbols
+- title pages, creating: titlepage
+- title, for titlepage: \maketitle
+- titles, making: \maketitle
+- trademark symbol: Text symbols
+- two-column output: \twocolumn
+- typed text, simulating: verbatim
- typeface sizes: Font sizes
- typeface styles: Font styles
- typefaces: Typefaces
- typewriter font: Font styles
-- typewriter labels in lists: description
-- umlaut accent: Accents
-- unordered lists: itemize
-- using BibTeX: Using BibTeX
-- variables, a list of: Counters
-- vector symbol, math: Math accents
-- verbatim text: verbatim
-- verbatim text, inline: \verb
-- vertical space: \addvspace
-- vertical space before paragraphs: \parskip
-- visible space: \verb
-- wide hat accent, math: Math accents
-- wide tile accent, math: Math accents
-- xindy program: Indexes
+- typewriter labels in lists: description
+- umlaut accent: Accents
+- underbar: Accents
+- underscore, in text: Text symbols
+- unordered lists: itemize
+- using BibTeX: Using BibTeX
+- variables, a list of: Counters
+- vector symbol, math: Math accents
+- verbatim text: verbatim
+- verbatim text, inline: \verb
+- vertical bar, double, in text: Text symbols
+- vertical bar, in text: Text symbols
+- vertical space: \addvspace
+- vertical space before paragraphs: \parskip
+- visible space: \verb
+- visible space symbol, in text: Text symbols
+- wide hat accent, math: Math accents
+- wide tile accent, math: Math accents
+- xindy program: Indexes
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.pdf index ed92a9e7aad..b20b27703af 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.texi b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.texi index 2eef185e6f4..b70996d1b16 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.texi +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.texi @@ -1,23 +1,30 @@ \input texinfo -@c $Id: latex2e.texi 244 2009-09-07 17:14:36Z karl $ +@c $Id: latex2e.texi 255 2010-07-12 17:37:55Z karl $ @comment %**start of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region.) @setfilename latex2e.info -@set UPDATED September 2009 +@set UPDATED July 2010 @settitle @LaTeX{}2e reference manual (@value{UPDATED}) @comment %**end of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region.) +@c xx latex 2.09 commands should all be present now, +@c xx but latex2e stuff is missing. +@c +@c xx mention \mathring +@c xx mention usrguide +@c xx mention ! float placement, p.15 of usrguide @c xx merge http://ctan.org/tex-archive/info/latex-info/ -@c xx check http://ctan.org/tex-archive/info/latexcheat @c -@c xx latex 2.09 should be complete, but latex2e stuff is missing. @c xx The typeset source2e will have an index with all kernel @c xx commands, which would be a good start. classes.dtx et al. @c xx define additional commands, and some of the kernel commands are @c xx internal and so shouldn't be included here. +@c +@c xx packages -- required, additional, useful; oberdiek ... +@c xx fonts -- latexsys @copying This document is an unofficial reference manual for @LaTeX{}, a -document preparation system, version as of @value{UPDATED}. +document preparation system, version of @value{UPDATED}. This was originally translated from @file{LATEX.HLP} v1.0a in the VMS Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by @@ -31,7 +38,7 @@ and C.@tie{}Biemesderfer (published by the @TeX{} Users Group as @cite{@TeX{}niques} number 10), as reference material (text was not directly copied). -Copyright @copyright{} 2007, 2008, 2009 Karl Berry.@* +Copyright @copyright{} 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010 Karl Berry.@* Copyright @copyright{} 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore.@* Copyright @copyright{} 1994, 1995, 1996 Torsten Martinsen. @@ -114,18 +121,18 @@ maintainers. * Making paragraphs:: Paragraph commands. * Math formulas:: How to create mathematical formulas. * Modes:: Paragraph, Math or LR modes. -* Page Styles:: Various styles of page layout. +* Page styles:: Various styles of page layout. * Spaces:: Horizontal and vertical space. * Boxes:: Making boxes. * Special insertions:: Inserting reserved and special characters. * Splitting the input:: Dealing with big files by splitting. * Front/back matter:: Tables of contents, glossaries, indexes. * Letters:: The letter class. -* Terminal Input/Output:: User interaction. -* Command Line:: System-independent command-line behavior. +* Terminal input/output:: User interaction. +* Command line:: System-independent command-line behavior. * Document templates:: Starter templates for various document classes. -* Command Index:: Alphabetical list of @LaTeX{} commands. * Concept Index:: General index. +* Command Index:: Alphabetical list of @LaTeX{} commands. @end menu @@ -658,6 +665,7 @@ is 1.2 times the @code{\fontsize}. @findex \baselinestretch @cindex @code{setspace} package +@cindex double spacing The line spacing is also multiplied by the value of the @code{\baselinestretch} parameter when the type size changes; the default is 1. However, the best way to ``double space'' a document, @@ -665,9 +673,16 @@ if you should be unlucky enough to have to produce such, is to use the @code{setspace} package; see @url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=linespace}. -@item \selectfont +@findex \linespread +@item \linespread@{@var{factor}@} +Equivalent to +@code{\renewcommand@{\baselinestretch@}@{@var{factor}@}}, and +therefore must be followed by @code{\selectfont} to have any effect. +Best specified in the preamble, or use the @code{setspace} package, as +described just above. + @findex \selectfont -The changes made by calling the four font commands described above do +The changes made by calling the font commands described above do not come into effect until @code{\selectfont} is called. @item \usefont@{enc@}@{family@}@{series@}@{shape@} @@ -675,6 +690,7 @@ not come into effect until @code{\selectfont} is called. The same as invoking @code{\fontencoding}, @code{\fontfamily}, @code{\fontseries} and @code{\fontshape} with the given parameters, followed by @code{\selectfont}. + @end table @@ -904,6 +920,19 @@ command is something like \chapter@{The First Appendix@} @end example +@findex secnumdepth @r{counter} +@cindex section numbers, printing +The @code{secnumdepth} counter controls printing of section numbers. +The setting + +@example +\setcounter@{secnumdepth@}@{@var{level}@} +@end example + +@noindent +suppresses heading numbers at any depth @math{> @var{level}}, where +@code{chapter} is level zero. (@xref{\setcounter}.) + @node Cross references @chapter Cross references @@ -1213,6 +1242,7 @@ For details about list spacing, see @ref{itemize}. @findex displaymath @r{environment} Synopsis: + @example \begin@{displaymath@} @var{math} @@ -2395,8 +2425,8 @@ A vertical line the full height and depth of the environment. This inserts @var{text} in every row. An @@-expression suppresses the intercolumn space normally inserted between columns; any desired space between the inserted text and the adjacent items must be included in -text. An @code{\extracolsep@{wd@}} command in an @@-expression causes -an extra space of width @code{wd} to appear to the left of all +@var{text}. An @code{\extracolsep@{wd@}} command in an @@-expression +causes an extra space of width @code{wd} to appear to the left of all subsequent columns, until countermanded by another @code{\extracolsep} command. Unlike ordinary intercolumn space, this extra space is not suppressed by an @@-expression. An @code{\extracolsep} command can be @@ -2796,171 +2826,437 @@ stanza with @code{\\}, and use one or more blank lines to separate the stanzas. -@node Footnotes -@chapter Footnotes -@cindex footnotes, creating +@node Line breaking +@chapter Line breaking +@cindex line breaking +@cindex breaking lines -Footnotes can be produced in one of two ways. They can be produced -with one command, the @code{\footnote} command. They can also be -produced with two commands, the @code{\footnotemark} and the -@code{\footnotetext} commands. +The first thing @LaTeX{} does when processing ordinary text is to +translate your input file into a sequence of glyphs and spaces. To +produce a printed document, this sequence must be broken into lines +(and these lines must be broken into pages). + +@LaTeX{} usually does the line (and page) breaking for you, but in +some environments, you do the line breaking yourself with the +@code{\\} command, and you can always manually force breaks. @menu -* \footnote:: Insert a footnote. -* \footnotemark:: Insert footnote mark only. -* \footnotetext:: Insert footnote text only. -* Footnote parameters:: Parameters for footnote formatting. +* \\:: Start a new line. +* \obeycr & \restorecr:: Make each input line start a new output line. +* \newline:: Break the line +* \- (hyphenation):: Insert explicit hyphenation. +* \fussy:: Be fussy about line breaking. +* \sloppy:: Be sloppy about line breaking. +* \hyphenation:: Tell @LaTeX{} how to hyphenate a word. +* \linebreak & \nolinebreak:: Forcing & avoiding line breaks. @end menu -@node \footnote -@section @code{\footnote} -@findex \footnote +@node \\ +@section @code{\\}[*][@var{morespace}] +@findex \\ @r{force line break} +@cindex new line, starting +@cindex line break, forcing -Synopsis: +The @code{\\} command tells @LaTeX{} to start a new line. It has an +optional argument, @var{morespace}, that specifies how much extra +vertical space is to be inserted before the next line. This can be a +negative amount. -@example -\footnote[@var{number}]@{@var{text}@} -@end example +The @code{\\*} command is the same as the ordinary @code{\\} command +except that it tells @LaTeX{} not to start a new page after the line. -The @code{\footnote} command places the numbered footnote @var{text} -at the bottom of the current page. The optional argument @var{number} -changes the default footnote number. -This command can only be used in outer paragraph mode; i.e., you -cannot use it in sectioning commands like @code{\chapter}, in figures, -tables or in a @code{tabular} environment. (See following sections.) -@c xx mention packages that fix this +@node \obeycr & \restorecr +@section @code{\obeycr} & @code{\restorecr} +@findex \obeycr +@findex \restorecr +@cindex new line, output as input +The @code{\obeycr} command makes a return in the input file +(@samp{^^M}, internally) the same as @code{\\} (followed by +@code{\relax}). So each new line in the input will also be a new line +in the output. -@node \footnotemark -@section @code{\footnotemark} -@findex \footnotemark +@code{\restorecr} restores normal line-breaking behavior. -With no optional argument, the @code{\footnotemark} command puts the -current footnote number in the text. This command can be used in -inner paragraph mode. You give the text of the footnote separately, -with the @code{\footnotetext} command. -This command can be used to produce several consecutive footnote -markers referring to the same footnote with +@node \newline +@section @code{\newline} +@findex \newline +@cindex new line, starting (paragraph mode) -@example -\footnotemark[\value@{footnote@}] -@end example +The @code{\newline} command breaks the line at the present point, with +no stretching of the text before it. It can only be used in paragraph +mode. -after the first @code{\footnote} command. +@node \- (hyphenation) +@section @code{\-} (discretionary hyphen) +@findex \- @r{(hyphenation)} +@cindex hyphenation, forcing -@node \footnotetext -@section @code{\footnotetext} -@findex \footnotetext +The @code{\-} command tells @LaTeX{} that it may hyphenate the word at +that point. @LaTeX{} is very good at hyphenating, and it will usually +find most of the correct hyphenation points, and almost never use an +incorrect one. The @code{\-} command is used for the exceptional +cases. -Synopsis: +When you insert @code{\-} commands in a word, the word will only be +hyphenated at those points and not at any of the hyphenation points +that @LaTeX{} might otherwise have chosen. -@example -\footnotetext[@var{number}]@{@var{text}@} -@end example -The @code{\footnotetext} command places @var{text} at the bottom of -the page as a footnote. This command can come anywhere after the -@code{\footnotemark} command. The @code{\footnotetext} command must -appear in outer paragraph mode. -The optional argument @var{number} changes the default footnote number. +@node \fussy +@section @code{\fussy} +@findex \fussy + +The declaration @code{\fussy} (which is the default) makes @TeX{} +picky about line breaking. This usually avoids too much space between +words, at the cost of an occasional overfull box. +This command cancels the effect of a previous @code{\sloppy} command +(@pxref{\sloppy}. -@node Footnote parameters -@section Footnote parameters -@cindex footnote parameters +@node \sloppy +@section @code{\sloppy} -@ftable @code -@item \footnoterule -Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the page's -footnotes. Default dimensions: @code{0.4pt} thick (or wide), and -@code{0.4\columnwidth} long in the standard document classes (except -slides, where it does not appear). +The declaration @code{\sloppy} makes @TeX{} less fussy about line +breaking. This will avoid overfull boxes, at the cost of loose +interword spacing. -@item \footnotesep -The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote. By -default, this is set to the normal strut for @code{\footnotesize} -fonts (@pxref{Font sizes}), therefore there is no extra space between -footnotes. This is @samp{6.65pt} for @samp{10pt}, @samp{7.7pt} for -@samp{11pt}, and @samp{8.4pt} for @samp{12pt}. +Lasts until a @code{\fussy} command is issued (@pxref{\fussy}). -@end ftable +@node \hyphenation +@section @code{\hyphenation} +@findex \hyphenation +@cindex hyphenation, defining -@node Definitions -@chapter Definitions -@cindex definitions +Synopsis: -@LaTeX{} has support for making new commands of many different kinds. +@example +\hyphenation@{@var{word-one} @var{word-two}@} +@end example -@c xx everything in this chapter needs examples. +The @code{\hyphenation} command declares allowed hyphenation points +with a @code{-} character in the given words. The words are separated +by spaces. @TeX{} will only hyphenate if the word matches exactly, no +inflections are tried. Multiple @code{\hyphenation} commands +accumulate. Some examples (the default @TeX{} hyphenation patterns +misses the hyphenations in these words): -@menu -* \newcommand & \renewcommand:: (Re)define a new command. -* \newcounter:: Define a new counter. -* \newlength:: Define a new length. -* \newsavebox:: Define a new box. -* \newenvironment & \renewenvironment:: Define a new environment. -* \newtheorem:: Define a new theorem-like environment. -* \newfont:: Define a new font name. -* \protect:: Using tricky commands. -@end menu +@example +\hyphenation@{ap-pen-dix col-umns data-base data-bases@} +@end example -@node \newcommand & \renewcommand -@section @code{\newcommand} & @code{\renewcommand} -@findex \newcommand -@cindex commands, defining new ones -@cindex defining a new command -@cindex new commands, defining +@node \linebreak & \nolinebreak +@section @code{\linebreak} & @code{\nolinebreak} +@findex \linebreak +@findex \nolinebreak +@cindex line breaks, forcing +@cindex line breaks, preventing -@code{\newcommand} and @code{\renewcommand} define and redefine a -command, respectively. Synopses: +Synopses: @example - \newcommand@{@var{cmd}@}[@var{nargs}]@{@var{defn}@} -\renewcommand@{@var{cmd}@}[@var{nargs}]@{@var{defn}@} - \newcommand@{@var{cmd}@}[@var{nargs}][@var{default}]@{@var{defn}@} -\renewcommand@{@var{cmd}@}[@var{nargs}][@var{default}]@{@var{defn}@} +\linebreak[@var{priority}] +\nolinebreak[@var{priority}] @end example +By default, the @code{\linebreak} (@code{\nolinebreak}) command forces +(prevents) a line break at the current position. For +@code{\linebreak}, the spaces in the line are stretched out so that it +extends to the right margin as usual. -@table @var -@item cmd -The command name beginning with @code{\}. For @code{\newcommand}, it -must not be already defined and must not begin with @code{\end}; for -@code{\renewcommand}, it must already be defined. +With the optional argument @var{priority}, you can convert the command +from a demand to a request. The @var{priority} must be a number from +0 to@tie{}4. The higher the number, the more insistent the request. -@item nargs -An optional integer from 1 to 9 specifying the number of arguments -that the command will take. The default is for the command to have no -arguments. -@item default -If this optional parameter is present, it means that the command's -first argument is optional. When the new command is called, the -default value of the optional argument (i.e., if it is not specified -in the call) is the string @samp{def}. +@node Page breaking +@chapter Page breaking +@cindex page breaking +@cindex breaking pages -@item defn -The text to be substituted for every occurrence of @code{cmd}; a -construct of the form @code{#@var{n}} in @var{defn} is replaced by the -text of the @var{n}th argument. +@LaTeX{} starts new pages asynchronously, when enough material has +accumulated to fill up a page. Usually this happens automatically, +but sometimes you may want to influence the breaks. -@end table +@menu +* \cleardoublepage:: Start a new right-hand page. +* \clearpage:: Start a new page. +* \newpage:: Start a new page. +* \enlargethispage:: Enlarge the current page a bit. +* \pagebreak & \nopagebreak:: Forcing & avoiding page breaks. +@end menu -@node \newcounter -@section @code{\newcounter} -@findex \newcounter -@cindex counters, defining new +@node \cleardoublepage +@section @code{\cleardoublepage} -Synopsis: +@findex \cleardoublepage +@cindex starting on a right-hand page + +The @code{\cleardoublepage} command ends the current page and causes all +figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed. +In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the next page a right-hand +(odd-numbered) page, producing a blank page if necessary. + + +@node \clearpage +@section @code{\clearpage} +@findex \clearpage +@cindex flushing floats and starting a page +@cindex starting a new page and clearing floats + +The @code{\clearpage} command ends the current page and causes all +figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed. + + +@node \newpage +@section @code{\newpage} +@findex \newpage +@cindex new page, starting +@cindex starting a new page + +The @code{\newpage} command ends the current page, but does not clear +floats (see @code{\clearpage} above). + + +@node \enlargethispage +@section @code{\enlargethispage} +@findex \enlargethispage +@cindex enlarge current page + +@code{\enlargethispage@{size@}} + +@code{\enlargethispage*@{size@}} + +Enlarge the @code{\textheight} for the current page by the specified +amount; e.g. @code{\enlargethispage@{\baselineskip@}} will allow one +additional line. + +The starred form tries to squeeze the material together on the page as +much as possible. This is normally used together with an explicit +@code{\pagebreak}. + + +@node \pagebreak & \nopagebreak +@section @code{\pagebreak} & @code{\nopagebreak} +@findex \pagebreak +@findex \nopagebreak +@cindex page break, forcing +@cindex page break, preventing + +Synopses: + +@example +\pagebreak[@var{priority}] +\nopagebreak[@var{priority}] +@end example + +By default, the @code{\pagebreak} (@code{\nopagebreak}) command forces +(prevents) a page break at the current position. For +@code{\linebreak}, the vertical space on the page is stretched out +where possible so that it extends to the normal bottom margin. + +With the optional argument @var{priority}, you can convert the +@code{\pagebreak} command from a demand to a request. The number must +be a number from 0 to@tie{}4. The higher the number, the more +insistent the request is. + + +@node Footnotes +@chapter Footnotes +@cindex footnotes, creating + +Footnotes can be produced in one of two ways. They can be produced +with one command, the @code{\footnote} command. They can also be +produced with two commands, the @code{\footnotemark} and the +@code{\footnotetext} commands. + +@menu +* \footnote:: Insert a footnote. +* \footnotemark:: Insert footnote mark only. +* \footnotetext:: Insert footnote text only. +* Symbolic footnotes:: Using symbols instead of numbers for footnotes. +* Footnote parameters:: Parameters for footnote formatting. +@end menu + + +@node \footnote +@section @code{\footnote} +@findex \footnote + +Synopsis: + +@example +\footnote[@var{number}]@{@var{text}@} +@end example + +The @code{\footnote} command places the numbered footnote @var{text} +at the bottom of the current page. The optional argument @var{number} +changes the default footnote number. + +This command can only be used in outer paragraph mode; i.e., you +cannot use it in sectioning commands like @code{\chapter}, in figures, +tables or in a @code{tabular} environment. (See following sections.) +@c xx mention packages that fix this + + +@node \footnotemark +@section @code{\footnotemark} +@findex \footnotemark + +With no optional argument, the @code{\footnotemark} command puts the +current footnote number in the text. This command can be used in +inner paragraph mode. You give the text of the footnote separately, +with the @code{\footnotetext} command. + +This command can be used to produce several consecutive footnote +markers referring to the same footnote with + +@example +\footnotemark[\value@{footnote@}] +@end example + +@noindent +after the first @code{\footnote} command. + + +@node \footnotetext +@section @code{\footnotetext} +@findex \footnotetext + +Synopsis: + +@example +\footnotetext[@var{number}]@{@var{text}@} +@end example + +The @code{\footnotetext} command places @var{text} at the bottom of +the page as a footnote. This command can come anywhere after the +@code{\footnotemark} command. The @code{\footnotetext} command must +appear in outer paragraph mode. + +The optional argument @var{number} changes the default footnote number. + + +@node Symbolic footnotes +@section Symbolic footnotes + +@cindex footnotes, symbolic instead of numbered +If you want to use symbols for footnotes, rather than increasing +numbers, redefine @code{\thefootnote} like this: + +@example +\renewcommand@{\thefootnote@}@{\fnsymbol@{footnote@}@} +@end example + +@findex \fnsymbol@r{, and footnotes} +@findex \@@fnsymbol +The @code{\fnsymbol} command produces a predefined series of symbols +(@pxref{\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol}). If you want to +use a different symbol as your footnote mark, you'll need to also +redefine @code{\@@fnsymbol}. + + +@node Footnote parameters +@section Footnote parameters + +@cindex footnote parameters +@cindex parameters, for footnotes + +@ftable @code +@item \footnoterule +Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the page's +footnotes. Default dimensions: @code{0.4pt} thick (or wide), and +@code{0.4\columnwidth} long in the standard document classes (except +slides, where it does not appear). + +@item \footnotesep +The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote. By +default, this is set to the normal strut for @code{\footnotesize} +fonts (@pxref{Font sizes}), therefore there is no extra space between +footnotes. This is @samp{6.65pt} for @samp{10pt}, @samp{7.7pt} for +@samp{11pt}, and @samp{8.4pt} for @samp{12pt}. + +@end ftable + + +@node Definitions +@chapter Definitions +@cindex definitions + +@LaTeX{} has support for making new commands of many different kinds. + +@c xx everything in this chapter needs examples. + +@menu +* \newcommand & \renewcommand:: (Re)define a new command. +* \newcounter:: Define a new counter. +* \newlength:: Define a new length. +* \newsavebox:: Define a new box. +* \newenvironment & \renewenvironment:: Define a new environment. +* \newtheorem:: Define a new theorem-like environment. +* \newfont:: Define a new font name. +* \protect:: Using tricky commands. +@end menu + + +@node \newcommand & \renewcommand +@section @code{\newcommand} & @code{\renewcommand} +@findex \newcommand +@cindex commands, defining new ones +@cindex defining a new command +@cindex new commands, defining + +@code{\newcommand} and @code{\renewcommand} define and redefine a +command, respectively. Synopses: + +@example + \newcommand@{@var{cmd}@}[@var{nargs}]@{@var{defn}@} +\renewcommand@{@var{cmd}@}[@var{nargs}]@{@var{defn}@} + \newcommand@{@var{cmd}@}[@var{nargs}][@var{default}]@{@var{defn}@} +\renewcommand@{@var{cmd}@}[@var{nargs}][@var{default}]@{@var{defn}@} +@end example + + +@table @var +@item cmd +The command name beginning with @code{\}. For @code{\newcommand}, it +must not be already defined and must not begin with @code{\end}; for +@code{\renewcommand}, it must already be defined. + +@item nargs +An optional integer from 1 to 9 specifying the number of arguments +that the command will take. The default is for the command to have no +arguments. + +@item default +If this optional parameter is present, it means that the command's +first argument is optional. When the new command is called, the +default value of the optional argument (i.e., if it is not specified +in the call) is the string @samp{def}. + +@item defn +The text to be substituted for every occurrence of @code{cmd}; a +construct of the form @code{#@var{n}} in @var{defn} is replaced by the +text of the @var{n}th argument. + +@end table + + +@node \newcounter +@section @code{\newcounter} +@findex \newcounter +@cindex counters, defining new + +Synopsis: @example \newcounter@{@var{cnt}@}[@var{countername}] @@ -3213,442 +3509,198 @@ The symbols mostly aren't supported in Info, but here are the names: asterix(*) dagger ddagger section-sign paragraph-sign parallel double-asterix(**) double-dagger double-ddagger @end display -@end ifnottex - -@end ftable - - -@node \usecounter -@section @code{\usecounter@{@var{counter}@}} -@findex \usecounter -@cindex list items, specifying counter -@cindex numbered items, specifying counter - -Synopsis: - -@example -\usecounter@{@var{counter}@} -@end example - -The @code{\usecounter} command is used in the second argument of the -@code{list} environment to specify @var{counter} to be used to number -the list items. - - -@node \value -@section @code{\value@{@var{counter}@}} -@findex \value -@cindex counters, getting value of - -Synopsis: - -@example -\value@{@var{counter}@} -@end example - -The @code{\value} command produces the value of @var{counter}. It can -be used anywhere @LaTeX{} expects a number, for example: - -@example -\setcounter@{myctr@}@{3@} -\addtocounter@{myctr@}@{1@} -\hspace@{\value@{myctr@}\parindent@} -@end example - - -@node \setcounter -@section @code{\setcounter@{@var{counter}@}@{@var{value}@}} -@findex \setcounter -@cindex counters, setting -@cindex setting counters - -Synopsis: - -@example -\setcounter@{@var{\counter}@}@{@var{value}@} -@end example - -The @code{\setcounter} command sets the value of @var{\counter} to the -@var{value} argument. - - -@node \addtocounter -@section @code{\addtocounter@{@var{counter}@}@{@var{value}@}} -@findex \addtocounter - -The @code{\addtocounter} command increments @var{counter} by the -amount specified by the @var{value} argument, which may be negative. - - -@node \refstepcounter -@section @code{\refstepcounter@{@var{counter}@}} -@findex \refstepcounter - -The @code{\refstepcounter} command works in the same way as -@code{\stepcounter} @xref{\stepcounter}, except it also defines the -current @code{\ref} value to be the result of @code{\thecounter}. - - -@node \stepcounter -@section @code{\stepcounter@{@var{counter}@}} -@findex \stepcounter - -The @code{\stepcounter} command adds one to @var{counter} and -resets all subsidiary counters. - - -@node \day \month \year -@section @code{\day \month \year}: Predefined counters -@findex \day -@findex \month -@findex \year - -@LaTeX{} defines counters for the day of the month (@code{\day}, -1--31), month of the year (@code{\month}, 1--12), and year -(@code{\year}, Common Era). When @TeX{} starts up, they are -set to the current values on the system where @TeX{} is running. They -are not updated as the job progresses. - -The related command @code{\today} produces a string representing the -current day (@pxref{\today}). - - -@node Lengths -@chapter Lengths -@cindex lengths, defining and using - -A @code{length} is a measure of distance. Many @LaTeX{} commands take a -length as an argument. - -@menu -* \setlength:: Set the value of a length. -* \addtolength:: Add a quantity to a length. -* \settodepth:: Set a length to the depth of something. -* \settoheight:: Set a length to the height of something. -* \settowidth:: Set a length to the width of something. -* Predefined lengths:: Lengths that are, like, predefined. -@end menu - - -@node \setlength -@section @code{\setlength@{\@var{len}@}@{@var{value}@}} -@findex \setlength -@cindex lengths, setting - -The @code{\setlength} sets the value of @var{\len} to the @var{value} -argument, which can be expressed in any units that @LaTeX{} -understands, i.e., inches (@code{in}), millimeters (@code{mm}), points -(@code{pt}), big points (@code{bp}, etc. - - -@node \addtolength -@section \addtolength@{@var{\len}@}@{@var{amount}@} -@findex \addtolength -@cindex lengths, adding to - -The @code{\addtolength} command increments a ``length command'' -@var{\len} by the amount specified in the @var{amount} argument, which -may be negative. - - -@node \settodepth -@section @code{\settodepth} -@findex \settodepth - -@code{\settodepth@{\gnat@}@{text@}} - -The @code{\settodepth} command sets the value of a @code{length} command -equal to the depth of the @code{text} argument. - - -@node \settoheight -@section @code{\settoheight} -@findex \settoheight - -@code{\settoheight@{\gnat@}@{text@}} - -The @code{\settoheight} command sets the value of a @code{length} command -equal to the height of the @code{text} argument. - - - -@node \settowidth -@section @code{\settowidth@{\@var{len}@}@{@var{text}@}} -@findex \settowidth - -The @code{\settowidth} command sets the value of the command @var{\len} -to the width of the @var{text} argument. - - - -@node Predefined lengths -@section Predefined lengths -@cindex lengths, predefined -@cindex predefined lengths - -@code{\width} -@findex \width - -@code{\height} -@findex \height - -@code{\depth} -@findex \depth - -@code{\totalheight} -@findex \totalheight - -These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the box-making -commands (@pxref{Boxes}). They specify the natural width etc. of the -text in the box. @code{\totalheight} equals @code{\height} + -@code{\depth}. To make a box with the text stretched to double the -natural size, e.g., say - -@code{\makebox[2\width]@{Get a stretcher@}} - - -@node Line breaking -@chapter Line breaking -@cindex line breaking -@cindex breaking lines - -The first thing @LaTeX{} does when processing ordinary text is to -translate your input file into a sequence of glyphs and spaces. To -produce a printed document, this sequence must be broken into lines -(and these lines must be broken into pages). - -@LaTeX{} usually does the line (and page) breaking for you, but in -some environments, you do the line breaking yourself with the -@code{\\} command, and you can always manually force breaks. - -@menu -* \\:: Start a new line. -* \obeycr & \restorecr:: Make each input line start a new output line. -* \newline:: Break the line -* \- (hyphenation):: Insert explicit hyphenation. -* \fussy:: Be fussy about line breaking. -* \hyphenation:: Tell @LaTeX{} how to hyphenate a word. -* \linebreak & \nolinebreak:: Forcing & avoiding line breaks. -* \sloppy:: Be sloppy about line breaking. -@end menu - - -@node \\ -@section @code{\\}[*][@var{morespace}] -@findex \\ @r{force line break} -@cindex new line, starting -@cindex line break, forcing - -The @code{\\} command tells @LaTeX{} to start a new line. It has an -optional argument, @var{morespace}, that specifies how much extra -vertical space is to be inserted before the next line. This can be a -negative amount. - -The @code{\\*} command is the same as the ordinary @code{\\} command -except that it tells @LaTeX{} not to start a new page after the line. - - -@node \obeycr & \restorecr -@section @code{\obeycr} & @code{\restorecr} -@findex \obeycr -@findex \restorecr -@cindex new line, output as input - -The @code{\obeycr} command makes a return in the input file -(@samp{^^M}, internally) the same as @code{\\} (followed by -@code{\relax}). So each new line in the input will also be a new line -in the output. - -@code{\restorecr} restores normal line-breaking behavior. - - -@node \newline -@section @code{\newline} -@findex \newline -@cindex new line, starting (paragraph mode) - -The @code{\newline} command breaks the line at the present point, with -no stretching of the text before it. It can only be used in paragraph -mode. - - -@node \- (hyphenation) -@section @code{\-} (discretionary hyphen) -@findex \- @r{(hyphenation)} -@cindex hyphenation, forcing - -The @code{\-} command tells @LaTeX{} that it may hyphenate the word at -that point. @LaTeX{} is very good at hyphenating, and it will usually -find most of the correct hyphenation points, and almost never use an -incorrect one. The @code{\-} command is used for the exceptional -cases. - -When you insert @code{\-} commands in a word, the word will only be -hyphenated at those points and not at any of the hyphenation points -that @LaTeX{} might otherwise have chosen. - - - -@node \fussy -@section @code{\fussy} -@findex \fussy - -The declaration @code{\fussy} (which is the default) makes @TeX{} -picky about line breaking. This usually avoids too much space between -words, at the cost of an occasional overfull box. +@end ifnottex -This command cancels the effect of a previous @code{\sloppy} command -(@pxref{\sloppy}. +@end ftable -@node \sloppy -@section @code{\sloppy} +@node \usecounter +@section @code{\usecounter@{@var{counter}@}} +@findex \usecounter +@cindex list items, specifying counter +@cindex numbered items, specifying counter -The declaration @code{\sloppy} makes @TeX{} less fussy about line -breaking. This will avoid overfull boxes, at the cost of loose -interword spacing. +Synopsis: -Lasts until a @code{\fussy} command is issued (@pxref{\fussy}). +@example +\usecounter@{@var{counter}@} +@end example +The @code{\usecounter} command is used in the second argument of the +@code{list} environment to specify @var{counter} to be used to number +the list items. -@node \hyphenation -@section @code{\hyphenation} -@findex \hyphenation -@cindex hyphenation, defining + +@node \value +@section @code{\value@{@var{counter}@}} +@findex \value +@cindex counters, getting value of Synopsis: @example -\hyphenation@{@var{word-one} @var{word-two}@} +\value@{@var{counter}@} @end example -The @code{\hyphenation} command declares allowed hyphenation points -with a @code{-} character in the given words. The words are separated -by spaces. @TeX{} will only hyphenate if the word matches exactly, no -inflections are tried. Multiple @code{\hyphenation} commands -accumulate. Some examples (the default @TeX{} hyphenation patterns -misses the hyphenations in these words): +The @code{\value} command produces the value of @var{counter}. It can +be used anywhere @LaTeX{} expects a number, for example: @example -\hyphenation@{ap-pen-dix col-umns data-base data-bases@} +\setcounter@{myctr@}@{3@} +\addtocounter@{myctr@}@{1@} +\hspace@{\value@{myctr@}\parindent@} @end example -@node \linebreak & \nolinebreak -@section @code{\linebreak} & @code{\nolinebreak} -@findex \linebreak -@findex \nolinebreak -@cindex line breaks, forcing -@cindex line breaks, preventing +@node \setcounter +@section @code{\setcounter@{@var{counter}@}@{@var{value}@}} +@findex \setcounter +@cindex counters, setting +@cindex setting counters -Synopses: +Synopsis: @example -\linebreak[@var{priority}] -\nolinebreak[@var{priority}] +\setcounter@{@var{\counter}@}@{@var{value}@} @end example -By default, the @code{\linebreak} (@code{\nolinebreak}) command forces -(prevents) a line break at the current position. For -@code{\linebreak}, the spaces in the line are stretched out so that it -extends to the right margin as usual. +The @code{\setcounter} command sets the value of @var{\counter} to the +@var{value} argument. -With the optional argument @var{priority}, you can convert the command -from a demand to a request. The @var{priority} must be a number from -0 to@tie{}4. The higher the number, the more insistent the request. +@node \addtocounter +@section @code{\addtocounter@{@var{counter}@}@{@var{value}@}} +@findex \addtocounter -@node Page breaking -@chapter Page breaking -@cindex page breaking -@cindex breaking pages +The @code{\addtocounter} command increments @var{counter} by the +amount specified by the @var{value} argument, which may be negative. -@LaTeX{} starts new pages asynchronously, when enough material has -accumulated to fill up a page. Usually this happens automatically, -but sometimes you may want to influence the breaks. + +@node \refstepcounter +@section @code{\refstepcounter@{@var{counter}@}} +@findex \refstepcounter + +The @code{\refstepcounter} command works in the same way as +@code{\stepcounter} @xref{\stepcounter}, except it also defines the +current @code{\ref} value to be the result of @code{\thecounter}. + + +@node \stepcounter +@section @code{\stepcounter@{@var{counter}@}} +@findex \stepcounter + +The @code{\stepcounter} command adds one to @var{counter} and +resets all subsidiary counters. + + +@node \day \month \year +@section @code{\day \month \year}: Predefined counters +@findex \day +@findex \month +@findex \year + +@LaTeX{} defines counters for the day of the month (@code{\day}, +1--31), month of the year (@code{\month}, 1--12), and year +(@code{\year}, Common Era). When @TeX{} starts up, they are +set to the current values on the system where @TeX{} is running. They +are not updated as the job progresses. + +The related command @code{\today} produces a string representing the +current day (@pxref{\today}). + + +@node Lengths +@chapter Lengths +@cindex lengths, defining and using + +A @code{length} is a measure of distance. Many @LaTeX{} commands take a +length as an argument. @menu -* \cleardoublepage:: Start a new right-hand page. -* \clearpage:: Start a new page. -* \newpage:: Start a new page. -* \enlargethispage:: Enlarge the current page a bit. -* \pagebreak & \nopagebreak:: Forcing & avoiding page breaks. +* \setlength:: Set the value of a length. +* \addtolength:: Add a quantity to a length. +* \settodepth:: Set a length to the depth of something. +* \settoheight:: Set a length to the height of something. +* \settowidth:: Set a length to the width of something. +* Predefined lengths:: Lengths that are, like, predefined. @end menu -@node \cleardoublepage -@section @code{\cleardoublepage} +@node \setlength +@section @code{\setlength@{\@var{len}@}@{@var{value}@}} +@findex \setlength +@cindex lengths, setting -@findex \cleardoublepage -@cindex starting on a right-hand page +The @code{\setlength} sets the value of @var{\len} to the @var{value} +argument, which can be expressed in any units that @LaTeX{} +understands, i.e., inches (@code{in}), millimeters (@code{mm}), points +(@code{pt}), big points (@code{bp}, etc. -The @code{\cleardoublepage} command ends the current page and causes all -figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed. -In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the next page a right-hand -(odd-numbered) page, producing a blank page if necessary. +@node \addtolength +@section \addtolength@{@var{\len}@}@{@var{amount}@} +@findex \addtolength +@cindex lengths, adding to -@node \clearpage -@section @code{\clearpage} -@findex \clearpage -@cindex flushing floats and starting a page -@cindex starting a new page and clearing floats +The @code{\addtolength} command increments a ``length command'' +@var{\len} by the amount specified in the @var{amount} argument, which +may be negative. -The @code{\clearpage} command ends the current page and causes all -figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed. +@node \settodepth +@section @code{\settodepth} +@findex \settodepth -@node \newpage -@section @code{\newpage} -@findex \newpage -@cindex new page, starting -@cindex starting a new page +@code{\settodepth@{\gnat@}@{text@}} -The @code{\newpage} command ends the current page, but does not clear -floats (see @code{\clearpage} above). +The @code{\settodepth} command sets the value of a @code{length} command +equal to the depth of the @code{text} argument. -@node \enlargethispage -@section @code{\enlargethispage} -@findex \enlargethispage -@cindex enlarge current page +@node \settoheight +@section @code{\settoheight} +@findex \settoheight -@code{\enlargethispage@{size@}} +@code{\settoheight@{\gnat@}@{text@}} -@code{\enlargethispage*@{size@}} +The @code{\settoheight} command sets the value of a @code{length} command +equal to the height of the @code{text} argument. -Enlarge the @code{\textheight} for the current page by the specified -amount; e.g. @code{\enlargethispage@{\baselineskip@}} will allow one -additional line. -The starred form tries to squeeze the material together on the page as -much as possible. This is normally used together with an explicit -@code{\pagebreak}. +@node \settowidth +@section @code{\settowidth@{\@var{len}@}@{@var{text}@}} +@findex \settowidth -@node \pagebreak & \nopagebreak -@section @code{\pagebreak} & @code{\nopagebreak} -@findex \pagebreak -@findex \nopagebreak -@cindex page break, forcing -@cindex page break, preventing +The @code{\settowidth} command sets the value of the command @var{\len} +to the width of the @var{text} argument. -Synopses: -@example -\pagebreak[@var{priority}] -\nopagebreak[@var{priority}] -@end example -By default, the @code{\pagebreak} (@code{\nopagebreak}) command forces -(prevents) a page break at the current position. For -@code{\linebreak}, the vertical space on the page is stretched out -where possible so that it extends to the normal bottom margin. +@node Predefined lengths +@section Predefined lengths +@cindex lengths, predefined +@cindex predefined lengths -With the optional argument @var{priority}, you can convert the -@code{\pagebreak} command from a demand to a request. The number must -be a number from 0 to@tie{}4. The higher the number, the more -insistent the request is. +@code{\width} +@findex \width + +@code{\height} +@findex \height + +@code{\depth} +@findex \depth + +@code{\totalheight} +@findex \totalheight + +These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the box-making +commands (@pxref{Boxes}). They specify the natural width etc. of the +text in the box. @code{\totalheight} equals @code{\height} + +@code{\depth}. To make a box with the text stretched to double the +natural size, e.g., say + +@code{\makebox[2\width]@{Get a stretcher@}} @node Making paragraphs @@ -3827,17 +3879,17 @@ $\displaystyle \sum_@{n=0@}^\infty x_n $ @c xx see also \cal, \mathcal @menu -* Subscripts & Superscripts:: Also known as exponent or index. +* Subscripts & superscripts:: Also known as exponent or index. * Math symbols:: Various mathematical squiggles. * Math functions:: Math function names like sin and exp. * Math accents:: Accents in math. * Spacing in math mode:: Thick, medium, thin and negative spaces. -* Math Miscellany:: Stuff that doesn't fit anywhere else. +* Math miscellany:: Stuff that doesn't fit anywhere else. @end menu -@node Subscripts & Superscripts -@section Subscripts & Superscripts +@node Subscripts & superscripts +@section Subscripts & superscripts @cindex superscript @cindex subscript @cindex exponent @@ -4712,9 +4764,9 @@ A negative thin space (@math{-{1\over6}\,}quad). @end table -@node Math Miscellany -@section Math Miscellany -@cindex math Miscellany +@node Math miscellany +@section Math miscellany +@cindex math miscellany @ftable @code @@ -4786,10 +4838,11 @@ $\underbrace{x+y+z}_{>\,0}$. @item \underline@{text@} Causes @var{text}, which may be either math mode or not, to be -underlined. +underlined. The line is always below the text, taking account of +descenders. @tex In @TeX{}, the result looks like this: -$\underline{z}$ +$\underline{xyz}$ @end tex @item \vdots @@ -4852,8 +4905,8 @@ these commands or environments will be called a @code{parbox}. When in, is called ``outer paragraph mode''. -@node Page Styles -@chapter Page Styles +@node Page styles +@chapter Page styles @cindex styles, page @cindex page styles @@ -5008,11 +5061,11 @@ more often useful in math mode (@pxref{Spacing in math mode}). @menu Horizontal space * \hspace:: Fixed horizontal space. +* \hfill:: Stretchable horizontal space. * \SPACE:: Normal interword space. * \AT:: Ending a sentence. * \thinspace:: One-sixth of an em. * \/:: Per-character italic correction. -* \hfill:: Stretchable horizontal space. * \hrulefill:: Stretchable horizontal rule. * \dotfill:: Stretchable horizontal dots. @@ -5522,12 +5575,15 @@ with @code{"}, so the previous example could also be written as @section Text symbols @cindex text symbols +@findex textcomp @r{package} @LaTeX{} provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols -in running text. +in running text. Some of these, especially the more obscure ones, are +not available in OT1; you may need to load the @code{textcomp} package. @ftable @code @item \copyright +@itemx \textcopyright @cindex copyright symbol The copyright symbol, @copyright{}. @@ -5544,10 +5600,27 @@ The double dagger symbol (in text). @cindex logo, @LaTeX{} The @LaTeX{} logo. +@item \guillemotleft @r{(@guillemotleft{})} +@itemx \guillemotright @r{(@guillemotright{})} +@itemx \guilsinglleft @r{(@guilsinglleft{})} +@itemx \guilsinglright @r{(@guilsinglright{})} +@cindex double guillemets +@cindex single guillemets +@cindex left angle quotation marks +@cindex right angle quotation marks +@cindex double angle quotation marks +@cindex single angle quotation marks +@cindex French quotation marks +@cindex quotation marks, French +Double and single angle quotation marks, commonly used in French: +@guillemotleft{}, @guillemotright{}, @guilsinglleft{}, @guilsinglright{}. + @item \ldots +@itemx \dots +@itemx \textellipsis @cindex ellipsis -An ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): `@dots{}'. This -command also works in math mode. +An ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): `@dots{}'. @code{\ldots} +and @code{\dots} also work in math mode. @item \lq @cindex left quote @@ -5555,14 +5628,24 @@ command also works in math mode. Left (opening) quote: `. @item \P -@cindex paragraph sign +@itemx \textparagraph +@cindex paragraph symbol @cindex pilcrow Paragraph sign (pilcrow). @item \pounds +@itemx \textsterling @cindex pounds symbol @cindex sterling symbol -English pounds sterling. +English pounds sterling: @pounds{}. + +@item \quotedblbase @r{(@quotedblbase{})} +@itemx \quotesinglbase @r{(@quotesinglbase{})} +@cindex double low-9 quotation mark +@cindex single low-9 quotation mark +@cindex low-9 quotation marks, single and double +Double and single quotation marks on the baseline: +@quotedblbase{} and @quotesinglbase{}. @item \rq @cindex right quote @@ -5578,6 +5661,191 @@ Section symbol. @cindex logo, @TeX{} The @TeX{} logo. +@item \textasciicircum +@cindex circumflex, ASCII, in text +@cindex ASCII circumflex, in text +ASCII circumflex: ^. + +@item \textasciitilde +@cindex tilde, ASCII, in text +@cindex ASCII tilde, in text +ASCII tilde: ~. + +@item \textasteriskcentered +@cindex asterisk, centered, in text +@cindex centered asterisk, in text +Centered asterisk: *. + +@item \textbackslash +@cindex backslash, in text +Backslash: \. + +@item \textbar +@cindex vertical bar, in text +@cindex bar, vertical, in text +Vertical bar: |. + +@item \textbardbl +@cindex vertical bar, double, in text +@cindex bar, double vertical, in text +@cindex double vertical bar, in text +Double vertical bar. + +@item \textbigcircle +@cindex big circle symbols, in text +@cindex circle symbol, big, in text +Big circle symbol. + +@item \textbraceleft +@cindex left brace, in text +@cindex brace, left, in text +Left brace: @{. + +@item \textbraceright +@cindex right brace, in text +@cindex brace, right, in text +Right brace: @}. + +@item \textbullet +@cindex bullet, in text +Bullet: @bullet{}. + +@item \textcircled@{@var{letter}@} +@cindex circled letter, in text +@var{letter} in a circle, as in @registeredsymbol{}. + +@item \textcompwordmark +@itemx \textcapitalwordmark +@itemx \textascenderwordmark +@cindex composite word mark, in text +@cindex cap height +@cindex ascender height +Composite word mark (invisible). The @code{\textcapital...} form +has the cap height of the font, while the @code{\textascender...} form +has the ascender height. + +@item \textdagger +@cindex dagger, in text +Dagger: @math{\dag}. + +@item \textdaggerdbl +@cindex dagger, double, in text +@cindex double dagger, in text +Double dagger: @math{\ddag}. + +@item \textdollar @r{(or @code{$})} +@cindex dollar sign +@cindex currency, dollar +Dollar sign: $. + +@item \textemdash @r{(or @code{---})} +@cindex em-dash +Em-dash: --- (for punctuation). + +@item \textendash @r{(or @code{--})} +@cindex e-dash +En-dash: --- (for ranges). + +@item \texteuro +@cindex euro symbol +@cindex currency, euro +The Euro symbol: @euro{}. + +@item \textexclamdown @r{(or @code{!`})} +@cindex exclamation point, upside-down +Upside down exclamation point: @exclamdown{}. + +@item \textgreater +@cindex greater than symbol, in text +Greater than: >. + +@item \textless +@cindex less than symbol, in text +Less than: <. + +@item \textleftarrow +@cindex arrow, left, in text +@cindex left arrow, in text +Left arrow. + +@item \textordfeminine +@itemx \textordmasculine +@cindex feminine ordinal symbol +@cindex masculine ordinal symbol +@cindex ordinals, feminine and masculine +@cindex Spanish ordinals, feminine and masculine +Feminine and masculine ordinal symbols: @ordf{}, @ordm{}. + +@item \textordfeminine +@cindex feminine ordinal symbol +Feminine ordinal symbol: @registeredsymbol{}. + +@item \textperiodcentered +@cindex period, centered, in text +@cindex centered period, in text +Centered period: @math{\cdot}. + +@item \textquestiondown @r{(or @code{?`})} +@cindex questionation point, upside-down +Upside down questionation point: @questiondown{}. + +@item \textquotedblleft @r{(or @code{``})} +@cindex left quote, double +@cindex double left quote +Double left quote: ``. + +@item \textquotedblright @r{(or @code{'})} +@cindex right quote, double +@cindex double right quote +Double right quote: ''. + +@item \textquoteleft @r{(or @code{`})} +@cindex left quote, single +@cindex single left quote +Single left quote: `. + +@item \textquoteright @r{(or @code{'})} +@cindex right quote, single +@cindex single right quote +Single right quote: '. + +@item \textquotestraightbase +@itemx \textquotestraightdblbase +@cindex quote, straight base +@cindex straight quote, base +@cindex double quote, straight base +@cindex straight double quote, base +Single and double straight quotes on the baseline. + +@item \textregistered +@cindex registered symbol +Registered symbol: @registeredsymbol{}. + +@item \textrightarrow +@cindex arrow, right, in text +@cindex right arrow, in text +Right arrow. + +@item \textthreequartersemdash +@cindex three-quarters em-dash +@cindex em-dash, three-quarters +``Three-quarters'' em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash. + +@item \texttrademark +@cindex trademark symbol +Trademark symbol: @math{^{\hbox{TM}}}. + +@item \texttwelveudash +Xx 12u-. + +@item \textunderscore +@cindex underscore, in text +Underscore: _. + +@item \textvisiblespace +@cindex visible space symbol, in text +Visible space symbol. + @end ftable @@ -5590,17 +5858,25 @@ The @TeX{} logo. @LaTeX{} has wide support for many of the world's scripts and languages, through the @code{babel} package and related support. This -section does not attempt to cover all that support. It merely the -core @LaTeX{} commands for creating accented characters. +section does not attempt to cover all that support. It merely lists +the core @LaTeX{} commands for creating accented characters. + +The @code{\capital...} commands produce alternative forms for use with +capital letters. These are not available with OT1. @table @code @item \" +@itemx \capitaldieresis @findex \" @r{(umlaut accent)} +@findex \capitaldieresis @cindex umlaut accent -Produces an umlaut, as in @"{o}. +@cindex dieresis accent +Produces an umlaut (dieresis), as in @"{o}. @item \' +@itemx \capitalacute @findex \' @r{(acute accent)} +@findex \capitalacute @cindex acute accent Produces an acute accent, as in @'{o}. In the @code{tabbing} environment, pushes current column to the right of the previous column @@ -5613,27 +5889,35 @@ environment, pushes current column to the right of the previous column Produces a dot accent over the following, as in @dotaccent{o}. @item \= +@itemx \capitalmacron @findex \= @r{(macron accent)} +@findex \capitalmacron @cindex macron accent @cindex overbar accent @cindex bar-over accent Produces a macron (overbar) accent over the following, as in @={o}. @item \^ +@itemx \capitalcircumflex @findex \^ @r{(circumflex accent)} +@findex \capitalcircumflex @cindex circumflex accent @cindex hat accent Produces a circumflex (hat) accent over the following, as in @^{o}. @item \` +@itemx \capitalgrave @findex \` @r{(grave accent)} +@findex \capitalgrave @cindex grave accent Produces a grave accent over the following, as in @`{o}. In the @code{tabbing} environment, move following text to the right margin (@pxref{tabbing}). @item \~ +@itemx \capitaltilde @findex \~ @r{(tilde accent)} +@findex \capitaltilde @cindex tilde accent Produces a tilde accent over the following, as in @~{n}. @@ -5643,17 +5927,23 @@ Produces a tilde accent over the following, as in @~{n}. Produces a bar accent under the following, as in @ubaraccent{o}. @item \c +@itemx \capitalcedilla @findex \c @r{(cedilla accent)} +@findex \capitalcedilla @cindex cedilla accent -Produces a cedilla accent under the following, as in @c{c}. +Produces a cedilla accent under the following, as in @,{c}. @item \d +@itemx \capitaldotaccent @findex \d @r{(dot-under accent)} +@findex \capitaldotaccent @cindex dot-under accent Produces a dot accent under the following, as in @udotaccent{o}. @item \H +@itemx \capitalhungarumlaut @findex \H @r{(Hungarian umlaut accent)} +@findex \capitalhungarumlaut @cindex hungarian umlaut accent Produces a long Hungarian umlaut accent over the following, as in @H{o}. @@ -5667,21 +5957,56 @@ Produces a dotless i, as in `@dotless{i}'. @cindex dotless j Produces a dotless j, as in `@dotless{j}'. +@item \k +@itemx \capitalogonek +@findex \k @r{(ogonek)} +@findex \capitalogonek +@cindex ogonek +Produces a letter with ogonek, as in `@ogonek{o}'. Not available in +the OT1 encoding. + +@item \r +@itemx \capitalring +@findex \r @r{(ring accent)} +@findex \capitalring +@cindex ring accent +Produces a ring accent, as in `@ringaccent{o}'. + @item \t +@itemx \capitaltie +@itemx \newtie +@itemx \capitalnewtie @findex \t @r{(tie-after accent)} +@findex \capitaltie +@findex \newtie +@findex \capitalnewtie @cindex tie-after accent -Produces a tie-after accent, as in `@tieaccent{oo}'. +Produces a tie-after accent, as in `@tieaccent{oo}'. The +@code{\newtie} form is centered in its box. @item \u +@itemx \capitalbreve @findex \u @r{(breve accent)} +@findex \capitalbreve @cindex breve accent Produces a breve accent, as in `@u{o}'. +@item \underbar +@findex \underbar +@cindex underbar +Not exactly an accent, this produces a bar under the argument text. +The argument is always processed in horizontal mode. The bar is +always a fixed position under the baseline, thus crossing through +descenders. See also @code{\underline} in @ref{Math miscellany}. + @item \v +@itemx \capitalcaron @findex \v @r{(breve accent)} +@findex \capitalcaron @cindex hacek accent @cindex check accent -Produces a h@'a@v{c}ek (check) accent, as in `@v{o}'. +@cindex caron accent +Produces a h@'a@v{c}ek (check, caron) accent, as in `@v{o}'. @end table @@ -5713,6 +6038,27 @@ used in languages other than English. @cindex ae ligature @ae{} and @AE{}. +@item \dh +@itemx \DH +@findex \dh (@ae{}) +@findex \DH (@AE{}) +@cindex Icelandic eth +@cindex eth, Icelandic letter +Icelandic letter eth: @dh{} and @DH{}. + +@item \dj +@itemx \DJ +@findex \dj +@findex \DJ +xxxx + +@item \ij +@itemx \IJ +@findex \ij (ij) +@findex \IJ (IJ) +@cindex ij letter, Dutch +ij and IJ (except somewhat closer together than appears here). + @item \l @itemx \L @findex \l (@l{}) @@ -5720,6 +6066,12 @@ used in languages other than English. @cindex polish l @l{} and @L{}. +@item \ng +@itemx \NG +@findex \ng +@findex \NG +xxxx + @item \o @itemx \O @findex \o (@o{}) @@ -5735,10 +6087,20 @@ used in languages other than English. @oe{} and @OE{}. @item \ss +@itemx \SS @findex \ss (@ss{}) +@findex \SS (SS) @cindex es-zet German letter @cindex sharp S letters -@ss{}. +@ss{} and SS. + +@item \th +@itemx \TH +@findex \th (@th{}) +@findex \TH (@TH{}) +@cindex Icelandic thorn +@cindex thorn, Icelandic letter +Icelandic letter thorn: @th{} and @TH{}. @end table @@ -6270,10 +6632,10 @@ This is your telephone number. This only appears if the @code{firstpage} pagestyle is selected. -@node Terminal Input/Output -@chapter Terminal Input/Output -@cindex input/Output -@cindex terminal Input/Output +@node Terminal input/output +@chapter Terminal input/output +@cindex input/output +@cindex terminal input/output @menu * \typein:: Read text from the terminal. @@ -6322,9 +6684,9 @@ printed, independent of surrounding spaces. A @code{^^J} in @code{msg} prints a newline. -@node Command Line -@chapter Command Line -@cindex command Line +@node Command line +@chapter Command line +@cindex command line The input file specification indicates the file to be formatted; @TeX{} uses @file{.tex} as a default file extension. If you omit the @@ -6513,3 +6875,23 @@ Email \verb|tugboat@tug.org| if problems or questions. @printindex fn @bye + +\def\DeclareTextCommand{\foo}{T1} +% then |\foo| is defined to be |\T1-cmd \foo \T1\foo|, +% % where |\T1\foo| is \emph{one} control sequence, not two! +\newcommand + +\def\ProvideTextCommand -- same with \providecommand +\@onlypreamble\DeclareTextCommand +\@onlypreamble\DeclareTextSymbol +\gdef\TextSymbolUnavailable#1{% +\@onlypreamble\def\DeclareTextCommandDefault#1{% +\def\ProvideTextCommandDefault#1{% +\def\DeclareTextAccent#1#2#3{% +\def\DeclareTextCompositeCommand#1#2#3#4{% +\@onlypreamble\def\DeclareTextComposite#1#2#3#4{% +\def\UseTextAccent#1#2#3{% +\def\UseTextSymbol#1#2{% +\@onlypreamble\DeclareTextSymbolDefault@item +\@onlypreamble\DeclareTextAccentDefault@item +\def\UndeclareTextCommand#1#2{% diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt index 95368211ed9..1445a1b7266 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt @@ -10,24 +10,24 @@ LaTeX2e 6 Sectioning 7 Cross references 8 Environments -9 Footnotes -10 Definitions -11 Counters -12 Lengths -13 Line breaking -14 Page breaking +9 Line breaking +10 Page breaking +11 Footnotes +12 Definitions +13 Counters +14 Lengths 15 Making paragraphs 16 Math formulas 17 Modes -18 Page Styles +18 Page styles 19 Spaces 20 Boxes 21 Special insertions 22 Splitting the input 23 Front/back matter 24 Letters -25 Terminal Input/Output -26 Command Line +25 Terminal input/output +26 Command line Appendix A Document templates Concept Index Command Index @@ -111,65 +111,66 @@ LaTeX2e 8.27 `verbatim' 8.27.1 `\verb' 8.28 `verse' -9 Footnotes - 9.1 `\footnote' - 9.2 `\footnotemark' - 9.3 `\footnotetext' - 9.4 Footnote parameters -10 Definitions - 10.1 `\newcommand' & `\renewcommand' - 10.2 `\newcounter' - 10.3 `\newlength' - 10.4 `\newsavebox' - 10.5 `\newenvironment' & `\renewenvironment' - 10.6 `\newtheorem' - 10.7 `\newfont' - 10.8 `\protect' -11 Counters - 11.1 `\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol': Printing counters - 11.2 `\usecounter{COUNTER}' - 11.3 `\value{COUNTER}' - 11.4 `\setcounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}' - 11.5 `\addtocounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}' - 11.6 `\refstepcounter{COUNTER}' - 11.7 `\stepcounter{COUNTER}' - 11.8 `\day \month \year': Predefined counters -12 Lengths - 12.1 `\setlength{\LEN}{VALUE}' - 12.2 \addtolength{\LEN}{AMOUNT} - 12.3 `\settodepth' - 12.4 `\settoheight' - 12.5 `\settowidth{\LEN}{TEXT}' - 12.6 Predefined lengths -13 Line breaking - 13.1 `\\'[*][MORESPACE] - 13.2 `\obeycr' & `\restorecr' - 13.3 `\newline' - 13.4 `\-' (discretionary hyphen) - 13.5 `\fussy' - 13.6 `\sloppy' - 13.7 `\hyphenation' - 13.8 `\linebreak' & `\nolinebreak' -14 Page breaking - 14.1 `\cleardoublepage' - 14.2 `\clearpage' - 14.3 `\newpage' - 14.4 `\enlargethispage' - 14.5 `\pagebreak' & `\nopagebreak' +9 Line breaking + 9.1 `\\'[*][MORESPACE] + 9.2 `\obeycr' & `\restorecr' + 9.3 `\newline' + 9.4 `\-' (discretionary hyphen) + 9.5 `\fussy' + 9.6 `\sloppy' + 9.7 `\hyphenation' + 9.8 `\linebreak' & `\nolinebreak' +10 Page breaking + 10.1 `\cleardoublepage' + 10.2 `\clearpage' + 10.3 `\newpage' + 10.4 `\enlargethispage' + 10.5 `\pagebreak' & `\nopagebreak' +11 Footnotes + 11.1 `\footnote' + 11.2 `\footnotemark' + 11.3 `\footnotetext' + 11.4 Symbolic footnotes + 11.5 Footnote parameters +12 Definitions + 12.1 `\newcommand' & `\renewcommand' + 12.2 `\newcounter' + 12.3 `\newlength' + 12.4 `\newsavebox' + 12.5 `\newenvironment' & `\renewenvironment' + 12.6 `\newtheorem' + 12.7 `\newfont' + 12.8 `\protect' +13 Counters + 13.1 `\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol': Printing counters + 13.2 `\usecounter{COUNTER}' + 13.3 `\value{COUNTER}' + 13.4 `\setcounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}' + 13.5 `\addtocounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}' + 13.6 `\refstepcounter{COUNTER}' + 13.7 `\stepcounter{COUNTER}' + 13.8 `\day \month \year': Predefined counters +14 Lengths + 14.1 `\setlength{\LEN}{VALUE}' + 14.2 \addtolength{\LEN}{AMOUNT} + 14.3 `\settodepth' + 14.4 `\settoheight' + 14.5 `\settowidth{\LEN}{TEXT}' + 14.6 Predefined lengths 15 Making paragraphs 15.1 `\indent' 15.2 `\noindent' 15.3 `\parskip' 15.4 Marginal notes 16 Math formulas - 16.1 Subscripts & Superscripts + 16.1 Subscripts & superscripts 16.2 Math symbols 16.3 Math functions 16.4 Math accents 16.5 Spacing in math mode - 16.6 Math Miscellany + 16.6 Math miscellany 17 Modes -18 Page Styles +18 Page styles 18.1 `\maketitle' 18.2 `\pagenumbering' 18.3 `\pagestyle' @@ -228,10 +229,10 @@ LaTeX2e 24.11 `\startbreaks' 24.12 `\stopbreaks' 24.13 `\telephone' -25 Terminal Input/Output +25 Terminal input/output 25.1 `\typein[CMD]{MSG}' 25.2 `\typeout{MSG}' -26 Command Line +26 Command line Appendix A Document templates A.1 `book' template A.2 `beamer' template @@ -244,9 +245,8 @@ LaTeX2e ******* This document is an unofficial reference manual for LaTeX, a document -preparation system, version as of September 2009. It is intended to -cover LaTeX2e, which has been the standard version of LaTeX for many -years. +preparation system, version as of July 2010. It is intended to cover +LaTeX2e, which has been the standard version of LaTeX for many years. LaTeX is implemented as a macro package for Donald E. Knuth's TeX typesetting program. LaTeX was originally created by Leslie Lamport; @@ -619,15 +619,21 @@ ones. the `setspace' package; see `http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=linespace'. -`\selectfont' - The changes made by calling the four font commands described above - do not come into effect until `\selectfont' is called. +`\linespread{FACTOR}' + Equivalent to `\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{FACTOR}', and + therefore must be followed by `\selectfont' to have any effect. + Best specified in the preamble, or use the `setspace' package, as + described just above. + + The changes made by calling the font commands described above do + not come into effect until `\selectfont' is called. `\usefont{enc}{family}{series}{shape}' The same as invoking `\fontencoding', `\fontfamily', `\fontseries' and `\fontshape' with the given parameters, followed by `\selectfont'. + 5 Layout ******** @@ -801,6 +807,14 @@ is something like \appendix \chapter{The First Appendix} + The `secnumdepth' counter controls printing of section numbers. The +setting + + \setcounter{secnumdepth}{LEVEL} + +suppresses heading numbers at any depth > LEVEL, where `chapter' is +level zero. (*Note \setcounter::.) + 7 Cross references ****************** @@ -997,6 +1011,7 @@ resets all other style variations: `\item[{\tt plain typewriter}]'. ================= Synopsis: + \begin{displaymath} MATH \end{displaymath} @@ -1878,7 +1893,7 @@ except for the last, where it is optional--unless an `\hline' command This inserts TEXT in every row. An @-expression suppresses the intercolumn space normally inserted between columns; any desired space between the inserted text and the adjacent - items must be included in text. An `\extracolsep{wd}' + items must be included in TEXT. An `\extracolsep{wd}' command in an @-expression causes an extra space of width `wd' to appear to the left of all subsequent columns, until countermanded by another `\extracolsep' command. Unlike @@ -2165,15 +2180,176 @@ not indented, and the text is not justified. Separate the lines of each stanza with `\\', and use one or more blank lines to separate the stanzas. -9 Footnotes -*********** +9 Line breaking +*************** + +The first thing LaTeX does when processing ordinary text is to +translate your input file into a sequence of glyphs and spaces. To +produce a printed document, this sequence must be broken into lines +(and these lines must be broken into pages). + + LaTeX usually does the line (and page) breaking for you, but in some +environments, you do the line breaking yourself with the `\\' command, +and you can always manually force breaks. + +9.1 `\\'[*][MORESPACE] +====================== + +The `\\' command tells LaTeX to start a new line. It has an optional +argument, MORESPACE, that specifies how much extra vertical space is to +be inserted before the next line. This can be a negative amount. + + The `\\*' command is the same as the ordinary `\\' command except +that it tells LaTeX not to start a new page after the line. + +9.2 `\obeycr' & `\restorecr' +============================ + +The `\obeycr' command makes a return in the input file (`^^M', +internally) the same as `\\' (followed by `\relax'). So each new line +in the input will also be a new line in the output. + + `\restorecr' restores normal line-breaking behavior. + +9.3 `\newline' +============== + +The `\newline' command breaks the line at the present point, with no +stretching of the text before it. It can only be used in paragraph +mode. + +9.4 `\-' (discretionary hyphen) +=============================== + +The `\-' command tells LaTeX that it may hyphenate the word at that +point. LaTeX is very good at hyphenating, and it will usually find +most of the correct hyphenation points, and almost never use an +incorrect one. The `\-' command is used for the exceptional cases. + + When you insert `\-' commands in a word, the word will only be +hyphenated at those points and not at any of the hyphenation points +that LaTeX might otherwise have chosen. + +9.5 `\fussy' +============ + +The declaration `\fussy' (which is the default) makes TeX picky about +line breaking. This usually avoids too much space between words, at +the cost of an occasional overfull box. + + This command cancels the effect of a previous `\sloppy' command +(*note \sloppy::. + +9.6 `\sloppy' +============= + +The declaration `\sloppy' makes TeX less fussy about line breaking. +This will avoid overfull boxes, at the cost of loose interword spacing. + + Lasts until a `\fussy' command is issued (*note \fussy::). + +9.7 `\hyphenation' +================== + +Synopsis: + + \hyphenation{WORD-ONE WORD-TWO} + + The `\hyphenation' command declares allowed hyphenation points with +a `-' character in the given words. The words are separated by spaces. +TeX will only hyphenate if the word matches exactly, no inflections are +tried. Multiple `\hyphenation' commands accumulate. Some examples +(the default TeX hyphenation patterns misses the hyphenations in these +words): + + \hyphenation{ap-pen-dix col-umns data-base data-bases} + +9.8 `\linebreak' & `\nolinebreak' +================================= + +Synopses: + + \linebreak[PRIORITY] + \nolinebreak[PRIORITY] + + By default, the `\linebreak' (`\nolinebreak') command forces +(prevents) a line break at the current position. For `\linebreak', the +spaces in the line are stretched out so that it extends to the right +margin as usual. + + With the optional argument PRIORITY, you can convert the command +from a demand to a request. The PRIORITY must be a number from 0 to 4. +The higher the number, the more insistent the request. + +10 Page breaking +**************** + +LaTeX starts new pages asynchronously, when enough material has +accumulated to fill up a page. Usually this happens automatically, but +sometimes you may want to influence the breaks. + +10.1 `\cleardoublepage' +======================= + +The `\cleardoublepage' command ends the current page and causes all +figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed. +In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the next page a right-hand +(odd-numbered) page, producing a blank page if necessary. + +10.2 `\clearpage' +================= + +The `\clearpage' command ends the current page and causes all figures +and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed. + +10.3 `\newpage' +=============== + +The `\newpage' command ends the current page, but does not clear floats +(see `\clearpage' above). + +10.4 `\enlargethispage' +======================= + +`\enlargethispage{size}' + + `\enlargethispage*{size}' + + Enlarge the `\textheight' for the current page by the specified +amount; e.g. `\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}' will allow one +additional line. + + The starred form tries to squeeze the material together on the page +as much as possible. This is normally used together with an explicit +`\pagebreak'. + +10.5 `\pagebreak' & `\nopagebreak' +================================== + +Synopses: + + \pagebreak[PRIORITY] + \nopagebreak[PRIORITY] + + By default, the `\pagebreak' (`\nopagebreak') command forces +(prevents) a page break at the current position. For `\linebreak', the +vertical space on the page is stretched out where possible so that it +extends to the normal bottom margin. + + With the optional argument PRIORITY, you can convert the +`\pagebreak' command from a demand to a request. The number must be a +number from 0 to 4. The higher the number, the more insistent the +request is. + +11 Footnotes +************ Footnotes can be produced in one of two ways. They can be produced with one command, the `\footnote' command. They can also be produced with two commands, the `\footnotemark' and the `\footnotetext' commands. -9.1 `\footnote' -=============== +11.1 `\footnote' +================ Synopsis: @@ -2187,8 +2363,8 @@ default footnote number. cannot use it in sectioning commands like `\chapter', in figures, tables or in a `tabular' environment. (See following sections.) -9.2 `\footnotemark' -=================== +11.2 `\footnotemark' +==================== With no optional argument, the `\footnotemark' command puts the current footnote number in the text. This command can be used in inner @@ -2200,10 +2376,10 @@ markers referring to the same footnote with \footnotemark[\value{footnote}] - after the first `\footnote' command. +after the first `\footnote' command. -9.3 `\footnotetext' -=================== +11.3 `\footnotetext' +==================== Synopsis: @@ -2216,9 +2392,22 @@ mode. The optional argument NUMBER changes the default footnote number. -9.4 Footnote parameters +11.4 Symbolic footnotes ======================= +If you want to use symbols for footnotes, rather than increasing +numbers, redefine `\thefootnote' like this: + + \renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}} + + The `\fnsymbol' command produces a predefined series of symbols +(*note \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol::). If you want to +use a different symbol as your footnote mark, you'll need to also +redefine `\@fnsymbol'. + +11.5 Footnote parameters +======================== + `\footnoterule' Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the page's footnotes. Default dimensions: `0.4pt' thick (or wide), and @@ -2233,12 +2422,12 @@ mode. `11pt', and `8.4pt' for `12pt'. -10 Definitions +12 Definitions ************** LaTeX has support for making new commands of many different kinds. -10.1 `\newcommand' & `\renewcommand' +12.1 `\newcommand' & `\renewcommand' ==================================== `\newcommand' and `\renewcommand' define and redefine a command, @@ -2271,7 +2460,7 @@ DEFN Nth argument. -10.2 `\newcounter' +12.2 `\newcounter' ================== Synopsis: @@ -2286,7 +2475,7 @@ whenever COUNTERNAME is incremented. *Note Counters::, for more information about counters. -10.3 `\newlength' +12.3 `\newlength' ================= Synopsis: @@ -2301,7 +2490,7 @@ already defined. *Note Lengths::, for how to set the new length to a nonzero value, and for more information about lengths in general. -10.4 `\newsavebox' +12.4 `\newsavebox' ================== Synopsis: @@ -2311,7 +2500,7 @@ Synopsis: Defines `\CMD', which must be a command name not already defined, to refer to a new bin for storing boxes. -10.5 `\newenvironment' & `\renewenvironment' +12.5 `\newenvironment' & `\renewenvironment' ============================================ Synopses: @@ -2347,7 +2536,7 @@ ENDDEF contain any argument parameters. -10.6 `\newtheorem' +12.6 `\newtheorem' ================== \newtheorem{NEWENV}{LABEL}[WITHIN] @@ -2376,7 +2565,7 @@ WITHIN At most one of NUMBERED_LIKE and WITHIN can be specified, not both. -10.7 `\newfont' +12.7 `\newfont' =============== Synopsis: @@ -2390,7 +2579,7 @@ the system is named `FONTNAME.tfm'. This is a low-level command for setting up to use an individual font. More commonly, fonts are defined in families through `.fd' files. -10.8 `\protect' +12.8 `\protect' =============== Footnotes, line breaks, any command that has an optional argument, and @@ -2412,7 +2601,7 @@ be preceded by `\protect'. `http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=protect' -11 Counters +13 Counters *********** Everything LaTeX numbers for you has a counter associated with it. The @@ -2428,7 +2617,7 @@ classes to control numbering. subsection equation mpfootnote enumiv subsubsection -11.1 `\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol': Printing counters +13.1 `\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol': Printing counters ===================================================================== All of these commands take a single counter as an argument, for @@ -2460,7 +2649,7 @@ instance, `\alph{enumi}'. double-asterix(**) double-dagger double-ddagger -11.2 `\usecounter{COUNTER}' +13.2 `\usecounter{COUNTER}' =========================== Synopsis: @@ -2471,7 +2660,7 @@ Synopsis: `list' environment to specify COUNTER to be used to number the list items. -11.3 `\value{COUNTER}' +13.3 `\value{COUNTER}' ====================== Synopsis: @@ -2485,7 +2674,7 @@ anywhere LaTeX expects a number, for example: \addtocounter{myctr}{1} \hspace{\value{myctr}\parindent} -11.4 `\setcounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}' +13.4 `\setcounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}' ================================== Synopsis: @@ -2495,26 +2684,26 @@ Synopsis: The `\setcounter' command sets the value of \COUNTER to the VALUE argument. -11.5 `\addtocounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}' +13.5 `\addtocounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}' ==================================== The `\addtocounter' command increments COUNTER by the amount specified by the VALUE argument, which may be negative. -11.6 `\refstepcounter{COUNTER}' +13.6 `\refstepcounter{COUNTER}' =============================== The `\refstepcounter' command works in the same way as `\stepcounter' *Note \stepcounter::, except it also defines the current `\ref' value to be the result of `\thecounter'. -11.7 `\stepcounter{COUNTER}' +13.7 `\stepcounter{COUNTER}' ============================ The `\stepcounter' command adds one to COUNTER and resets all subsidiary counters. -11.8 `\day \month \year': Predefined counters +13.8 `\day \month \year': Predefined counters ============================================= LaTeX defines counters for the day of the month (`\day', 1-31), month @@ -2525,26 +2714,26 @@ is running. They are not updated as the job progresses. The related command `\today' produces a string representing the current day (*note \today::). -12 Lengths +14 Lengths ********** A `length' is a measure of distance. Many LaTeX commands take a length as an argument. -12.1 `\setlength{\LEN}{VALUE}' +14.1 `\setlength{\LEN}{VALUE}' ============================== The `\setlength' sets the value of \LEN to the VALUE argument, which can be expressed in any units that LaTeX understands, i.e., inches (`in'), millimeters (`mm'), points (`pt'), big points (`bp', etc. -12.2 \addtolength{\LEN}{AMOUNT} +14.2 \addtolength{\LEN}{AMOUNT} =============================== The `\addtolength' command increments a "length command" \LEN by the amount specified in the AMOUNT argument, which may be negative. -12.3 `\settodepth' +14.3 `\settodepth' ================== `\settodepth{\gnat}{text}' @@ -2552,7 +2741,7 @@ amount specified in the AMOUNT argument, which may be negative. The `\settodepth' command sets the value of a `length' command equal to the depth of the `text' argument. -12.4 `\settoheight' +14.4 `\settoheight' =================== `\settoheight{\gnat}{text}' @@ -2560,13 +2749,13 @@ to the depth of the `text' argument. The `\settoheight' command sets the value of a `length' command equal to the height of the `text' argument. -12.5 `\settowidth{\LEN}{TEXT}' +14.5 `\settowidth{\LEN}{TEXT}' ============================== The `\settowidth' command sets the value of the command \LEN to the width of the TEXT argument. -12.6 Predefined lengths +14.6 Predefined lengths ======================= `\width' @@ -2585,167 +2774,6 @@ size, e.g., say `\makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}' -13 Line breaking -**************** - -The first thing LaTeX does when processing ordinary text is to -translate your input file into a sequence of glyphs and spaces. To -produce a printed document, this sequence must be broken into lines -(and these lines must be broken into pages). - - LaTeX usually does the line (and page) breaking for you, but in some -environments, you do the line breaking yourself with the `\\' command, -and you can always manually force breaks. - -13.1 `\\'[*][MORESPACE] -======================= - -The `\\' command tells LaTeX to start a new line. It has an optional -argument, MORESPACE, that specifies how much extra vertical space is to -be inserted before the next line. This can be a negative amount. - - The `\\*' command is the same as the ordinary `\\' command except -that it tells LaTeX not to start a new page after the line. - -13.2 `\obeycr' & `\restorecr' -============================= - -The `\obeycr' command makes a return in the input file (`^^M', -internally) the same as `\\' (followed by `\relax'). So each new line -in the input will also be a new line in the output. - - `\restorecr' restores normal line-breaking behavior. - -13.3 `\newline' -=============== - -The `\newline' command breaks the line at the present point, with no -stretching of the text before it. It can only be used in paragraph -mode. - -13.4 `\-' (discretionary hyphen) -================================ - -The `\-' command tells LaTeX that it may hyphenate the word at that -point. LaTeX is very good at hyphenating, and it will usually find -most of the correct hyphenation points, and almost never use an -incorrect one. The `\-' command is used for the exceptional cases. - - When you insert `\-' commands in a word, the word will only be -hyphenated at those points and not at any of the hyphenation points -that LaTeX might otherwise have chosen. - -13.5 `\fussy' -============= - -The declaration `\fussy' (which is the default) makes TeX picky about -line breaking. This usually avoids too much space between words, at -the cost of an occasional overfull box. - - This command cancels the effect of a previous `\sloppy' command -(*note \sloppy::. - -13.6 `\sloppy' -============== - -The declaration `\sloppy' makes TeX less fussy about line breaking. -This will avoid overfull boxes, at the cost of loose interword spacing. - - Lasts until a `\fussy' command is issued (*note \fussy::). - -13.7 `\hyphenation' -=================== - -Synopsis: - - \hyphenation{WORD-ONE WORD-TWO} - - The `\hyphenation' command declares allowed hyphenation points with -a `-' character in the given words. The words are separated by spaces. -TeX will only hyphenate if the word matches exactly, no inflections are -tried. Multiple `\hyphenation' commands accumulate. Some examples -(the default TeX hyphenation patterns misses the hyphenations in these -words): - - \hyphenation{ap-pen-dix col-umns data-base data-bases} - -13.8 `\linebreak' & `\nolinebreak' -================================== - -Synopses: - - \linebreak[PRIORITY] - \nolinebreak[PRIORITY] - - By default, the `\linebreak' (`\nolinebreak') command forces -(prevents) a line break at the current position. For `\linebreak', the -spaces in the line are stretched out so that it extends to the right -margin as usual. - - With the optional argument PRIORITY, you can convert the command -from a demand to a request. The PRIORITY must be a number from 0 to 4. -The higher the number, the more insistent the request. - -14 Page breaking -**************** - -LaTeX starts new pages asynchronously, when enough material has -accumulated to fill up a page. Usually this happens automatically, but -sometimes you may want to influence the breaks. - -14.1 `\cleardoublepage' -======================= - -The `\cleardoublepage' command ends the current page and causes all -figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed. -In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the next page a right-hand -(odd-numbered) page, producing a blank page if necessary. - -14.2 `\clearpage' -================= - -The `\clearpage' command ends the current page and causes all figures -and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed. - -14.3 `\newpage' -=============== - -The `\newpage' command ends the current page, but does not clear floats -(see `\clearpage' above). - -14.4 `\enlargethispage' -======================= - -`\enlargethispage{size}' - - `\enlargethispage*{size}' - - Enlarge the `\textheight' for the current page by the specified -amount; e.g. `\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}' will allow one -additional line. - - The starred form tries to squeeze the material together on the page -as much as possible. This is normally used together with an explicit -`\pagebreak'. - -14.5 `\pagebreak' & `\nopagebreak' -================================== - -Synopses: - - \pagebreak[PRIORITY] - \nopagebreak[PRIORITY] - - By default, the `\pagebreak' (`\nopagebreak') command forces -(prevents) a page break at the current position. For `\linebreak', the -vertical space on the page is stretched out where possible so that it -extends to the normal bottom margin. - - With the optional argument PRIORITY, you can convert the -`\pagebreak' command from a demand to a request. The number must be a -number from 0 to 4. The higher the number, the more insistent the -request is. - 15 Making paragraphs ******************** @@ -2863,7 +2891,7 @@ formula to be that of `displaymath', e.g., with limits above and below summations. For example $\displaystyle \sum_{n=0}^\infty x_n $ -16.1 Subscripts & Superscripts +16.1 Subscripts & superscripts ============================== To get an expression exp to appear as a subscript, you just type @@ -3689,7 +3717,7 @@ use in math mode: `\!' A negative thin space (-1\over6\,quad). -16.6 Math Miscellany +16.6 Math miscellany ==================== `\*' @@ -3733,7 +3761,8 @@ use in math mode: `\underline{text}' Causes TEXT, which may be either math mode or not, to be - underlined. + underlined. The line is always below the text, taking account of + descenders. `\vdots' Produces a vertical ellipsis. @@ -3777,7 +3806,7 @@ is in paragraph mode while making a box, it is said to be in "inner paragraph mode". Its normal paragraph mode, which it starts out in, is called "outer paragraph mode". -18 Page Styles +18 Page styles ************** The `\documentclass' command determines the size and position of the @@ -4236,9 +4265,11 @@ with `"', so the previous example could also be written as ================= LaTeX provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols in -running text. +running text. Some of these, especially the more obscure ones, are not +available in OT1; you may need to load the `textcomp' package. `\copyright' +`\textcopyright' The copyright symbol, (C). `\dag' @@ -4250,18 +4281,33 @@ running text. `\LaTeX' The LaTeX logo. +`\guillemotleft (<<)' +`\guillemotright (>>)' +`\guilsinglleft (<)' +`\guilsinglright (>)' + Double and single angle quotation marks, commonly used in French: + <<, >>, <, >. + `\ldots' - An ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): `...'. This command - also works in math mode. +`\dots' +`\textellipsis' + An ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): `...'. `\ldots' and + `\dots' also work in math mode. `\lq' Left (opening) quote: `. `\P' +`\textparagraph' Paragraph sign (pilcrow). `\pounds' - English pounds sterling. +`\textsterling' + English pounds sterling: #. + +`\quotedblbase (")' +`\quotesinglbase (,)' + Double and single quotation marks on the baseline: " and ,. `\rq' Right (closing) quote: '. @@ -4272,19 +4318,144 @@ running text. `\TeX' The TeX logo. +`\textasciicircum' + ASCII circumflex: ^. + +`\textasciitilde' + ASCII tilde: ~. + +`\textasteriskcentered' + Centered asterisk: *. + +`\textbackslash' + Backslash: \. + +`\textbar' + Vertical bar: |. + +`\textbardbl' + Double vertical bar. + +`\textbigcircle' + Big circle symbol. + +`\textbraceleft' + Left brace: {. + +`\textbraceright' + Right brace: }. + +`\textbullet' + Bullet: *. + +`\textcircled{LETTER}' + LETTER in a circle, as in (R). + +`\textcompwordmark' +`\textcapitalwordmark' +`\textascenderwordmark' + Composite word mark (invisible). The `\textcapital...' form has + the cap height of the font, while the `\textascender...' form has + the ascender height. + +`\textdagger' + Dagger: \dag. + +`\textdaggerdbl' + Double dagger: \ddag. + +`\textdollar (or `$')' + Dollar sign: $. + +`\textemdash (or `---')' + Em-dash: -- (for punctuation). + +`\textendash (or `--')' + En-dash: -- (for ranges). + +`\texteuro' + The Euro symbol: Euro . + +`\textexclamdown (or `!`')' + Upside down exclamation point: !. + +`\textgreater' + Greater than: >. + +`\textless' + Less than: <. + +`\textleftarrow' + Left arrow. + +`\textordfeminine' +`\textordmasculine' + Feminine and masculine ordinal symbols: a, o. + +`\textordfeminine' + Feminine ordinal symbol: (R). + +`\textperiodcentered' + Centered period: \cdot. + +`\textquestiondown (or `?`')' + Upside down questionation point: ?. + +`\textquotedblleft (or ```')' + Double left quote: ". + +`\textquotedblright (or `'')' + Double right quote: ". + +`\textquoteleft (or ``')' + Single left quote: `. + +`\textquoteright (or `'')' + Single right quote: '. + +`\textquotestraightbase' +`\textquotestraightdblbase' + Single and double straight quotes on the baseline. + +`\textregistered' + Registered symbol: (R). + +`\textrightarrow' + Right arrow. + +`\textthreequartersemdash' + "Three-quarters" em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash. + +`\texttrademark' + Trademark symbol: ^\hboxTM. + +`\texttwelveudash' + Xx 12u-. + +`\textunderscore' + Underscore: _. + +`\textvisiblespace' + Visible space symbol. + 21.3 Accents ============ LaTeX has wide support for many of the world's scripts and languages, through the `babel' package and related support. This section does not -attempt to cover all that support. It merely the core LaTeX commands -for creating accented characters. +attempt to cover all that support. It merely lists the core LaTeX +commands for creating accented characters. + + The `\capital...' commands produce alternative forms for use with +capital letters. These are not available with OT1. `\"' - Produces an umlaut, as in o". +`\capitaldieresis' + Produces an umlaut (dieresis), as in o". `\'' +`\capitalacute' Produces an acute accent, as in o'. In the `tabbing' environment, pushes current column to the right of the previous column (*note tabbing::). @@ -4293,29 +4464,36 @@ for creating accented characters. Produces a dot accent over the following, as in o.. `\=' +`\capitalmacron' Produces a macron (overbar) accent over the following, as in o=. `\^' +`\capitalcircumflex' Produces a circumflex (hat) accent over the following, as in o^. `\`' +`\capitalgrave' Produces a grave accent over the following, as in o`. In the `tabbing' environment, move following text to the right margin (*note tabbing::). `\~' +`\capitaltilde' Produces a tilde accent over the following, as in n~. `\b' Produces a bar accent under the following, as in o_. `\c' - Produces a cedilla accent under the following, as in +`\capitalcedilla' + Produces a cedilla accent under the following, as in c,. `\d' +`\capitaldotaccent' Produces a dot accent under the following, as in .o. `\H' +`\capitalhungarumlaut' Produces a long Hungarian umlaut accent over the following, as in o''. @@ -4325,14 +4503,35 @@ for creating accented characters. `\j' Produces a dotless j, as in `j'. +`\k' +`\capitalogonek' + Produces a letter with ogonek, as in `o'. Not available in the + OT1 encoding. + +`\r' +`\capitalring' + Produces a ring accent, as in `o*'. + `\t' - Produces a tie-after accent, as in `oo['. +`\capitaltie' +`\newtie' +`\capitalnewtie' + Produces a tie-after accent, as in `oo['. The `\newtie' form is + centered in its box. `\u' +`\capitalbreve' Produces a breve accent, as in `o('. +`\underbar' + Not exactly an accent, this produces a bar under the argument text. + The argument is always processed in horizontal mode. The bar is + always a fixed position under the baseline, thus crossing through + descenders. See also `\underline' in *note Math miscellany::. + `\v' - Produces a ha'c- +
$
: Math formulas$
: Math formulas10pt
option: Document class options11pt
option: Document class options- -
12pt
option: Document class options- -
@{...}
: array- -
\"
(umlaut accent): Accents- -
\#
: Reserved characters- -
\$
: Reserved characters- -
\%
: Reserved characters- -
\&
: Reserved characters- -
\'
(acute accent): Accents- -
\'
(tabbing): tabbing- -
\(
: Math formulas- -
\)
: Math formulas- -
\*
: Math Miscellany- -
\+
: tabbing- -
\,
: Spacing in math mode- -
\-
: tabbing- -
\-
(hyphenation): \- (hyphenation)- -
\.
(dot-over accent): Accents- -
\/
: \/- -
\:
: Spacing in math mode- -
\;
: Spacing in math mode- -
\<
: tabbing- -
\=
(macron accent): Accents- -
\=
(tabbing): tabbing- -
\>
: Spacing in math mode- -
\>
: tabbing- -
\>
(tabbing): tabbing- -
\@
: \AT- -
\[
: Math formulas- -
\\
(for\shortstack
objects): \shortstack- -
\\ (for array)
: array- -
\\ (for center)
: center- -
\\ (for eqnarray)
: eqnarray- -
\\ (for flushright)
: flushright- -
\\
for\author
: \maketitle- -
\\
for\title
: \maketitle- -
\\
forflushleft
: flushleft- -
\\
for letters: Letters- -
\\
fortabular
: tabular- -
\\
forverse
: verse- -
\\
force line break: \\- -
\\
tabbing: tabbing- -
\\* (for eqnarray)
: eqnarray- -
\]
: Math formulas- -
\^
: Reserved characters- -
\^
(circumflex accent): Accents- -
\_
: Reserved characters- -
\`
(grave accent): Accents- -
\`
(tabbing): tabbing- -
\a
(tabbing): tabbing- -
\a'
(acute accent in tabbing): tabbing- -
\a=
(macron accent in tabbing): tabbing- -
\a`
(grave accent in tabbing): tabbing- -
\AA (Å)
: Non-English characters- -
\aa (å)
: Non-English characters- -
\acute
: Math accents- -
\addcontentsline{
ext}{
unit}{
text}
: \addcontentsline- -
\address
: \address- -
\addtocontents{
ext}{
text}
: \addtocontents- -
\addtocounter
: \addtocounter- -
\addtolength
: \addtolength- -
\addvspace
: \addvspace- -
\AE (Æ)
: Non-English characters- -
\ae (æ)
: Non-English characters- -
\aleph
: Math symbols- -
\Alph
: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol- -
\alph
: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol- -
\Alph
example: enumerate- -
\alpha
: Math symbols- -
\alsoname
: Indexes- -
\amalg
: Math symbols- -
\and
for\author
: \maketitle- -
\angle
: Math symbols- -
\appendix
: Sectioning- -
\approx
: Math symbols- -
\arabic
: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol- -
\arccos
: Math functions- -
\arcsin
: Math functions- -
\arctan
: Math functions- -
\arg
: Math functions- -
\arraycolsep
: array- -
\arrayrulewidth
: tabular- -
\arraystretch
: tabular- -
\ast
: Math symbols- -
\asymp
: Math symbols- -
\author{
name\and
name2}
: \maketitle- -
\b
(bar-under accent): Accents- -
\backslash
: Reserved characters- -
\backslash
: Math symbols- +
\bar
: Math accents- +
@{...}
: array- +
\"
(umlaut accent): Accents- +
\#
: Reserved characters- +
\$
: Reserved characters- +
\%
: Reserved characters- +
\&
: Reserved characters- +
\'
(acute accent): Accents- +
\'
(tabbing): tabbing- +
\(
: Math formulas- +
\)
: Math formulas- +
\*
: Math miscellany- +
\+
: tabbing- +
\,
: Spacing in math mode- +
\-
: tabbing- +
\-
(hyphenation): \- (hyphenation)- +
\.
(dot-over accent): Accents- +
\/
: \/- +
\:
: Spacing in math mode- +
\;
: Spacing in math mode- +
\<
: tabbing- +
\=
(macron accent): Accents- +
\=
(tabbing): tabbing- +
\>
: Spacing in math mode- +
\>
: tabbing- +
\>
(tabbing): tabbing- +
\@
: \AT- +
\@fnsymbol
: Symbolic footnotes- +
\[
: Math formulas- +
\\
(for\shortstack
objects): \shortstack- +
\\ (for array)
: array- +
\\ (for center)
: center- +
\\ (for eqnarray)
: eqnarray- +
\\ (for flushright)
: flushright- +
\\
for\author
: \maketitle- +
\\
for\title
: \maketitle- +
\\
forflushleft
: flushleft- +
\\
for letters: Letters- +
\\
fortabular
: tabular- +
\\
forverse
: verse- +
\\
force line break: \\- +
\\
tabbing: tabbing- +
\\* (for eqnarray)
: eqnarray- +
\]
: Math formulas- +
\^
: Reserved characters- +
\^
(circumflex accent): Accents- +
\_
: Reserved characters- +
\`
(grave accent): Accents- +
\`
(tabbing): tabbing- +
\a
(tabbing): tabbing- +
\a'
(acute accent in tabbing): tabbing- +
\a=
(macron accent in tabbing): tabbing- +
\a`
(grave accent in tabbing): tabbing- +
\AA (Å)
: Non-English characters- +
\aa (å)
: Non-English characters- +
\acute
: Math accents- +
\addcontentsline{
ext}{
unit}{
text}
: \addcontentsline- +
\address
: \address- +
\addtocontents{
ext}{
text}
: \addtocontents- +
\addtocounter
: \addtocounter- +
\addtolength
: \addtolength- +
\addvspace
: \addvspace- +
\AE (Æ)
: Non-English characters- +
\ae (æ)
: Non-English characters- +
\aleph
: Math symbols- +
\Alph
: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol- +
\alph
: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol- +
\Alph
example: enumerate- +
\alpha
: Math symbols- +
\alsoname
: Indexes- +
\amalg
: Math symbols- +
\and
for\author
: \maketitle- +
\angle
: Math symbols- +
\appendix
: Sectioning- +
\approx
: Math symbols- +
\arabic
: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol- +
\arccos
: Math functions- +
\arcsin
: Math functions- +
\arctan
: Math functions- +
\arg
: Math functions- +
\arraycolsep
: array- +
\arrayrulewidth
: tabular- +
\arraystretch
: tabular- +
\ast
: Math symbols- +
\asymp
: Math symbols- +
\author{
name\and
name2}
: \maketitle- +
\b
(bar-under accent): Accents- +
\backslash
: Reserved characters- +
\backslash
: Math symbols\bar
: Math accents\baselineskip
: Low-level font commands- -
\baselinestretch
: Low-level font commands- -
\begin
: Environments- +
\beta
: Math symbols- +
\begin
: Environments\beta
: Math symbols\bf
: Font styles- -
\bfseries
: Font styles- -
\bibitem
: \bibitem- -
\bibliography
: Using BibTeX- -
\bibliographystyle
: Using BibTeX- -
\bigcap
: Math symbols- -
\bigcirc
: Math symbols- -
\bigcup
: Math symbols- -
\bigodot
: Math symbols- -
\bigoplus
: Math symbols- -
\bigotimes
: Math symbols- -
\bigskip
: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip- -
\bigskipamount
: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip- -
\bigsqcup
: Math symbols- -
\bigtriangledown
: Math symbols- -
\bigtriangleup
: Math symbols- -
\biguplus
: Math symbols- -
\bigwedge
: Math symbols- -
\bmod
: Math functions- -
\boldmath
: Math formulas- -
\bot
: Math symbols- -
\bottomfraction
: figure- -
\bowtie
: Math symbols- -
\Box
: Math symbols- -
\breve
: Math accents- -
\bullet
: Math symbols- +
\c
(cedilla accent): Accents- +
\bibitem
: \bibitem- +
\bibliography
: Using BibTeX- +
\bibliographystyle
: Using BibTeX- +
\bigcap
: Math symbols- +
\bigcirc
: Math symbols- +
\bigcup
: Math symbols- +
\bigodot
: Math symbols- +
\bigoplus
: Math symbols- +
\bigotimes
: Math symbols- +
\bigskip
: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip- +
\bigskipamount
: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip- +
\bigsqcup
: Math symbols- +
\bigtriangledown
: Math symbols- +
\bigtriangleup
: Math symbols- +
\biguplus
: Math symbols- +
\bigwedge
: Math symbols- +
\bmod
: Math functions- +
\boldmath
: Math formulas- +
\bot
: Math symbols- +
\bottomfraction
: figure- +
\bowtie
: Math symbols- +
\Box
: Math symbols- +
\breve
: Math accents- +
\bullet
: Math symbols\c
(cedilla accent): Accents- -
\cal
: Font styles- -
\cap
: Math symbols- -
\caption
: figure- -
\cc
: \cc- -
\cdot
: Math symbols- -
\cdots
: Math Miscellany- -
\centering
: \centering- -
\chapter
: Sectioning- -
\check
: Math accents- -
\chi
: Math symbols- -
\circ
: Math symbols- -
\circle
: \circle- -
\cite
: \cite- -
\cleardoublepage
: \cleardoublepage- -
\clearpage
: \clearpage- -
\cline
: \cline- -
\closing
: \closing- -
\clubsuit
: Math symbols- -
\columnsep
: \twocolumn- -
\columnseprule
: \twocolumn- -
\columnwidth
: \twocolumn- -
\cong
: Math symbols- -
\contentsline
: \addcontentsline- -
\coprod
: Math symbols- -
\copyright
: Text symbols- -
\cos
: Math functions- -
\cosh
: Math functions- -
\cot
: Math functions- -
\coth
: Math functions- -
\csc
: Math functions- -
\cup
: Math symbols- -
\d
(dot-under accent): Accents- -
\dag
: Text symbols- -
\dagger
: Math symbols- -
\dashbox
: \dashbox- -
\dashv
: Math symbols- -
\date{
text}
: \maketitle- -
\day
: \day \month \year- -
\dblfloatpagefraction
: \twocolumn- -
\dblfloatsep
: \twocolumn- -
\dbltextfloatsep
: \twocolumn- -
\dbltopfraction
: \twocolumn- -
\ddag
: Text symbols- -
\ddagger
: Math symbols- -
\ddot
: Math accents- -
\ddots
: Math Miscellany- -
\deg
: Math functions- -
\delta
: Math symbols- -
\Delta
: Math symbols- -
\depth
: Predefined lengths- -
\det
: Math functions- -
\diamond
: Math symbols- -
\Diamond
: Math symbols- -
\diamondsuit
: Math symbols- -
\dim
: Math functions- -
\displaystyle
: Math formulas- +
\div
: Math symbols- +
\cap
: Math symbols- +
\capitalacute
: Accents- +
\capitalbreve
: Accents- +
\capitalcaron
: Accents- +
\capitalcedilla
: Accents- +
\capitalcircumflex
: Accents- +
\capitaldieresis
: Accents- +
\capitaldotaccent
: Accents- +
\capitalgrave
: Accents- +
\capitalhungarumlaut
: Accents- +
\capitalmacron
: Accents- +
\capitalnewtie
: Accents- +
\capitalogonek
: Accents- +
\capitalring
: Accents- +
\capitaltie
: Accents- +
\capitaltilde
: Accents- +
\caption
: figure- +
\cc
: \cc- +
\cdot
: Math symbols- +
\cdots
: Math miscellany- +
\centering
: \centering- +
\chapter
: Sectioning- +
\check
: Math accents- +
\chi
: Math symbols- +
\circ
: Math symbols- +
\circle
: \circle- +
\cite
: \cite- +
\cleardoublepage
: \cleardoublepage- +
\clearpage
: \clearpage- +
\cline
: \cline- +
\closing
: \closing- +
\clubsuit
: Math symbols- +
\columnsep
: \twocolumn- +
\columnseprule
: \twocolumn- +
\columnwidth
: \twocolumn- +
\cong
: Math symbols- +
\contentsline
: \addcontentsline- +
\coprod
: Math symbols- +
\copyright
: Text symbols- +
\cos
: Math functions- +
\cosh
: Math functions- +
\cot
: Math functions- +
\coth
: Math functions- +
\csc
: Math functions- +
\cup
: Math symbols- +
\d
(dot-under accent): Accents- +
\dag
: Text symbols- +
\dagger
: Math symbols- +
\dashbox
: \dashbox- +
\dashv
: Math symbols- +
\date{
text}
: \maketitle- +
\day
: \day \month \year- +
\dblfloatpagefraction
: \twocolumn- +
\dblfloatsep
: \twocolumn- +
\dbltextfloatsep
: \twocolumn- +
\dbltopfraction
: \twocolumn- +
\ddag
: Text symbols- +
\ddagger
: Math symbols- +
\ddot
: Math accents- +
\ddots
: Math miscellany- +
\deg
: Math functions- +
\delta
: Math symbols- +
\Delta
: Math symbols- +
\depth
: Predefined lengths- +
\det
: Math functions- +
\DH (Æ)
: Non-English characters- +
\dh (æ)
: Non-English characters- +
\diamond
: Math symbols- +
\Diamond
: Math symbols- +
\diamondsuit
: Math symbols- +
\dim
: Math functions- +
\displaystyle
: Math formulas- +
\div
: Math symbols- +
\DJ
: Non-English characters\dj
: Non-English characters- -
\documentclass
: Document classes- -
\dot
: Math accents- -
\doteq
: Math symbols- -
\dotfill
: \dotfill- -
\doublerulesep
: tabular- -
\Downarrow
: Math symbols- -
\downarrow
: Math symbols- +
\ell
: Math symbols- +
\dot
: Math accents- +
\doteq
: Math symbols- +
\dotfill
: \dotfill- +
\dots
: Text symbols- +
\doublerulesep
: tabular- +
\Downarrow
: Math symbols- +
\downarrow
: Math symbols\ell
: Math symbols\em
: Font styles- -
\emph
: Font styles- -
\emptyset
: Math symbols- -
\encl
: \encl- -
\end
: Environments- -
\enlargethispage
: \enlargethispage- -
\enumi
: enumerate- -
\enumii
: enumerate- -
\enumiii
: enumerate- -
\enumiv
: enumerate- -
\epsilon
: Math symbols- -
\equiv
: Math symbols- +
\eta
: Math symbols- +
\emptyset
: Math symbols- +
\encl
: \encl- +
\end
: Environments- +
\enlargethispage
: \enlargethispage- +
\enumi
: enumerate- +
\enumii
: enumerate- +
\enumiii
: enumerate- +
\enumiv
: enumerate- +
\epsilon
: Math symbols- +
\equiv
: Math symbols\eta
: Math symbols- -
\evensidemargin
: Document class options- -
\exists
: Math symbols- -
\exp
: Math functions- -
\fbox
: \fbox and \framebox- -
\fboxrule
: \fbox and \framebox- -
\fboxrule
: \framebox (picture)- -
\fboxsep
: \fbox and \framebox- -
\fboxsep
: \framebox (picture)- -
\fill
: \hfill- -
\flat
: Math symbols- -
\floatpagefraction
: figure- -
\floatsep
: figure- -
\flushbottom
: \flushbottom- +
\fnsymbol
: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol- +
\exists
: Math symbols- +
\exp
: Math functions- +
\fbox
: \fbox and \framebox- +
\fboxrule
: \fbox and \framebox- +
\fboxrule
: \framebox (picture)- +
\fboxsep
: \fbox and \framebox- +
\fboxsep
: \framebox (picture)- +
\fill
: \hfill- +
\flat
: Math symbols- +
\floatpagefraction
: figure- +
\floatsep
: figure- +
\flushbottom
: \flushbottom- +
\fnsymbol
: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol\fnsymbol
, and footnotes: Symbolic footnotes\fontencoding
: Low-level font commands\fontfamily
: Low-level font commands\fontseries
: Low-level font commands\fontshape
: Low-level font commands- -
\fontsize
: Low-level font commands- -
\footnote
: \footnote- -
\footnotemark
: \footnotemark- -
\footnoterule
: Footnote parameters- +
\footnotesep
: Footnote parameters- +
\footnote
: \footnote- +
\footnotemark
: \footnotemark- +
\footnoterule
: Footnote parameters\footnotesep
: Footnote parameters- -
\footnotesize
: Font sizes- -
\footnotetext
: \footnotetext- -
\footskip
: Page layout parameters- -
\forall
: Math symbols- -
\frac
: Math Miscellany- -
\frac{num}{den}
: Math Miscellany- -
\frame
: \frame- -
\framebox
: \fbox and \framebox- -
\framebox
: \framebox (picture)- -
\frown
: Math symbols- -
\fussy
: \fussy- -
\gamma
: Math symbols- -
\Gamma
: Math symbols- -
\gcd
: Math functions- -
\ge
: Math symbols- -
\geq
: Math symbols- -
\gets
: Math symbols- -
\gg
: Math symbols- -
\glossary
: Glossaries- -
\glossaryentry
: Glossaries- -
\grave
: Math accents- -
\H
(Hungarian umlaut accent): Accents- -
\hat
: Math accents- -
\hbar
: Math symbols- -
\headheight
: Page layout parameters- -
\headsep
: Page layout parameters- -
\heartsuit
: Math symbols- -
\height
: Predefined lengths- -
\hfill
: \hfill- -
\hline
: \hline- -
\hom
: Math functions- -
\hookleftarrow
: Math symbols- -
\hookrightarrow
: Math symbols- -
\hrulefill
: \hrulefill- +
\hspace
: \hspace- +
\footnotetext
: \footnotetext- +
\footskip
: Page layout parameters- +
\forall
: Math symbols- +
\frac
: Math miscellany- +
\frac{num}{den}
: Math miscellany- +
\frame
: \frame- +
\framebox
: \fbox and \framebox- +
\framebox
: \framebox (picture)- +
\frown
: Math symbols- +
\fussy
: \fussy- +
\gamma
: Math symbols- +
\Gamma
: Math symbols- +
\gcd
: Math functions- +
\ge
: Math symbols- +
\geq
: Math symbols- +
\gets
: Math symbols- +
\gg
: Math symbols- +
\glossary
: Glossaries- +
\glossaryentry
: Glossaries- +
\grave
: Math accents- +
\guillemotleft
(«): Text symbols- +
\guillemotright
(»): Text symbols- +
\guilsinglleft
(‹): Text symbols- +
\guilsinglright
(›): Text symbols- +
\H
(Hungarian umlaut accent): Accents- +
\hat
: Math accents- +
\hbar
: Math symbols- +
\headheight
: Page layout parameters- +
\headsep
: Page layout parameters- +
\heartsuit
: Math symbols- +
\height
: Predefined lengths- +
\hfill
: \hfill- +
\hline
: \hline- +
\hom
: Math functions- +
\hookleftarrow
: Math symbols- +
\hookrightarrow
: Math symbols- +
\hrulefill
: \hrulefill\hspace
: \hspace\Huge
: Font sizes- -
\huge
: Font sizes- -
\hyphenation
: \hyphenation- -
\i
(dotless i): Accents- -
\iff
: Math symbols- -
\Im
: Math symbols- -
\imath
: Math accents- -
\in
: Math symbols- -
\include
: \include- -
\includeonly
: \includeonly- -
\indent
: \indent- -
\index
: Indexes- -
\indexentry
: Indexes- -
\inf
: Math functions- -
\infty
: Math symbols- -
\input
: \input- -
\int
: Math symbols- -
\intextsep
: figure- +
\iota
: Math symbols- +
\hyphenation
: \hyphenation- +
\i
(dotless i): Accents- +
\iff
: Math symbols- +
\IJ (IJ)
: Non-English characters- +
\ij (ij)
: Non-English characters- +
\Im
: Math symbols- +
\imath
: Math accents- +
\in
: Math symbols- +
\include
: \include- +
\includeonly
: \includeonly- +
\indent
: \indent- +
\index
: Indexes- +
\indexentry
: Indexes- +
\inf
: Math functions- +
\infty
: Math symbols- +
\input
: \input- +
\int
: Math symbols- +
\intextsep
: figure\iota
: Math symbols- -
\it
: Font styles- -
\item
: itemize- -
\item
: enumerate- -
\item
: description- -
\itemindent
: itemize- +
\itemsep
: itemize- +
\item
: itemize- +
\item
: enumerate- +
\item
: description- +
\itemindent
: itemize\itemsep
: itemize- -
\itshape
: Font styles- -
\j
(dotless j): Accents- -
\jmath
: Math accents- -
\Join
: Math symbols- -
\kappa
: Math symbols- -
\ker
: Math functions- -
\kill
: tabbing- -
\L (/L)
: Non-English characters- -
\l (/l)
: Non-English characters- -
\label
: \label- -
\labelenumi
: enumerate- -
\labelenumii
: enumerate- -
\labelenumiii
: enumerate- -
\labelenumiv
: enumerate- -
\labelitemi
: itemize- -
\labelitemii
: itemize- -
\labelitemiii
: itemize- -
\labelitemiv
: itemize- -
\labelsep
: itemize- -
\labelwidth
: itemize- -
\lambda
: Math symbols- -
\Lambda
: Math symbols- -
\land
: Math symbols- +
\langle
: Math symbols- +
\j
(dotless j): Accents- +
\jmath
: Math accents- +
\Join
: Math symbols- +
\k
(ogonek): Accents- +
\kappa
: Math symbols- +
\ker
: Math functions- +
\kill
: tabbing- +
\L (/L)
: Non-English characters- +
\l (/l)
: Non-English characters- +
\label
: \label- +
\labelenumi
: enumerate- +
\labelenumii
: enumerate- +
\labelenumiii
: enumerate- +
\labelenumiv
: enumerate- +
\labelitemi
: itemize- +
\labelitemii
: itemize- +
\labelitemiii
: itemize- +
\labelitemiv
: itemize- +
\labelsep
: itemize- +
\labelwidth
: itemize- +
\lambda
: Math symbols- +
\Lambda
: Math symbols- +
\land
: Math symbols\langle
: Math symbols\LARGE
: Font sizes\Large
: Font sizes- -
\large
: Font sizes- -
\LaTeX
: Text symbols- -
\lbrace
: Math symbols- -
\lbrack
: Math symbols- -
\lceil
: Math symbols- -
\ldots
: Text symbols- -
\le
: Math symbols- -
\leadsto
: Math symbols- -
\left
delim1... \right
delim2: Math Miscellany- -
\leftarrow
: Math symbols- -
\Leftarrow
: Math symbols- -
\lefteqn
: eqnarray- -
\leftharpoondown
: Math symbols- -
\leftharpoonup
: Math symbols- -
\leftmargin
: itemize- -
\leftmargini
: itemize- -
\leftmarginii
: itemize- -
\leftmarginiii
: itemize- -
\leftmarginiv
: itemize- -
\leftmarginv
: itemize- -
\leftmarginvi
: itemize- -
\leftrightarrow
: Math symbols- -
\Leftrightarrow
: Math symbols- -
\leq
: Math symbols- -
\lfloor
: Math symbols- -
\lg
: Math functions- -
\lhd
: Math symbols- -
\lim
: Math functions- -
\liminf
: Math functions- -
\limsup
: Math functions- -
\line
: \line- -
\linebreak
: \linebreak & \nolinebreak- -
\linethickness
: \linethickness- -
\linewidth
: Page layout parameters- -
\listoffigures
: Tables of contents- -
\listoftables
: Tables of contents- -
\listparindent
: itemize- -
\ll
: Math symbols- -
\ln
: Math functions- -
\lnot
: Math symbols- -
\location
: \location- -
\log
: Math functions- -
\longleftarrow
: Math symbols- -
\longleftrightarrow
: Math symbols- -
\longmapsto
: Math symbols- -
\longrightarrow
: Math symbols- -
\lor
: Math symbols- -
\lq
: Text symbols- -
\makebox
: \makebox- -
\makebox (picture)
: \makebox (picture)- -
\makeglossary
: Glossaries- -
\makeindex
: Indexes- -
\makelabels
: \makelabels- -
\maketitle
: \maketitle- -
\mapsto
: Math symbols- -
\marginpar
: Marginal notes- -
\marginparpush
: Marginal notes- -
\marginparsep
: Marginal notes- -
\marginparwidth
: Marginal notes- -
\markboth{
left}{
right}
: \pagestyle- +
\markright{
right}
: \pagestyle- +
\LaTeX
: Text symbols- +
\lbrace
: Math symbols- +
\lbrack
: Math symbols- +
\lceil
: Math symbols- +
\ldots
: Text symbols- +
\le
: Math symbols- +
\leadsto
: Math symbols- +
\left
delim1... \right
delim2: Math miscellany- +
\leftarrow
: Math symbols- +
\Leftarrow
: Math symbols- +
\lefteqn
: eqnarray- +
\leftharpoondown
: Math symbols- +
\leftharpoonup
: Math symbols- +
\leftmargin
: itemize- +
\leftmargini
: itemize- +
\leftmarginii
: itemize- +
\leftmarginiii
: itemize- +
\leftmarginiv
: itemize- +
\leftmarginv
: itemize- +
\leftmarginvi
: itemize- +
\leftrightarrow
: Math symbols- +
\Leftrightarrow
: Math symbols- +
\leq
: Math symbols- +
\lfloor
: Math symbols- +
\lg
: Math functions- +
\lhd
: Math symbols- +
\lim
: Math functions- +
\liminf
: Math functions- +
\limsup
: Math functions- +
\line
: \line- +
\linebreak
: \linebreak & \nolinebreak- +
\linespread
: Low-level font commands- +
\linethickness
: \linethickness- +
\linewidth
: Page layout parameters- +
\listoffigures
: Tables of contents- +
\listoftables
: Tables of contents- +
\listparindent
: itemize- +
\ll
: Math symbols- +
\ln
: Math functions- +
\lnot
: Math symbols- +
\location
: \location- +
\log
: Math functions- +
\longleftarrow
: Math symbols- +
\longleftrightarrow
: Math symbols- +
\longmapsto
: Math symbols- +
\longrightarrow
: Math symbols- +
\lor
: Math symbols- +
\lq
: Text symbols- +
\makebox
: \makebox- +
\makebox (picture)
: \makebox (picture)- +
\makeglossary
: Glossaries- +
\makeindex
: Indexes- +
\makelabels
: \makelabels- +
\maketitle
: \maketitle- +
\mapsto
: Math symbols- +
\marginpar
: Marginal notes- +
\marginparpush
: Marginal notes- +
\marginparsep
: Marginal notes- +
\marginparwidth
: Marginal notes- +
\markboth{
left}{
right}
: \pagestyle\markright{
right}
: \pagestyle\mathbf
: Font styles\mathcal
: Font styles- @@ -7559,364 +7825,421 @@ Up: Top
\mathnormal
: Font styles\mathsf
: Font styles\mathtt
: Font styles- -
\mathversion
: Font styles- -
\max
: Math functions- +
\mbox
: \mbox- +
\max
: Math functions\mbox
: \mbox- -
\mdseries
: Font styles- -
\medskip
: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip- -
\medskipamount
: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip- -
\mho
: Math symbols- -
\mid
: Math symbols- -
\min
: Math functions- -
\models
: Math symbols- -
\month
: \day \month \year- -
\mp
: Math symbols- -
\mu
: Math symbols- -
\multicolumn
: \multicolumn- -
\multiput
: \multiput- -
\nabla
: Math symbols- -
\name
: \name- -
\natural
: Math symbols- -
\ne
: Math symbols- -
\nearrow
: Math symbols- -
\neg
: Math symbols- -
\neq
: Math symbols- -
\newcommand
: \newcommand & \renewcommand- -
\newcounter
: \newcounter- -
\newenvironment
: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment- -
\newfont
: \newfont- -
\newlength
: \newlength- -
\NEWLINE
: \SPACE- -
\newline
: \newline- -
\newpage
: \newpage- -
\newsavebox
: \newsavebox- -
\newtheorem
: \newtheorem- -
\ni
: Math symbols- -
\nocite
: \nocite- -
\nofiles
: Tables of contents- -
\noindent
: \noindent- -
\nolinebreak
: \linebreak & \nolinebreak- -
\nonumber
: eqnarray- +
\nopagebreak
: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak- +
\medskip
: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip- +
\medskipamount
: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip- +
\mho
: Math symbols- +
\mid
: Math symbols- +
\min
: Math functions- +
\models
: Math symbols- +
\month
: \day \month \year- +
\mp
: Math symbols- +
\mu
: Math symbols- +
\multicolumn
: \multicolumn- +
\multiput
: \multiput- +
\nabla
: Math symbols- +
\name
: \name- +
\natural
: Math symbols- +
\ne
: Math symbols- +
\nearrow
: Math symbols- +
\neg
: Math symbols- +
\neq
: Math symbols- +
\newcommand
: \newcommand & \renewcommand- +
\newcounter
: \newcounter- +
\newenvironment
: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment- +
\newfont
: \newfont- +
\newlength
: \newlength- +
\NEWLINE
: \SPACE- +
\newline
: \newline- +
\newpage
: \newpage- +
\newsavebox
: \newsavebox- +
\newtheorem
: \newtheorem- +
\newtie
: Accents- +
\NG
: Non-English characters- +
\ng
: Non-English characters- +
\ni
: Math symbols- +
\nocite
: \nocite- +
\nofiles
: Tables of contents- +
\noindent
: \noindent- +
\nolinebreak
: \linebreak & \nolinebreak- +
\nonumber
: eqnarray\nopagebreak
: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak- -
\normalfont
: Font styles- +
\normalmarginpar
: Marginal notes\normalmarginpar
: Marginal notes- -
\normalsize
: Font sizes- -
\not
: Math symbols- -
\notin
: Math symbols- -
\nu
: Math symbols- -
\nwarrow
: Math symbols- -
\O (Ø)
: Non-English characters- -
\o (ø)
: Non-English characters- +
\obeycr
: \obeycr & \restorecr- +
\not
: Math symbols- +
\notin
: Math symbols- +
\nu
: Math symbols- +
\nwarrow
: Math symbols- +
\O (Ø)
: Non-English characters- +
\o (ø)
: Non-English characters\obeycr
: \obeycr & \restorecr- -
\oddsidemargin
: Document class options- -
\odot
: Math symbols- -
\OE (Œ)
: Non-English characters- -
\oe (œ)
: Non-English characters- -
\oint
: Math symbols- -
\omega
: Math symbols- -
\Omega
: Math symbols- -
\ominus
: Math symbols- -
\onecolumn
: \onecolumn- -
\opening
: \opening- -
\oplus
: Math symbols- -
\oslash
: Math symbols- -
\otimes
: Math symbols- -
\oval
: \oval- -
\overbrace{
text}
: Math Miscellany- -
\overline{
text}
: Math Miscellany- -
\owns
: Math symbols- -
\P
: Text symbols- -
\pagebreak
: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak- -
\pagenumbering
: \pagenumbering- -
\pageref
: \pageref- -
\pagestyle
: \pagestyle- -
\paragraph
: Sectioning- -
\parallel
: Math symbols- -
\parbox
: \parbox- -
\parindent
: \indent- -
\parindent
: minipage- -
\parsep
: itemize- -
\parskip
: \parskip- -
\parskip
example: itemize- -
\part
: Sectioning- -
\partial
: Math symbols- -
\partopsep
: itemize- -
\perp
: Math symbols- -
\phi
: Math symbols- -
\pi
: Math symbols- -
\Pi
: Math symbols- -
\pm
: Math symbols- -
\pmod
: Math functions- -
\poptabs
: tabbing- -
\pounds
: Text symbols- -
\Pr
: Math functions- -
\prec
: Math symbols- -
\preceq
: Math symbols- -
\prime
: Math symbols- -
\prod
: Math symbols- -
\propto
: Math symbols- -
\protect
: \protect- -
\ps
: \ps- -
\psi
: Math symbols- -
\Psi
: Math symbols- -
\pushtabs
: tabbing- -
\put
: \put- -
\raggedbottom
: \raggedbottom- -
\raggedleft
: \raggedleft- -
\raggedright
: \raggedright- -
\raisebox
: \raisebox- -
\rangle
: Math symbols- -
\rbrace
: Math symbols- -
\rbrack
: Math symbols- -
\rceil
: Math symbols- -
\Re
: Math symbols- -
\ref
: \ref- -
\refstepcounter
: \refstepcounter- -
\renewenvironment
: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment- -
\restorecr
: \obeycr & \restorecr- -
\reversemarginpar
: Marginal notes- -
\rfloor
: Math symbols- -
\rhd
: Math symbols- -
\rho
: Math symbols- -
\right
: Math Miscellany- -
\rightarrow
: Math symbols- -
\Rightarrow
: Math symbols- -
\rightharpoondown
: Math symbols- -
\rightharpoonup
: Math symbols- -
\rightleftharpoons
: Math symbols- +
\rightmargin
: itemize- +
\odot
: Math symbols- +
\OE (Œ)
: Non-English characters- +
\oe (œ)
: Non-English characters- +
\oint
: Math symbols- +
\omega
: Math symbols- +
\Omega
: Math symbols- +
\ominus
: Math symbols- +
\onecolumn
: \onecolumn- +
\opening
: \opening- +
\oplus
: Math symbols- +
\oslash
: Math symbols- +
\otimes
: Math symbols- +
\oval
: \oval- +
\overbrace{
text}
: Math miscellany- +
\overline{
text}
: Math miscellany- +
\owns
: Math symbols- +
\P
: Text symbols- +
\pagebreak
: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak- +
\pagenumbering
: \pagenumbering- +
\pageref
: \pageref- +
\pagestyle
: \pagestyle- +
\paragraph
: Sectioning- +
\parallel
: Math symbols- +
\parbox
: \parbox- +
\parindent
: \indent- +
\parindent
: minipage- +
\parsep
: itemize- +
\parskip
: \parskip- +
\parskip
example: itemize- +
\part
: Sectioning- +
\partial
: Math symbols- +
\partopsep
: itemize- +
\perp
: Math symbols- +
\phi
: Math symbols- +
\pi
: Math symbols- +
\Pi
: Math symbols- +
\pm
: Math symbols- +
\pmod
: Math functions- +
\poptabs
: tabbing- +
\pounds
: Text symbols- +
\Pr
: Math functions- +
\prec
: Math symbols- +
\preceq
: Math symbols- +
\prime
: Math symbols- +
\prod
: Math symbols- +
\propto
: Math symbols- +
\protect
: \protect- +
\ps
: \ps- +
\psi
: Math symbols- +
\Psi
: Math symbols- +
\pushtabs
: tabbing- +
\put
: \put- +
\quotedblbase
(„): Text symbols- +
\quotesinglbase
(‚): Text symbols- +
\r
(ring accent): Accents- +
\raggedbottom
: \raggedbottom- +
\raggedleft
: \raggedleft- +
\raggedright
: \raggedright- +
\raisebox
: \raisebox- +
\rangle
: Math symbols- +
\rbrace
: Math symbols- +
\rbrack
: Math symbols- +
\rceil
: Math symbols- +
\Re
: Math symbols- +
\ref
: \ref- +
\refstepcounter
: \refstepcounter- +
\renewenvironment
: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment- +
\restorecr
: \obeycr & \restorecr- +
\reversemarginpar
: Marginal notes- +
\rfloor
: Math symbols- +
\rhd
: Math symbols- +
\rho
: Math symbols- +
\right
: Math miscellany- +
\rightarrow
: Math symbols- +
\Rightarrow
: Math symbols- +
\rightharpoondown
: Math symbols- +
\rightharpoonup
: Math symbols- +
\rightleftharpoons
: Math symbols\rightmargin
: itemize\rm
: Font styles- -
\rmfamily
: Font styles- -
\roman
: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol- -
\rq
: Text symbols- -
\rule
: \rule- -
\S
: Text symbols- -
\savebox
: \savebox- +
\sbox
: \sbox- +
\roman
: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol- +
\rq
: Text symbols- +
\rule
: \rule- +
\S
: Text symbols- +
\savebox
: \savebox\sbox
: \sbox\sc
: Font styles\scriptsize
: Font sizes- -
\scshape
: Font styles- -
\searrow
: Math symbols- -
\sec
: Math functions- -
\section
: Sectioning- -
\seename
: Indexes- -
\selectfont
: Low-level font commands- -
\setcounter
: \setcounter- -
\setlength
: \setlength- -
\setminus
: Math symbols- -
\settodepth
: \settodepth- -
\settoheight
: \settoheight- +
\settowidth
: \settowidth- +
\searrow
: Math symbols- +
\sec
: Math functions- +
\section
: Sectioning- +
\seename
: Indexes- +
\selectfont
: Low-level font commands- +
\setcounter
: \setcounter- +
\setlength
: \setlength- +
\setminus
: Math symbols- +
\settodepth
: \settodepth- +
\settoheight
: \settoheight\settowidth
: \settowidth\sf
: Font styles- -
\sffamily
: Font styles- -
\sharp
: Math symbols- -
\shortstack
: \shortstack- -
\sigma
: Math symbols- -
\Sigma
: Math symbols- -
\signature
: \signature- -
\sim
: Math symbols- -
\simeq
: Math symbols- -
\sin
: Math functions- +
\sinh
: Math functions- +
\sharp
: Math symbols- +
\shortstack
: \shortstack- +
\sigma
: Math symbols- +
\Sigma
: Math symbols- +
\signature
: \signature- +
\sim
: Math symbols- +
\simeq
: Math symbols- +
\sin
: Math functions\sinh
: Math functions\sl
: Font styles\slshape
: Font styles- -
\small
: Font sizes- -
\smallint
: Math symbols- -
\smallskip
: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip- -
\smallskipamount
: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip- -
\smile
: Math symbols- -
\SPACE
: \SPACE- -
\spadesuit
: Math symbols- -
\sqcap
: Math symbols- -
\sqcup
: Math symbols- -
\sqrt[
root]{arg}
: Math Miscellany- -
\sqsubset
: Math symbols- -
\sqsubseteq
: Math symbols- -
\sqsupset
: Math symbols- -
\sqsupseteq
: Math symbols- -
\ss (ß)
: Non-English characters- -
\stackrel{
text}{
relation}
: Math Miscellany- -
\star
: Math symbols- -
\startbreaks
: \startbreaks- -
\stepcounter
: \stepcounter- -
\stop
: Command Line- -
\stopbreaks
: \stopbreaks- -
\subparagraph
: Sectioning- -
\subsection
: Sectioning- -
\subset
: Math symbols- -
\subseteq
: Math symbols- -
\subsubsection
: Sectioning- -
\succ
: Math symbols- -
\succeq
: Math symbols- -
\sum
: Math symbols- -
\sup
: Math functions- -
\supset
: Math symbols- -
\supseteq
: Math symbols- -
\surd
: Math symbols- -
\swarrow
: Math symbols- -
\symbol
: Reserved characters- -
\t
(tie-after accent): Accents- -
\TAB
: \SPACE- -
\tabbingsep
: tabbing- -
\tabcolsep
: tabular- -
\tableofcontents
: Tables of contents- -
\tan
: Math functions- -
\tanh
: Math functions- -
\tau
: Math symbols- -
\telephone
: \telephone- +
\TeX
: Text symbols- +
\smallint
: Math symbols- +
\smallskip
: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip- +
\smallskipamount
: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip- +
\smile
: Math symbols- +
\SPACE
: \SPACE- +
\spadesuit
: Math symbols- +
\sqcap
: Math symbols- +
\sqcup
: Math symbols- +
\sqrt[
root]{arg}
: Math miscellany- +
\sqsubset
: Math symbols- +
\sqsubseteq
: Math symbols- +
\sqsupset
: Math symbols- +
\sqsupseteq
: Math symbols- +
\SS (SS)
: Non-English characters- +
\ss (ß)
: Non-English characters- +
\stackrel{
text}{
relation}
: Math miscellany- +
\star
: Math symbols- +
\startbreaks
: \startbreaks- +
\stepcounter
: \stepcounter- +
\stop
: Command line- +
\stopbreaks
: \stopbreaks- +
\subparagraph
: Sectioning- +
\subsection
: Sectioning- +
\subset
: Math symbols- +
\subseteq
: Math symbols- +
\subsubsection
: Sectioning- +
\succ
: Math symbols- +
\succeq
: Math symbols- +
\sum
: Math symbols- +
\sup
: Math functions- +
\supset
: Math symbols- +
\supseteq
: Math symbols- +
\surd
: Math symbols- +
\swarrow
: Math symbols- +
\symbol
: Reserved characters- +
\t
(tie-after accent): Accents- +
\TAB
: \SPACE- +
\tabbingsep
: tabbing- +
\tabcolsep
: tabular- +
\tableofcontents
: Tables of contents- +
\tan
: Math functions- +
\tanh
: Math functions- +
\tau
: Math symbols- +
\telephone
: \telephone- +
\TeX
: Text symbols- +
\textascenderwordmark
: Text symbols- +
\textasciicircum
: Text symbols- +
\textasciitilde
: Text symbols- +
\textasteriskcentered
: Text symbols- +
\textbackslash
: Text symbols- +
\textbar
: Text symbols\textbardbl
: Text symbols- -
\textbf
: Font styles- -
\textfloatsep
: figure- -
\textfraction
: figure- +
\textheight
: Page layout parameters- +
\textbigcircle
: Text symbols- +
\textbraceleft
: Text symbols- +
\textbraceright
: Text symbols- +
\textbullet
: Text symbols- +
\textcapitalwordmark
: Text symbols- +
\textcircled{
letter}
: Text symbols- +
\textcompwordmark
: Text symbols- +
\textcopyright
: Text symbols- +
\textdagger
: Text symbols- +
\textdaggerdbl
: Text symbols- +
\textdollar
(or$
): Text symbols- +
\textellipsis
: Text symbols- +
\textemdash
(or---
): Text symbols- +
\textendash
(or--
): Text symbols- +
\texteuro
: Text symbols- +
\textexclamdown
(or!`
): Text symbols- +
\textfloatsep
: figure- +
\textfraction
: figure- +
\textgreater
: Text symbols\textheight
: Page layout parameters- +
\textit
: Font styles- +
\textleftarrow
: Text symbols\textless
: Text symbols\textmd
: Font styles- +
\textnormal
: Font styles- +
\textordfeminine
: Text symbols- +
\textordmasculine
: Text symbols- +
\textparagraph
: Text symbols- +
\textperiodcentered
: Text symbols- +
\textquestiondown
(or?`
): Text symbols- +
\textquotedblleft
(or``
): Text symbols- +
\textquotedblright
(or'
): Text symbols- +
\textquoteleft
(or`
): Text symbols- +
\textquoteright
(or'
): Text symbols- +
\textquotestraightbase
: Text symbols- +
\textquotestraightdblbase
: Text symbols- +
\textregistered
: Text symbols\textrightarrow
: Text symbols\textrm
: Font styles\textsc
: Font styles\textsf
: Font styles- +
\textsl
: Font styles- +
\textsterling
: Text symbols- +
\textthreequartersemdash
: Text symbols\texttrademark
: Text symbols- +
\texttt
: Font styles- +
\texttwelveudash
: Text symbols\textunderscore
: Text symbols- -
\textup
: Font styles- -
\textwidth
: Page layout parameters- -
\thanks{
text}
: \maketitle- -
\theta
: Math symbols- -
\thicklines
: \thicklines- -
\thinlines
: \thinlines- -
\thinspace
: \thinspace- -
\thispagestyle
: \thispagestyle- -
\tilde
: Math accents- +
\times
: Math symbols- +
\textvisiblespace
: Text symbols- +
\textwidth
: Page layout parameters- +
\TH ()
: Non-English characters- +
\th ()
: Non-English characters- +
\thanks{
text}
: \maketitle- +
\theta
: Math symbols- +
\thicklines
: \thicklines- +
\thinlines
: \thinlines- +
\thinspace
: \thinspace- +
\thispagestyle
: \thispagestyle- +
\tilde
: Math accents\times
: Math symbols- -
\tiny
: Font sizes- -
\title{
text}
: \maketitle- -
\to
: Math symbols- -
\today
: \today- -
\top
: Math symbols- -
\topfraction
: figure- -
\topmargin
: Page layout parameters- -
\topsep
: itemize- -
\topskip
: Page layout parameters- -
\totalheight
: Predefined lengths- -
\triangle
: Math symbols- -
\triangleleft
: Math symbols- +
\triangleright
: Math symbols- +
\title{
text}
: \maketitle- +
\to
: Math symbols- +
\today
: \today- +
\top
: Math symbols- +
\topfraction
: figure- +
\topmargin
: Page layout parameters- +
\topsep
: itemize- +
\topskip
: Page layout parameters- +
\totalheight
: Predefined lengths- +
\triangle
: Math symbols- +
\triangleleft
: Math symbols\triangleright
: Math symbols\tt
: Font styles- -
\ttfamily
: Font styles- -
\twocolumn
: \twocolumn- -
\typein
: \typein- -
\typeout
: \typeout- -
\u
(breve accent): Accents- -
\unboldmath
: Math formulas- -
\underbrace{math}
: Math Miscellany- -
\underline{text}
: Math Miscellany- -
\unitlength
: picture- -
\unlhd
: Math symbols- -
\unrhd
: Math symbols- -
\uparrow
: Math symbols- -
\Uparrow
: Math symbols- -
\updownarrow
: Math symbols- -
\Updownarrow
: Math symbols- +
\uplus
: Math symbols- +
\twocolumn
: \twocolumn- +
\typein
: \typein- +
\typeout
: \typeout- +
\u
(breve accent): Accents- +
\unboldmath
: Math formulas- +
\underbar
: Accents- +
\underbrace{math}
: Math miscellany- +
\underline{text}
: Math miscellany- +
\unitlength
: picture- +
\unlhd
: Math symbols- +
\unrhd
: Math symbols- +
\uparrow
: Math symbols- +
\Uparrow
: Math symbols- +
\updownarrow
: Math symbols- +
\Updownarrow
: Math symbols\uplus
: Math symbols- -
\upshape
: Font styles- -
\upsilon
: Math symbols- -
\Upsilon
: Math symbols- -
\usebox
: \usebox- -
\usecounter
: \usecounter- +
\usefont
: Low-level font commands- +
\upsilon
: Math symbols- +
\Upsilon
: Math symbols- +
\usebox
: \usebox- +
\usecounter
: \usecounter\usefont
: Low-level font commands- -
\usepackage
: Document class options- -
\v
(breve accent): Accents- -
\value
: \value- -
\varepsilon
: Math symbols- -
\varphi
: Math symbols- -
\varpi
: Math symbols- -
\varrho
: Math symbols- -
\varsigma
: Math symbols- -
\vartheta
: Math symbols- -
\vdash
: Math symbols- -
\vdots
: Math Miscellany- -
\vec
: Math accents- -
\vector
: \vector- -
\vee
: Math symbols- -
\verb
: \verb- -
\vert
: Math symbols- -
\Vert
: Math symbols- -
\vfill
: \vfill- -
\vline
: \vline- -
\vspace
: \vspace- -
\wedge
: Math symbols- -
\widehat
: Math accents- -
\width
: Predefined lengths- -
\wp
: Math symbols- -
\wr
: Math symbols- -
\xi
: Math symbols- -
\Xi
: Math symbols- -
\year
: \day \month \year- -
\zeta
: Math symbols- -
\{
: Reserved characters- -
\|
: Math symbols- -
\}
: Reserved characters- -
\~
: Reserved characters- -
\~
(tilde accent): Accents- -
^
: Subscripts & Superscripts- +
_
: Subscripts & Superscripts- +
\v
(breve accent): Accents- +
\value
: \value- +
\varepsilon
: Math symbols- +
\varphi
: Math symbols- +
\varpi
: Math symbols- +
\varrho
: Math symbols- +
\varsigma
: Math symbols- +
\vartheta
: Math symbols- +
\vdash
: Math symbols- +
\vdots
: Math miscellany- +
\vec
: Math accents- +
\vector
: \vector- +
\vee
: Math symbols- +
\verb
: \verb- +
\vert
: Math symbols- +
\Vert
: Math symbols- +
\vfill
: \vfill- +
\vline
: \vline- +
\vspace
: \vspace- +
\wedge
: Math symbols- +
\widehat
: Math accents- +
\width
: Predefined lengths- +
\wp
: Math symbols- +
\wr
: Math symbols- +
\xi
: Math symbols- +
\Xi
: Math symbols- +
\year
: \day \month \year- +
\zeta
: Math symbols- +
\{
: Reserved characters- +
\|
: Math symbols- +
\}
: Reserved characters- +
\~
: Reserved characters- +
\~
(tilde accent): Accents- +
^
: Subscripts & superscripts_
: Subscripts & superscriptsa4paper
option: Document class options- -
a5paper
option: Document class options- -
abstract
environment: abstract- +
array
environment: array- +
abstract
environment: abstractarray
environment: arrayarticle
class: Document classesb5paper
option: Document class options- -
book
class: Document classes- -
center
environment: center- -
description
environment: description- -
displaymath
environment: Math formulas- -
displaymath
environment: displaymath- +
document
environment: document- +
center
environment: center- +
description
environment: description- +
displaymath
environment: Math formulas- +
displaymath
environment: displaymathdocument
environment: document- -
draft
option: Document class options- -
enumerate
environment: enumerate- -
eqnarray
environment: eqnarray- -
equation
environment: Math formulas- +
equation
environment: equation- +
enumerate
environment: enumerate- +
eqnarray
environment: eqnarray- +
equation
environment: Math formulasequation
environment: equation- -
executivepaper
option: Document class options- +
figure
: figurefigure
: figurefinal
option: Document class options- -
fleqn
option: Document class options- -
flushleft
environment: flushleft- -
flushright
environment: flushright- -
indexspace
: Indexes- +
itemize
environment: itemize- +
flushleft
environment: flushleft- +
flushright
environment: flushright- +
indexspace
: Indexesitemize
environment: itemizelandscape
option: Document class optionslegalpaper
option: Document class options- -
leqno
option: Document class options- +
letter
: letterletter
: letterletter
class: Document classes- -
letterpaper
option: Document class options- -
list
: list- -
lR box
: picture- -
lrbox
: lrbox- -
math
environment: Math formulas- -
math
environment: math- +
minipage
environment: minipage- +
list
: list- +
lR box
: picture- +
lrbox
: lrbox- +
math
environment: Math formulas- +
math
environment: mathminipage
environment: minipagenotitlepage
option: Document class optionsonecolumn
option: Document class optionsoneside
option: Document class optionsopenany
option: Document class optionsopenbib
option: Document class options- -
openright
option: Document class options- -
picture
: picture- -
printindex
: Indexes- -
quotation
: quotation- +
quote
: quote- +
picture
: picture- +
printindex
: Indexes- +
quotation
: quotationquote
: quote- +
report
class: Document classessecnumdepth
counter: Sectioning- -
slides
class: Document classes- -
tabbing
environment: tabbing- -
table
: table- -
tabular
environment: tabular- -
thebibliography
: thebibliography- -
theorem
environment: theorem- +
titlepage
environment: titlepage- +
tabbing
environment: tabbing- +
table
: table- +
tabular
environment: tabular- +
textcomp
package: Text symbols- +
thebibliography
: thebibliography- +
theorem
environment: theoremtitlepage
environment: titlepagetitlepage
option: Document class optionstwocolumn
option: Document class options- -
twoside
option: Document class options- -
verbatim
environment: verbatim- +
verse
environment: verse- +
verbatim
environment: verbatimverse
environment: verse<1>: See 16.5. (line 3684) -\>: See 8.21. (line 1728) -\> (tabbing): See 8.21. (line 1727) -\@: See 19.4. (line 3931) -\[: See 16. (line 2843) -\\ (for \shortstack objects): See 8.18.13. (line 1657) -\\ (for array): See 8.2. (line 914) -\\ (for center): See 8.3. (line 946) -\\ (for eqnarray): See 8.8. (line 1071) -\\ (for flushright): See 8.12. (line 1218) -\\ for \author: See 18.1. (line 3795) -\\ for \title: See 18.1. (line 3809) -\\ for flushleft: See 8.11. (line 1192) -\\ for letters: See 24. (line 4608) -\\ for tabular: See 8.23. (line 1839) -\\ for verse: See 8.28. (line 2163) -\\ force line break: See 13.1. (line 2603) -\\ tabbing: See 8.21. (line 1721) -\\* (for eqnarray): See 8.8. (line 1076) -\]: See 16. (line 2843) -\^: See 21.1. (line 4222) -\^ (circumflex accent): See 21.3. (line 4299) -\_: See 21.1. (line 4212) -\` (grave accent): See 21.3. (line 4302) -\` (tabbing): See 8.21. (line 1748) -\a (tabbing): See 8.21. (line 1757) -\a' (acute accent in tabbing): See 8.21. (line 1758) -\a= (macron accent in tabbing): See 8.21. (line 1758) -\a` (grave accent in tabbing): See 8.21. (line 1758) -\AA (AA): See 21.4. (line 4346) -\aa (aa): See 21.4. (line 4346) -\acute: See 16.4. (line 3628) -\addcontentsline{EXT}{UNIT}{TEXT}: See 23.1.1. (line 4480) -\address: See 24.1. (line 4618) -\addtocontents{EXT}{TEXT}: See 23.1.2. (line 4511) -\addtocounter: See 11.5. (line 2501) -\addtolength: See 12.2. (line 2544) -\addvspace: See 19.9. (line 3983) -\AE (AE): See 21.4. (line 4350) -\ae (ae): See 21.4. (line 4350) -\aleph: See 16.2. (line 2886) -\Alph: See 11.1. (line 2440) -\alph: See 11.1. (line 2437) -\Alph example: See 8.7. (line 1060) -\alpha: See 16.2. (line 2889) -\alsoname: See 23.3. (line 4555) -\amalg: See 16.2. (line 2892) -\and for \author: See 18.1. (line 3795) -\angle: See 16.2. (line 2895) -\appendix: See 6. (line 794) -\approx: See 16.2. (line 2898) -\arabic: See 11.1. (line 2443) -\arccos: See 16.3. (line 3518) -\arcsin: See 16.3. (line 3521) -\arctan: See 16.3. (line 3524) -\arg: See 16.3. (line 3527) -\arraycolsep: See 8.2. (line 929) -\arrayrulewidth: See 8.23. (line 1913) -\arraystretch: See 8.23. (line 1917) -\ast: See 16.2. (line 2901) -\asymp: See 16.2. (line 2904) -\author{NAME \and NAME2}: See 18.1. (line 3794) -\b (bar-under accent): See 21.3. (line 4310) -\backslash <1>: See 21.1. (line 4217) -\backslash: See 16.2. (line 2907) -\bar: See 16.4. (line 3631) +@{...}: See 8.2. (line 931) +\" (umlaut accent): See 21.3. (line 4455) +\#: See 21.1. (line 4241) +\$: See 21.1. (line 4241) +\%: See 21.1. (line 4241) +\&: See 21.1. (line 4241) +\' (acute accent): See 21.3. (line 4459) +\' (tabbing): See 8.21. (line 1757) +\(: See 16. (line 2871) +\): See 16. (line 2871) +\*: See 16.6. (line 3723) +\+: See 8.21. (line 1749) +\,: See 16.5. (line 3715) +\-: See 8.21. (line 1753) +\- (hyphenation): See 9.4. (line 2224) +\. (dot-over accent): See 21.3. (line 4464) +\/: See 19.6. (line 3981) +\:: See 16.5. (line 3712) +\;: See 16.5. (line 3708) +\<: See 8.21. (line 1745) +\= (macron accent): See 21.3. (line 4468) +\= (tabbing): See 8.21. (line 1739) +\> <1>: See 16.5. (line 3712) +\>: See 8.21. (line 1743) +\> (tabbing): See 8.21. (line 1742) +\@: See 19.4. (line 3960) +\@fnsymbol: See 11.4. (line 2403) +\[: See 16. (line 2871) +\\ (for \shortstack objects): See 8.18.13. (line 1672) +\\ (for array): See 8.2. (line 928) +\\ (for center): See 8.3. (line 960) +\\ (for eqnarray): See 8.8. (line 1086) +\\ (for flushright): See 8.12. (line 1233) +\\ for \author: See 18.1. (line 3824) +\\ for \title: See 18.1. (line 3838) +\\ for flushleft: See 8.11. (line 1207) +\\ for letters: See 24. (line 4828) +\\ for tabular: See 8.23. (line 1854) +\\ for verse: See 8.28. (line 2178) +\\ force line break: See 9.1. (line 2198) +\\ tabbing: See 8.21. (line 1736) +\\* (for eqnarray): See 8.8. (line 1091) +\]: See 16. (line 2871) +\^: See 21.1. (line 4251) +\^ (circumflex accent): See 21.3. (line 4472) +\_: See 21.1. (line 4241) +\` (grave accent): See 21.3. (line 4476) +\` (tabbing): See 8.21. (line 1763) +\a (tabbing): See 8.21. (line 1772) +\a' (acute accent in tabbing): See 8.21. (line 1773) +\a= (macron accent in tabbing): See 8.21. (line 1773) +\a` (grave accent in tabbing): See 8.21. (line 1773) +\AA (AA): See 21.4. (line 4545) +\aa (aa): See 21.4. (line 4545) +\acute: See 16.4. (line 3656) +\addcontentsline{EXT}{UNIT}{TEXT}: See 23.1.1. (line 4700) +\address: See 24.1. (line 4838) +\addtocontents{EXT}{TEXT}: See 23.1.2. (line 4731) +\addtocounter: See 13.5. (line 2690) +\addtolength: See 14.2. (line 2733) +\addvspace: See 19.9. (line 4012) +\AE (AE): See 21.4. (line 4549) +\ae (ae): See 21.4. (line 4549) +\aleph: See 16.2. (line 2914) +\Alph: See 13.1. (line 2629) +\alph: See 13.1. (line 2626) +\Alph example: See 8.7. (line 1075) +\alpha: See 16.2. (line 2917) +\alsoname: See 23.3. (line 4775) +\amalg: See 16.2. (line 2920) +\and for \author: See 18.1. (line 3824) +\angle: See 16.2. (line 2923) +\appendix: See 6. (line 800) +\approx: See 16.2. (line 2926) +\arabic: See 13.1. (line 2632) +\arccos: See 16.3. (line 3546) +\arcsin: See 16.3. (line 3549) +\arctan: See 16.3. (line 3552) +\arg: See 16.3. (line 3555) +\arraycolsep: See 8.2. (line 943) +\arrayrulewidth: See 8.23. (line 1928) +\arraystretch: See 8.23. (line 1932) +\ast: See 16.2. (line 2929) +\asymp: See 16.2. (line 2932) +\author{NAME \and NAME2}: See 18.1. (line 3823) +\b (bar-under accent): See 21.3. (line 4485) +\backslash <1>: See 21.1. (line 4246) +\backslash: See 16.2. (line 2935) +\bar: See 16.4. (line 3659) \baselineskip: See 4.3. (line 609) \baselinestretch: See 4.3. (line 615) -\begin: See 8. (line 871) -\beta: See 16.2. (line 2910) +\begin: See 8. (line 885) +\beta: See 16.2. (line 2938) \bf: See 4.1. (line 501) \bfseries: See 4.1. (line 450) -\bibitem: See 8.24.1. (line 2008) -\bibliography: See 8.24.4. (line 2048) -\bibliographystyle: See 8.24.4. (line 2048) -\bigcap: See 16.2. (line 2913) -\bigcirc: See 16.2. (line 2916) -\bigcup: See 16.2. (line 2919) -\bigodot: See 16.2. (line 2922) -\bigoplus: See 16.2. (line 2925) -\bigotimes: See 16.2. (line 2928) -\bigskip: See 19.10. (line 3997) -\bigskipamount: See 19.10. (line 3997) -\bigsqcup: See 16.2. (line 2937) -\bigtriangledown: See 16.2. (line 2931) -\bigtriangleup: See 16.2. (line 2934) -\biguplus: See 16.2. (line 2940) -\bigwedge: See 16.2. (line 2946) -\bmod: See 16.3. (line 3530) -\boldmath: See 16. (line 2856) -\bot: See 16.2. (line 2949) -\bottomfraction: See 8.10. (line 1153) -\bowtie: See 16.2. (line 2952) -\Box: See 16.2. (line 2955) -\breve: See 16.4. (line 3634) -\bullet: See 16.2. (line 2958) -\c (cedilla accent): See 21.3. (line 4313) +\bibitem: See 8.24.1. (line 2023) +\bibliography: See 8.24.4. (line 2063) +\bibliographystyle: See 8.24.4. (line 2063) +\bigcap: See 16.2. (line 2941) +\bigcirc: See 16.2. (line 2944) +\bigcup: See 16.2. (line 2947) +\bigodot: See 16.2. (line 2950) +\bigoplus: See 16.2. (line 2953) +\bigotimes: See 16.2. (line 2956) +\bigskip: See 19.10. (line 4026) +\bigskipamount: See 19.10. (line 4026) +\bigsqcup: See 16.2. (line 2965) +\bigtriangledown: See 16.2. (line 2959) +\bigtriangleup: See 16.2. (line 2962) +\biguplus: See 16.2. (line 2968) +\bigwedge: See 16.2. (line 2974) +\bmod: See 16.3. (line 3558) +\boldmath: See 16. (line 2884) +\bot: See 16.2. (line 2977) +\bottomfraction: See 8.10. (line 1168) +\bowtie: See 16.2. (line 2980) +\Box: See 16.2. (line 2983) +\breve: See 16.4. (line 3662) +\bullet: See 16.2. (line 2986) +\c (cedilla accent): See 21.3. (line 4489) \cal: See 4.1. (line 504) -\cap: See 16.2. (line 2961) -\caption: See 8.10. (line 1149) -\cc: See 24.2. (line 4631) -\cdot: See 16.2. (line 2964) -\cdots: See 16.6. (line 3699) -\centering: See 8.3.1. (line 953) -\chapter: See 6. (line 760) -\check: See 16.4. (line 3637) -\chi: See 16.2. (line 2967) -\circ: See 16.2. (line 2970) -\circle: See 8.18.1. (line 1480) -\cite: See 8.24.2. (line 2025) -\cleardoublepage: See 14.1. (line 2699) -\clearpage: See 14.2. (line 2707) -\cline: See 8.23.2. (line 1957) -\closing: See 24.3. (line 4641) -\clubsuit: See 16.2. (line 2973) -\columnsep: See 5.2. (line 655) -\columnseprule: See 5.2. (line 658) -\columnwidth: See 5.2. (line 662) -\cong: See 16.2. (line 2976) -\contentsline: See 23.1.1. (line 4505) -\coprod: See 16.2. (line 2979) -\copyright: See 21.2. (line 4241) -\cos: See 16.3. (line 3533) -\cosh: See 16.3. (line 3536) -\cot: See 16.3. (line 3539) -\coth: See 16.3. (line 3542) -\csc: See 16.3. (line 3545) -\cup: See 16.2. (line 2982) -\d (dot-under accent): See 21.3. (line 4316) -\dag: See 21.2. (line 4244) -\dagger: See 16.2. (line 2985) -\dashbox: See 8.18.4. (line 1533) -\dashv: See 16.2. (line 2988) -\date{TEXT}: See 18.1. (line 3800) -\day: See 11.8. (line 2520) -\dblfloatpagefraction: See 5.2. (line 674) -\dblfloatsep: See 5.2. (line 678) -\dbltextfloatsep: See 5.2. (line 683) -\dbltopfraction: See 5.2. (line 669) -\ddag: See 21.2. (line 4247) -\ddagger: See 16.2. (line 2991) -\ddot: See 16.4. (line 3640) -\ddots: See 16.6. (line 3703) -\deg: See 16.3. (line 3548) -\delta: See 16.2. (line 2997) -\Delta: See 16.2. (line 2994) -\depth: See 12.6. (line 2576) -\det: See 16.3. (line 3551) -\diamond: See 16.2. (line 3003) -\Diamond: See 16.2. (line 3000) -\diamondsuit: See 16.2. (line 3006) -\dim: See 16.3. (line 3554) -\displaystyle: See 16. (line 2861) -\div: See 16.2. (line 3009) +\cap: See 16.2. (line 2989) +\capitalacute: See 21.3. (line 4459) +\capitalbreve: See 21.3. (line 4524) +\capitalcaron: See 21.3. (line 4534) +\capitalcedilla: See 21.3. (line 4489) +\capitalcircumflex: See 21.3. (line 4472) +\capitaldieresis: See 21.3. (line 4455) +\capitaldotaccent: See 21.3. (line 4493) +\capitalgrave: See 21.3. (line 4476) +\capitalhungarumlaut: See 21.3. (line 4497) +\capitalmacron: See 21.3. (line 4468) +\capitalnewtie: See 21.3. (line 4519) +\capitalogonek: See 21.3. (line 4508) +\capitalring: See 21.3. (line 4513) +\capitaltie: See 21.3. (line 4519) +\capitaltilde: See 21.3. (line 4482) +\caption: See 8.10. (line 1164) +\cc: See 24.2. (line 4851) +\cdot: See 16.2. (line 2992) +\cdots: See 16.6. (line 3727) +\centering: See 8.3.1. (line 967) +\chapter: See 6. (line 766) +\check: See 16.4. (line 3665) +\chi: See 16.2. (line 2995) +\circ: See 16.2. (line 2998) +\circle: See 8.18.1. (line 1495) +\cite: See 8.24.2. (line 2040) +\cleardoublepage: See 10.1. (line 2294) +\clearpage: See 10.2. (line 2302) +\cline: See 8.23.2. (line 1972) +\closing: See 24.3. (line 4861) +\clubsuit: See 16.2. (line 3001) +\columnsep: See 5.2. (line 661) +\columnseprule: See 5.2. (line 664) +\columnwidth: See 5.2. (line 668) +\cong: See 16.2. (line 3004) +\contentsline: See 23.1.1. (line 4725) +\coprod: See 16.2. (line 3007) +\copyright: See 21.2. (line 4271) +\cos: See 16.3. (line 3561) +\cosh: See 16.3. (line 3564) +\cot: See 16.3. (line 3567) +\coth: See 16.3. (line 3570) +\csc: See 16.3. (line 3573) +\cup: See 16.2. (line 3010) +\d (dot-under accent): See 21.3. (line 4493) +\dag: See 21.2. (line 4275) +\dagger: See 16.2. (line 3013) +\dashbox: See 8.18.4. (line 1548) +\dashv: See 16.2. (line 3016) +\date{TEXT}: See 18.1. (line 3829) +\day: See 13.8. (line 2709) +\dblfloatpagefraction: See 5.2. (line 680) +\dblfloatsep: See 5.2. (line 684) +\dbltextfloatsep: See 5.2. (line 689) +\dbltopfraction: See 5.2. (line 675) +\ddag: See 21.2. (line 4278) +\ddagger: See 16.2. (line 3019) +\ddot: See 16.4. (line 3668) +\ddots: See 16.6. (line 3731) +\deg: See 16.3. (line 3576) +\delta: See 16.2. (line 3025) +\Delta: See 16.2. (line 3022) +\depth: See 14.6. (line 2765) +\det: See 16.3. (line 3579) +\DH (AE): See 21.4. (line 4553) +\dh (ae): See 21.4. (line 4553) +\diamond: See 16.2. (line 3031) +\Diamond: See 16.2. (line 3028) +\diamondsuit: See 16.2. (line 3034) +\dim: See 16.3. (line 3582) +\displaystyle: See 16. (line 2889) +\div: See 16.2. (line 3037) +\DJ: See 21.4. (line 4557) +\dj: See 21.4. (line 4557) \documentclass: See 3. (line 319) -\dot: See 16.4. (line 3643) -\doteq: See 16.2. (line 3012) -\dotfill: See 19.8. (line 3977) -\doublerulesep: See 8.23. (line 1921) -\Downarrow: See 16.2. (line 3018) -\downarrow: See 16.2. (line 3015) -\ell: See 16.2. (line 3021) +\dot: See 16.4. (line 3671) +\doteq: See 16.2. (line 3040) +\dotfill: See 19.8. (line 4006) +\dots: See 21.2. (line 4292) +\doublerulesep: See 8.23. (line 1936) +\Downarrow: See 16.2. (line 3046) +\downarrow: See 16.2. (line 3043) +\ell: See 16.2. (line 3049) \em: See 4.1. (line 507) \emph: See 4.1. (line 444) -\emptyset: See 16.2. (line 3024) -\encl: See 24.4. (line 4651) -\end: See 8. (line 871) -\enlargethispage: See 14.4. (line 2719) -\enumi: See 8.7. (line 1050) -\enumii: See 8.7. (line 1050) -\enumiii: See 8.7. (line 1050) -\enumiv: See 8.7. (line 1050) -\epsilon: See 16.2. (line 3027) -\equiv: See 16.2. (line 3030) -\eta: See 16.2. (line 3033) +\emptyset: See 16.2. (line 3052) +\encl: See 24.4. (line 4871) +\end: See 8. (line 885) +\enlargethispage: See 10.4. (line 2314) +\enumi: See 8.7. (line 1065) +\enumii: See 8.7. (line 1065) +\enumiii: See 8.7. (line 1065) +\enumiv: See 8.7. (line 1065) +\epsilon: See 16.2. (line 3055) +\equiv: See 16.2. (line 3058) +\eta: See 16.2. (line 3061) \evensidemargin: See 3.1. (line 385) -\exists: See 16.2. (line 3036) -\exp: See 16.3. (line 3557) -\fbox: See 20.2. (line 4048) -\fboxrule <1>: See 20.2. (line 4058) -\fboxrule: See 8.18.3. (line 1526) -\fboxsep <1>: See 20.2. (line 4058) -\fboxsep: See 8.18.3. (line 1526) -\fill: See 19.2. (line 3913) -\flat: See 16.2. (line 3039) -\floatpagefraction: See 8.10. (line 1156) -\floatsep: See 8.10. (line 1160) -\flushbottom: See 5.3. (line 691) -\fnsymbol: See 11.1. (line 2452) +\exists: See 16.2. (line 3064) +\exp: See 16.3. (line 3585) +\fbox: See 20.2. (line 4077) +\fboxrule <1>: See 20.2. (line 4087) +\fboxrule: See 8.18.3. (line 1541) +\fboxsep <1>: See 20.2. (line 4087) +\fboxsep: See 8.18.3. (line 1541) +\fill: See 19.2. (line 3942) +\flat: See 16.2. (line 3067) +\floatpagefraction: See 8.10. (line 1171) +\floatsep: See 8.10. (line 1175) +\flushbottom: See 5.3. (line 697) +\fnsymbol: See 13.1. (line 2641) +\fnsymbol, and footnotes: See 11.4. (line 2403) \fontencoding: See 4.3. (line 563) \fontfamily: See 4.3. (line 566) \fontseries: See 4.3. (line 577) \fontshape: See 4.3. (line 592) \fontsize: See 4.3. (line 609) -\footnote: See 9.1. (line 2178) -\footnotemark: See 9.2. (line 2193) -\footnoterule: See 9.4. (line 2222) -\footnotesep: See 9.4. (line 2228) +\footnote: See 11.1. (line 2354) +\footnotemark: See 11.2. (line 2369) +\footnoterule: See 11.5. (line 2411) +\footnotesep: See 11.5. (line 2417) \footnotesize: See 4.2. (line 537) -\footnotetext: See 9.3. (line 2208) -\footskip: See 5.5. (line 716) -\forall: See 16.2. (line 3042) -\frac: See 16.6. (line 3707) -\frac{num}{den}: See 16.6. (line 3706) -\frame: See 8.18.5. (line 1546) -\framebox <1>: See 20.2. (line 4048) -\framebox: See 8.18.3. (line 1518) -\frown: See 16.2. (line 3045) -\fussy: See 13.5. (line 2641) -\gamma: See 16.2. (line 3051) -\Gamma: See 16.2. (line 3048) -\gcd: See 16.3. (line 3560) -\ge: See 16.2. (line 3054) -\geq: See 16.2. (line 3057) -\gets: See 16.2. (line 3060) -\gg: See 16.2. (line 3063) -\glossary: See 23.2. (line 4528) -\glossaryentry: See 23.2. (line 4531) -\grave: See 16.4. (line 3646) -\H (Hungarian umlaut accent): See 21.3. (line 4319) -\hat: See 16.4. (line 3649) -\hbar: See 16.2. (line 3066) -\headheight: See 5.5. (line 706) -\headsep: See 5.5. (line 711) -\heartsuit: See 16.2. (line 3069) -\height: See 12.6. (line 2574) -\hfill: See 19.2. (line 3910) -\hline: See 8.23.3. (line 1968) -\hom: See 16.3. (line 3563) -\hookleftarrow: See 16.2. (line 3072) -\hookrightarrow: See 16.2. (line 3075) -\hrulefill: See 19.7. (line 3970) -\hspace: See 19.1. (line 3894) +\footnotetext: See 11.3. (line 2384) +\footskip: See 5.5. (line 722) +\forall: See 16.2. (line 3070) +\frac: See 16.6. (line 3735) +\frac{num}{den}: See 16.6. (line 3734) +\frame: See 8.18.5. (line 1561) +\framebox <1>: See 20.2. (line 4077) +\framebox: See 8.18.3. (line 1533) +\frown: See 16.2. (line 3073) +\fussy: See 9.5. (line 2236) +\gamma: See 16.2. (line 3079) +\Gamma: See 16.2. (line 3076) +\gcd: See 16.3. (line 3588) +\ge: See 16.2. (line 3082) +\geq: See 16.2. (line 3085) +\gets: See 16.2. (line 3088) +\gg: See 16.2. (line 3091) +\glossary: See 23.2. (line 4748) +\glossaryentry: See 23.2. (line 4751) +\grave: See 16.4. (line 3674) +\guillemotleft (<<): See 21.2. (line 4284) +\guillemotright (>>): See 21.2. (line 4285) +\guilsinglleft (<): See 21.2. (line 4286) +\guilsinglright (>): See 21.2. (line 4287) +\H (Hungarian umlaut accent): See 21.3. (line 4497) +\hat: See 16.4. (line 3677) +\hbar: See 16.2. (line 3094) +\headheight: See 5.5. (line 712) +\headsep: See 5.5. (line 717) +\heartsuit: See 16.2. (line 3097) +\height: See 14.6. (line 2763) +\hfill: See 19.2. (line 3939) +\hline: See 8.23.3. (line 1983) +\hom: See 16.3. (line 3591) +\hookleftarrow: See 16.2. (line 3100) +\hookrightarrow: See 16.2. (line 3103) +\hrulefill: See 19.7. (line 3999) +\hspace: See 19.1. (line 3923) \Huge: See 4.2. (line 537) \huge: See 4.2. (line 537) -\hyphenation: See 13.7. (line 2659) -\i (dotless i): See 21.3. (line 4323) -\iff: See 16.2. (line 3078) -\Im: See 16.2. (line 3081) -\imath: See 16.4. (line 3652) -\in: See 16.2. (line 3084) -\include: See 22.1. (line 4410) -\includeonly: See 22.2. (line 4428) -\indent: See 15.1. (line 2760) -\index: See 23.3. (line 4544) -\indexentry: See 23.3. (line 4547) -\inf: See 16.3. (line 3566) -\infty: See 16.2. (line 3087) -\input: See 22.3. (line 4442) -\int: See 16.2. (line 3090) -\intextsep: See 8.10. (line 1164) -\iota: See 16.2. (line 3093) +\hyphenation: See 9.7. (line 2254) +\i (dotless i): See 21.3. (line 4501) +\iff: See 16.2. (line 3106) +\IJ (IJ): See 21.4. (line 4561) +\ij (ij): See 21.4. (line 4561) +\Im: See 16.2. (line 3109) +\imath: See 16.4. (line 3680) +\in: See 16.2. (line 3112) +\include: See 22.1. (line 4630) +\includeonly: See 22.2. (line 4648) +\indent: See 15.1. (line 2788) +\index: See 23.3. (line 4764) +\indexentry: See 23.3. (line 4767) +\inf: See 16.3. (line 3594) +\infty: See 16.2. (line 3115) +\input: See 22.3. (line 4662) +\int: See 16.2. (line 3118) +\intextsep: See 8.10. (line 1179) +\iota: See 16.2. (line 3121) \it: See 4.1. (line 510) -\item <1>: See 8.13. (line 1238) -\item <2>: See 8.7. (line 1037) -\item: See 8.4. (line 984) -\itemindent: See 8.13. (line 1284) -\itemsep: See 8.13. (line 1307) +\item <1>: See 8.13. (line 1253) +\item <2>: See 8.7. (line 1052) +\item: See 8.4. (line 998) +\itemindent: See 8.13. (line 1299) +\itemsep: See 8.13. (line 1322) \itshape: See 4.1. (line 441) -\j (dotless j): See 21.3. (line 4326) -\jmath: See 16.4. (line 3655) -\Join: See 16.2. (line 3096) -\kappa: See 16.2. (line 3099) -\ker: See 16.3. (line 3569) -\kill: See 8.21. (line 1762) -\L (/L): See 21.4. (line 4354) -\l (/l): See 21.4. (line 4354) -\label: See 7.1. (line 813) -\labelenumi: See 8.7. (line 1054) -\labelenumii: See 8.7. (line 1054) -\labelenumiii: See 8.7. (line 1054) -\labelenumiv: See 8.7. (line 1054) -\labelitemi: See 8.13. (line 1264) -\labelitemii: See 8.13. (line 1264) -\labelitemiii: See 8.13. (line 1264) -\labelitemiv: See 8.13. (line 1264) -\labelsep: See 8.13. (line 1287) -\labelwidth: See 8.13. (line 1290) -\lambda: See 16.2. (line 3105) -\Lambda: See 16.2. (line 3102) -\land: See 16.2. (line 3108) -\langle: See 16.2. (line 3111) +\j (dotless j): See 21.3. (line 4504) +\jmath: See 16.4. (line 3683) +\Join: See 16.2. (line 3124) +\k (ogonek): See 21.3. (line 4508) +\kappa: See 16.2. (line 3127) +\ker: See 16.3. (line 3597) +\kill: See 8.21. (line 1777) +\L (/L): See 21.4. (line 4565) +\l (/l): See 21.4. (line 4565) +\label: See 7.1. (line 827) +\labelenumi: See 8.7. (line 1069) +\labelenumii: See 8.7. (line 1069) +\labelenumiii: See 8.7. (line 1069) +\labelenumiv: See 8.7. (line 1069) +\labelitemi: See 8.13. (line 1279) +\labelitemii: See 8.13. (line 1279) +\labelitemiii: See 8.13. (line 1279) +\labelitemiv: See 8.13. (line 1279) +\labelsep: See 8.13. (line 1302) +\labelwidth: See 8.13. (line 1305) +\lambda: See 16.2. (line 3133) +\Lambda: See 16.2. (line 3130) +\land: See 16.2. (line 3136) +\langle: See 16.2. (line 3139) \LARGE: See 4.2. (line 537) \Large: See 4.2. (line 537) \large: See 4.2. (line 537) -\LaTeX: See 21.2. (line 4250) -\lbrace: See 16.2. (line 3114) -\lbrack: See 16.2. (line 3117) -\lceil: See 16.2. (line 3120) -\ldots: See 21.2. (line 4253) -\le: See 16.2. (line 3123) -\leadsto: See 16.2. (line 3126) -\left DELIM1 ... \right DELIM2: See 16.6. (line 3709) -\leftarrow: See 16.2. (line 3131) -\Leftarrow: See 16.2. (line 3128) -\lefteqn: See 8.8. (line 1084) -\leftharpoondown: See 16.2. (line 3134) -\leftharpoonup: See 16.2. (line 3137) -\leftmargin: See 8.13. (line 1271) -\leftmargini: See 8.13. (line 1271) -\leftmarginii: See 8.13. (line 1271) -\leftmarginiii: See 8.13. (line 1271) -\leftmarginiv: See 8.13. (line 1271) -\leftmarginv: See 8.13. (line 1271) -\leftmarginvi: See 8.13. (line 1271) -\leftrightarrow: See 16.2. (line 3143) -\Leftrightarrow: See 16.2. (line 3140) -\leq: See 16.2. (line 3146) -\lfloor: See 16.2. (line 3149) -\lg: See 16.3. (line 3572) -\lhd: See 16.2. (line 3152) -\lim: See 16.3. (line 3575) -\liminf: See 16.3. (line 3578) -\limsup: See 16.3. (line 3581) -\line: See 8.18.6. (line 1557) -\linebreak: See 13.8. (line 2675) -\linethickness: See 8.18.7. (line 1572) -\linewidth: See 5.5. (line 721) -\listoffigures: See 23.1. (line 4470) -\listoftables: See 23.1. (line 4470) -\listparindent: See 8.13. (line 1293) -\ll: See 16.2. (line 3155) -\ln: See 16.3. (line 3584) -\lnot: See 16.2. (line 3158) -\location: See 24.5. (line 4660) -\log: See 16.3. (line 3587) -\longleftarrow: See 16.2. (line 3161) -\longleftrightarrow: See 16.2. (line 3164) -\longmapsto: See 16.2. (line 3167) -\longrightarrow: See 16.2. (line 3170) -\lor: See 16.2. (line 3173) -\lq: See 21.2. (line 4257) -\makebox: See 20.4. (line 4079) -\makebox (picture): See 8.18.2. (line 1491) -\makeglossary: See 23.2. (line 4526) -\makeindex: See 23.3. (line 4541) -\makelabels: See 24.6. (line 4668) -\maketitle: See 18.1. (line 3789) -\mapsto: See 16.2. (line 3176) -\marginpar: See 15.4. (line 2784) -\marginparpush: See 15.4. (line 2813) -\marginparsep: See 15.4. (line 2817) -\marginparwidth: See 15.4. (line 2821) -\markboth{LEFT}{RIGHT}: See 18.3. (line 3864) -\markright{RIGHT}: See 18.3. (line 3871) +\LaTeX: See 21.2. (line 4281) +\lbrace: See 16.2. (line 3142) +\lbrack: See 16.2. (line 3145) +\lceil: See 16.2. (line 3148) +\ldots: See 21.2. (line 4291) +\le: See 16.2. (line 3151) +\leadsto: See 16.2. (line 3154) +\left DELIM1 ... \right DELIM2: See 16.6. (line 3737) +\leftarrow: See 16.2. (line 3159) +\Leftarrow: See 16.2. (line 3156) +\lefteqn: See 8.8. (line 1099) +\leftharpoondown: See 16.2. (line 3162) +\leftharpoonup: See 16.2. (line 3165) +\leftmargin: See 8.13. (line 1286) +\leftmargini: See 8.13. (line 1286) +\leftmarginii: See 8.13. (line 1286) +\leftmarginiii: See 8.13. (line 1286) +\leftmarginiv: See 8.13. (line 1286) +\leftmarginv: See 8.13. (line 1286) +\leftmarginvi: See 8.13. (line 1286) +\leftrightarrow: See 16.2. (line 3171) +\Leftrightarrow: See 16.2. (line 3168) +\leq: See 16.2. (line 3174) +\lfloor: See 16.2. (line 3177) +\lg: See 16.3. (line 3600) +\lhd: See 16.2. (line 3180) +\lim: See 16.3. (line 3603) +\liminf: See 16.3. (line 3606) +\limsup: See 16.3. (line 3609) +\line: See 8.18.6. (line 1572) +\linebreak: See 9.8. (line 2270) +\linespread: See 4.3. (line 622) +\linethickness: See 8.18.7. (line 1587) +\linewidth: See 5.5. (line 727) +\listoffigures: See 23.1. (line 4690) +\listoftables: See 23.1. (line 4690) +\listparindent: See 8.13. (line 1308) +\ll: See 16.2. (line 3183) +\ln: See 16.3. (line 3612) +\lnot: See 16.2. (line 3186) +\location: See 24.5. (line 4880) +\log: See 16.3. (line 3615) +\longleftarrow: See 16.2. (line 3189) +\longleftrightarrow: See 16.2. (line 3192) +\longmapsto: See 16.2. (line 3195) +\longrightarrow: See 16.2. (line 3198) +\lor: See 16.2. (line 3201) +\lq: See 21.2. (line 4297) +\makebox: See 20.4. (line 4108) +\makebox (picture): See 8.18.2. (line 1506) +\makeglossary: See 23.2. (line 4746) +\makeindex: See 23.3. (line 4761) +\makelabels: See 24.6. (line 4888) +\maketitle: See 18.1. (line 3818) +\mapsto: See 16.2. (line 3204) +\marginpar: See 15.4. (line 2812) +\marginparpush: See 15.4. (line 2841) +\marginparsep: See 15.4. (line 2845) +\marginparwidth: See 15.4. (line 2849) +\markboth{LEFT}{RIGHT}: See 18.3. (line 3893) +\markright{RIGHT}: See 18.3. (line 3900) \mathbf: See 4.1. (line 474) \mathcal: See 4.1. (line 490) \mathnormal: See 4.1. (line 487) @@ -5636,362 +5973,419 @@ $: See 16. (line 2851) \mathsf: See 4.1. (line 477) \mathtt: See 4.1. (line 480) \mathversion: See 4.1. (line 492) -\max: See 16.3. (line 3590) -\mbox: See 20.1. (line 4041) +\max: See 16.3. (line 3618) +\mbox: See 20.1. (line 4070) \mdseries: See 4.1. (line 447) -\medskip: See 19.10. (line 4001) -\medskipamount: See 19.10. (line 4001) -\mho: See 16.2. (line 3179) -\mid: See 16.2. (line 3181) -\min: See 16.3. (line 3593) -\models: See 16.2. (line 3184) -\month: See 11.8. (line 2520) -\mp: See 16.2. (line 3187) -\mu: See 16.2. (line 3190) -\multicolumn: See 8.23.1. (line 1934) -\multiput: See 8.18.10. (line 1596) -\nabla: See 16.2. (line 3193) -\name: See 24.7. (line 4676) -\natural: See 16.2. (line 3196) -\ne: See 16.2. (line 3199) -\nearrow: See 16.2. (line 3202) -\neg: See 16.2. (line 3205) -\neq: See 16.2. (line 3208) -\newcommand: See 10.1. (line 2244) -\newcounter: See 10.2. (line 2277) -\newenvironment: See 10.5. (line 2317) -\newfont: See 10.7. (line 2382) -\newlength: See 10.3. (line 2292) -\NEWLINE: See 19.3. (line 3920) -\newline: See 13.3. (line 2622) -\newpage: See 14.3. (line 2713) -\newsavebox: See 10.4. (line 2307) -\newtheorem: See 10.6. (line 2353) -\ni: See 16.2. (line 3211) -\nocite: See 8.24.3. (line 2040) -\nofiles: See 23.1. (line 4474) -\noindent: See 15.2. (line 2771) -\nolinebreak: See 13.8. (line 2675) -\nonumber: See 8.8. (line 1079) -\nopagebreak: See 14.5. (line 2734) +\medskip: See 19.10. (line 4030) +\medskipamount: See 19.10. (line 4030) +\mho: See 16.2. (line 3207) +\mid: See 16.2. (line 3209) +\min: See 16.3. (line 3621) +\models: See 16.2. (line 3212) +\month: See 13.8. (line 2709) +\mp: See 16.2. (line 3215) +\mu: See 16.2. (line 3218) +\multicolumn: See 8.23.1. (line 1949) +\multiput: See 8.18.10. (line 1611) +\nabla: See 16.2. (line 3221) +\name: See 24.7. (line 4896) +\natural: See 16.2. (line 3224) +\ne: See 16.2. (line 3227) +\nearrow: See 16.2. (line 3230) +\neg: See 16.2. (line 3233) +\neq: See 16.2. (line 3236) +\newcommand: See 12.1. (line 2433) +\newcounter: See 12.2. (line 2466) +\newenvironment: See 12.5. (line 2506) +\newfont: See 12.7. (line 2571) +\newlength: See 12.3. (line 2481) +\NEWLINE: See 19.3. (line 3949) +\newline: See 9.3. (line 2217) +\newpage: See 10.3. (line 2308) +\newsavebox: See 12.4. (line 2496) +\newtheorem: See 12.6. (line 2542) +\newtie: See 21.3. (line 4519) +\NG: See 21.4. (line 4569) +\ng: See 21.4. (line 4569) +\ni: See 16.2. (line 3239) +\nocite: See 8.24.3. (line 2055) +\nofiles: See 23.1. (line 4694) +\noindent: See 15.2. (line 2799) +\nolinebreak: See 9.8. (line 2270) +\nonumber: See 8.8. (line 1094) +\nopagebreak: See 10.5. (line 2329) \normalfont: See 4.1. (line 468) -\normalmarginpar: See 15.4. (line 2801) +\normalmarginpar: See 15.4. (line 2829) \normalsize: See 4.2. (line 537) -\not: See 16.2. (line 3214) -\notin: See 16.2. (line 3217) -\nu: See 16.2. (line 3220) -\nwarrow: See 16.2. (line 3223) -\O (/O): See 21.4. (line 4358) -\o (/o): See 21.4. (line 4358) -\obeycr: See 13.2. (line 2613) +\not: See 16.2. (line 3242) +\notin: See 16.2. (line 3245) +\nu: See 16.2. (line 3248) +\nwarrow: See 16.2. (line 3251) +\O (/O): See 21.4. (line 4573) +\o (/o): See 21.4. (line 4573) +\obeycr: See 9.2. (line 2208) \oddsidemargin: See 3.1. (line 385) -\odot: See 16.2. (line 3226) -\OE (OE): See 21.4. (line 4362) -\oe (oe): See 21.4. (line 4362) -\oint: See 16.2. (line 3229) -\omega: See 16.2. (line 3235) -\Omega: See 16.2. (line 3232) -\ominus: See 16.2. (line 3238) -\onecolumn: See 5.1. (line 639) -\opening: See 24.8. (line 4684) -\oplus: See 16.2. (line 3241) -\oslash: See 16.2. (line 3244) -\otimes: See 16.2. (line 3247) -\oval: See 8.18.11. (line 1606) -\overbrace{TEXT}: See 16.6. (line 3714) -\overline{TEXT}: See 16.6. (line 3718) -\owns: See 16.2. (line 3250) -\P: See 21.2. (line 4260) -\pagebreak: See 14.5. (line 2734) -\pagenumbering: See 18.2. (line 3816) -\pageref: See 7.2. (line 849) -\pagestyle: See 18.3. (line 3840) -\paragraph: See 6. (line 769) -\parallel: See 16.2. (line 3253) -\parbox: See 20.5. (line 4107) -\parindent <1>: See 15.1. (line 2760) -\parindent: See 8.17. (line 1395) -\parsep: See 8.13. (line 1312) -\parskip: See 15.3. (line 2778) -\parskip example: See 8.13. (line 1329) -\part: See 6. (line 758) -\partial: See 16.2. (line 3256) -\partopsep: See 8.13. (line 1322) -\perp: See 16.2. (line 3259) -\phi: See 16.2. (line 3262) -\pi: See 16.2. (line 3268) -\Pi: See 16.2. (line 3265) -\pm: See 16.2. (line 3271) -\pmod: See 16.3. (line 3596) -\poptabs: See 8.21. (line 1768) -\pounds: See 21.2. (line 4263) -\Pr: See 16.3. (line 3599) -\prec: See 16.2. (line 3274) -\preceq: See 16.2. (line 3277) -\prime: See 16.2. (line 3280) -\prod: See 16.2. (line 3283) -\propto: See 16.2. (line 3286) -\protect: See 10.8. (line 2396) -\ps: See 24.9. (line 4697) -\psi: See 16.2. (line 3292) -\Psi: See 16.2. (line 3289) -\pushtabs: See 8.21. (line 1771) -\put: See 8.18.12. (line 1633) -\raggedbottom: See 5.4. (line 700) -\raggedleft: See 8.12.1. (line 1225) -\raggedright: See 8.11.1. (line 1199) -\raisebox: See 20.6. (line 4151) -\rangle: See 16.2. (line 3295) -\rbrace: See 16.2. (line 3298) -\rbrack: See 16.2. (line 3301) -\rceil: See 16.2. (line 3304) -\Re: See 16.2. (line 3307) -\ref: See 7.3. (line 859) -\refstepcounter: See 11.6. (line 2507) -\renewenvironment: See 10.5. (line 2317) -\restorecr: See 13.2. (line 2613) -\reversemarginpar: See 15.4. (line 2801) -\rfloor: See 16.2. (line 3310) -\rhd: See 16.2. (line 3313) -\rho: See 16.2. (line 3316) -\right: See 16.6. (line 3710) -\rightarrow: See 16.2. (line 3322) -\Rightarrow: See 16.2. (line 3319) -\rightharpoondown: See 16.2. (line 3325) -\rightharpoonup: See 16.2. (line 3328) -\rightleftharpoons: See 16.2. (line 3331) -\rightmargin: See 8.13. (line 1297) +\odot: See 16.2. (line 3254) +\OE (OE): See 21.4. (line 4577) +\oe (oe): See 21.4. (line 4577) +\oint: See 16.2. (line 3257) +\omega: See 16.2. (line 3263) +\Omega: See 16.2. (line 3260) +\ominus: See 16.2. (line 3266) +\onecolumn: See 5.1. (line 645) +\opening: See 24.8. (line 4904) +\oplus: See 16.2. (line 3269) +\oslash: See 16.2. (line 3272) +\otimes: See 16.2. (line 3275) +\oval: See 8.18.11. (line 1621) +\overbrace{TEXT}: See 16.6. (line 3742) +\overline{TEXT}: See 16.6. (line 3746) +\owns: See 16.2. (line 3278) +\P: See 21.2. (line 4300) +\pagebreak: See 10.5. (line 2329) +\pagenumbering: See 18.2. (line 3845) +\pageref: See 7.2. (line 863) +\pagestyle: See 18.3. (line 3869) +\paragraph: See 6. (line 775) +\parallel: See 16.2. (line 3281) +\parbox: See 20.5. (line 4136) +\parindent <1>: See 15.1. (line 2788) +\parindent: See 8.17. (line 1410) +\parsep: See 8.13. (line 1327) +\parskip: See 15.3. (line 2806) +\parskip example: See 8.13. (line 1344) +\part: See 6. (line 764) +\partial: See 16.2. (line 3284) +\partopsep: See 8.13. (line 1337) +\perp: See 16.2. (line 3287) +\phi: See 16.2. (line 3290) +\pi: See 16.2. (line 3296) +\Pi: See 16.2. (line 3293) +\pm: See 16.2. (line 3299) +\pmod: See 16.3. (line 3624) +\poptabs: See 8.21. (line 1783) +\pounds: See 21.2. (line 4304) +\Pr: See 16.3. (line 3627) +\prec: See 16.2. (line 3302) +\preceq: See 16.2. (line 3305) +\prime: See 16.2. (line 3308) +\prod: See 16.2. (line 3311) +\propto: See 16.2. (line 3314) +\protect: See 12.8. (line 2585) +\ps: See 24.9. (line 4917) +\psi: See 16.2. (line 3320) +\Psi: See 16.2. (line 3317) +\pushtabs: See 8.21. (line 1786) +\put: See 8.18.12. (line 1648) +\quotedblbase ("): See 21.2. (line 4308) +\quotesinglbase (,): See 21.2. (line 4309) +\r (ring accent): See 21.3. (line 4513) +\raggedbottom: See 5.4. (line 706) +\raggedleft: See 8.12.1. (line 1240) +\raggedright: See 8.11.1. (line 1214) +\raisebox: See 20.6. (line 4180) +\rangle: See 16.2. (line 3323) +\rbrace: See 16.2. (line 3326) +\rbrack: See 16.2. (line 3329) +\rceil: See 16.2. (line 3332) +\Re: See 16.2. (line 3335) +\ref: See 7.3. (line 873) +\refstepcounter: See 13.6. (line 2696) +\renewenvironment: See 12.5. (line 2506) +\restorecr: See 9.2. (line 2208) +\reversemarginpar: See 15.4. (line 2829) +\rfloor: See 16.2. (line 3338) +\rhd: See 16.2. (line 3341) +\rho: See 16.2. (line 3344) +\right: See 16.6. (line 3738) +\rightarrow: See 16.2. (line 3350) +\Rightarrow: See 16.2. (line 3347) +\rightharpoondown: See 16.2. (line 3353) +\rightharpoonup: See 16.2. (line 3356) +\rightleftharpoons: See 16.2. (line 3359) +\rightmargin: See 8.13. (line 1312) \rm: See 4.1. (line 513) \rmfamily: See 4.1. (line 438) -\roman: See 11.1. (line 2446) -\rq: See 21.2. (line 4266) -\rule: See 21.5. (line 4371) -\S: See 21.2. (line 4269) -\savebox: See 20.7. (line 4167) -\sbox: See 20.8. (line 4179) +\roman: See 13.1. (line 2635) +\rq: See 21.2. (line 4312) +\rule: See 21.5. (line 4591) +\S: See 21.2. (line 4315) +\savebox: See 20.7. (line 4196) +\sbox: See 20.8. (line 4208) \sc: See 4.1. (line 516) \scriptsize: See 4.2. (line 537) \scshape: See 4.1. (line 462) -\searrow: See 16.2. (line 3334) -\sec: See 16.3. (line 3602) -\section: See 6. (line 763) -\seename: See 23.3. (line 4555) -\selectfont: See 4.3. (line 623) -\setcounter: See 11.4. (line 2491) -\setlength: See 12.1. (line 2537) -\setminus: See 16.2. (line 3337) -\settodepth: See 12.3. (line 2550) -\settoheight: See 12.4. (line 2558) -\settowidth: See 12.5. (line 2566) +\searrow: See 16.2. (line 3362) +\sec: See 16.3. (line 3630) +\section: See 6. (line 769) +\seename: See 23.3. (line 4775) +\selectfont: See 4.3. (line 628) +\setcounter: See 13.4. (line 2680) +\setlength: See 14.1. (line 2726) +\setminus: See 16.2. (line 3365) +\settodepth: See 14.3. (line 2739) +\settoheight: See 14.4. (line 2747) +\settowidth: See 14.5. (line 2755) \sf: See 4.1. (line 519) \sffamily: See 4.1. (line 459) -\sharp: See 16.2. (line 3340) -\shortstack: See 8.18.13. (line 1641) -\sigma: See 16.2. (line 3346) -\Sigma: See 16.2. (line 3343) -\signature: See 24.10. (line 4703) -\sim: See 16.2. (line 3349) -\simeq: See 16.2. (line 3352) -\sin: See 16.3. (line 3605) -\sinh: See 16.3. (line 3608) +\sharp: See 16.2. (line 3368) +\shortstack: See 8.18.13. (line 1656) +\sigma: See 16.2. (line 3374) +\Sigma: See 16.2. (line 3371) +\signature: See 24.10. (line 4923) +\sim: See 16.2. (line 3377) +\simeq: See 16.2. (line 3380) +\sin: See 16.3. (line 3633) +\sinh: See 16.3. (line 3636) \sl: See 4.1. (line 522) \slshape: See 4.1. (line 456) \small: See 4.2. (line 537) -\smallint: See 16.2. (line 3355) -\smallskip: See 19.10. (line 4005) -\smallskipamount: See 19.10. (line 4005) -\smile: See 16.2. (line 3358) -\SPACE: See 19.3. (line 3920) -\spadesuit: See 16.2. (line 3361) -\sqcap: See 16.2. (line 3364) -\sqcup: See 16.2. (line 3367) -\sqrt[ROOT]{arg}: See 16.6. (line 3721) -\sqsubset: See 16.2. (line 3370) -\sqsubseteq: See 16.2. (line 3373) -\sqsupset: See 16.2. (line 3376) -\sqsupseteq: See 16.2. (line 3379) -\ss (ss): See 21.4. (line 4365) -\stackrel{TEXT}{RELATION}: See 16.6. (line 3727) -\star: See 16.2. (line 3382) -\startbreaks: See 24.11. (line 4709) -\stepcounter: See 11.7. (line 2514) -\stop: See 26. (line 4773) -\stopbreaks: See 24.12. (line 4716) -\subparagraph: See 6. (line 771) -\subsection: See 6. (line 765) -\subset: See 16.2. (line 3385) -\subseteq: See 16.2. (line 3388) -\subsubsection: See 6. (line 767) -\succ: See 16.2. (line 3391) -\succeq: See 16.2. (line 3394) -\sum: See 16.2. (line 3397) -\sup: See 16.3. (line 3611) -\supset: See 16.2. (line 3400) -\supseteq: See 16.2. (line 3403) -\surd: See 16.2. (line 3406) -\swarrow: See 16.2. (line 3409) -\symbol: See 21.1. (line 4226) -\t (tie-after accent): See 21.3. (line 4329) -\TAB: See 19.3. (line 3920) -\tabbingsep: See 8.21. (line 1776) -\tabcolsep: See 8.23. (line 1925) -\tableofcontents: See 23.1. (line 4460) -\tan: See 16.3. (line 3614) -\tanh: See 16.3. (line 3617) -\tau: See 16.2. (line 3412) -\telephone: See 24.13. (line 4723) -\TeX: See 21.2. (line 4272) +\smallint: See 16.2. (line 3383) +\smallskip: See 19.10. (line 4034) +\smallskipamount: See 19.10. (line 4034) +\smile: See 16.2. (line 3386) +\SPACE: See 19.3. (line 3949) +\spadesuit: See 16.2. (line 3389) +\sqcap: See 16.2. (line 3392) +\sqcup: See 16.2. (line 3395) +\sqrt[ROOT]{arg}: See 16.6. (line 3749) +\sqsubset: See 16.2. (line 3398) +\sqsubseteq: See 16.2. (line 3401) +\sqsupset: See 16.2. (line 3404) +\sqsupseteq: See 16.2. (line 3407) +\SS (SS): See 21.4. (line 4581) +\ss (ss): See 21.4. (line 4581) +\stackrel{TEXT}{RELATION}: See 16.6. (line 3755) +\star: See 16.2. (line 3410) +\startbreaks: See 24.11. (line 4929) +\stepcounter: See 13.7. (line 2703) +\stop: See 26. (line 4993) +\stopbreaks: See 24.12. (line 4936) +\subparagraph: See 6. (line 777) +\subsection: See 6. (line 771) +\subset: See 16.2. (line 3413) +\subseteq: See 16.2. (line 3416) +\subsubsection: See 6. (line 773) +\succ: See 16.2. (line 3419) +\succeq: See 16.2. (line 3422) +\sum: See 16.2. (line 3425) +\sup: See 16.3. (line 3639) +\supset: See 16.2. (line 3428) +\supseteq: See 16.2. (line 3431) +\surd: See 16.2. (line 3434) +\swarrow: See 16.2. (line 3437) +\symbol: See 21.1. (line 4255) +\t (tie-after accent): See 21.3. (line 4519) +\TAB: See 19.3. (line 3949) +\tabbingsep: See 8.21. (line 1791) +\tabcolsep: See 8.23. (line 1940) +\tableofcontents: See 23.1. (line 4680) +\tan: See 16.3. (line 3642) +\tanh: See 16.3. (line 3645) +\tau: See 16.2. (line 3440) +\telephone: See 24.13. (line 4943) +\TeX: See 21.2. (line 4318) +\textascenderwordmark: See 21.2. (line 4356) +\textasciicircum: See 21.2. (line 4321) +\textasciitilde: See 21.2. (line 4324) +\textasteriskcentered: See 21.2. (line 4327) +\textbackslash: See 21.2. (line 4330) +\textbar: See 21.2. (line 4333) +\textbardbl: See 21.2. (line 4336) \textbf: See 4.1. (line 450) -\textfloatsep: See 8.10. (line 1169) -\textfraction: See 8.10. (line 1173) -\textheight: See 5.5. (line 727) +\textbigcircle: See 21.2. (line 4339) +\textbraceleft: See 21.2. (line 4342) +\textbraceright: See 21.2. (line 4345) +\textbullet: See 21.2. (line 4348) +\textcapitalwordmark: See 21.2. (line 4355) +\textcircled{LETTER}: See 21.2. (line 4351) +\textcompwordmark: See 21.2. (line 4354) +\textcopyright: See 21.2. (line 4272) +\textdagger: See 21.2. (line 4361) +\textdaggerdbl: See 21.2. (line 4364) +\textdollar (or $): See 21.2. (line 4367) +\textellipsis: See 21.2. (line 4293) +\textemdash (or ---): See 21.2. (line 4370) +\textendash (or --): See 21.2. (line 4373) +\texteuro: See 21.2. (line 4376) +\textexclamdown (or !`): See 21.2. (line 4379) +\textfloatsep: See 8.10. (line 1184) +\textfraction: See 8.10. (line 1188) +\textgreater: See 21.2. (line 4382) +\textheight: See 5.5. (line 733) \textit: See 4.1. (line 441) +\textleftarrow: See 21.2. (line 4388) +\textless: See 21.2. (line 4385) \textmd: See 4.1. (line 447) \textnormal: See 4.1. (line 468) +\textordfeminine: See 21.2. (line 4391) +\textordmasculine: See 21.2. (line 4392) +\textparagraph: See 21.2. (line 4301) +\textperiodcentered: See 21.2. (line 4398) +\textquestiondown (or ?`): See 21.2. (line 4401) +\textquotedblleft (or ``): See 21.2. (line 4404) +\textquotedblright (or '): See 21.2. (line 4407) +\textquoteleft (or `): See 21.2. (line 4410) +\textquoteright (or '): See 21.2. (line 4413) +\textquotestraightbase: See 21.2. (line 4416) +\textquotestraightdblbase: See 21.2. (line 4417) +\textregistered: See 21.2. (line 4420) +\textrightarrow: See 21.2. (line 4423) \textrm: See 4.1. (line 438) \textsc: See 4.1. (line 462) \textsf: See 4.1. (line 459) \textsl: See 4.1. (line 456) +\textsterling: See 21.2. (line 4305) +\textthreequartersemdash: See 21.2. (line 4426) +\texttrademark: See 21.2. (line 4429) \texttt: See 4.1. (line 465) +\texttwelveudash: See 21.2. (line 4432) +\textunderscore: See 21.2. (line 4435) \textup: See 4.1. (line 453) -\textwidth: See 5.5. (line 734) -\thanks{TEXT}: See 18.1. (line 3804) -\theta: See 16.2. (line 3415) -\thicklines: See 8.18.8. (line 1582) -\thinlines: See 8.18.9. (line 1589) -\thinspace: See 19.5. (line 3945) -\thispagestyle: See 18.4. (line 3878) -\tilde: See 16.4. (line 3658) -\times: See 16.2. (line 3418) +\textvisiblespace: See 21.2. (line 4438) +\textwidth: See 5.5. (line 740) +\TH (): See 21.4. (line 4585) +\th (): See 21.4. (line 4585) +\thanks{TEXT}: See 18.1. (line 3833) +\theta: See 16.2. (line 3443) +\thicklines: See 8.18.8. (line 1597) +\thinlines: See 8.18.9. (line 1604) +\thinspace: See 19.5. (line 3974) +\thispagestyle: See 18.4. (line 3907) +\tilde: See 16.4. (line 3686) +\times: See 16.2. (line 3446) \tiny: See 4.2. (line 537) -\title{TEXT}: See 18.1. (line 3808) -\to: See 16.2. (line 3421) -\today: See 21.6. (line 4390) -\top: See 16.2. (line 3424) -\topfraction: See 8.10. (line 1178) -\topmargin: See 5.5. (line 740) -\topsep: See 8.13. (line 1316) -\topskip: See 5.5. (line 747) -\totalheight: See 12.6. (line 2578) -\triangle: See 16.2. (line 3427) -\triangleleft: See 16.2. (line 3430) -\triangleright: See 16.2. (line 3433) +\title{TEXT}: See 18.1. (line 3837) +\to: See 16.2. (line 3449) +\today: See 21.6. (line 4610) +\top: See 16.2. (line 3452) +\topfraction: See 8.10. (line 1193) +\topmargin: See 5.5. (line 746) +\topsep: See 8.13. (line 1331) +\topskip: See 5.5. (line 753) +\totalheight: See 14.6. (line 2767) +\triangle: See 16.2. (line 3455) +\triangleleft: See 16.2. (line 3458) +\triangleright: See 16.2. (line 3461) \tt: See 4.1. (line 525) \ttfamily: See 4.1. (line 465) -\twocolumn: See 5.2. (line 645) -\typein: See 25.1. (line 4734) -\typeout: See 25.2. (line 4748) -\u (breve accent): See 21.3. (line 4332) -\unboldmath: See 16. (line 2856) -\underbrace{math}: See 16.6. (line 3731) -\underline{text}: See 16.6. (line 3734) -\unitlength: See 8.18. (line 1416) -\unlhd: See 16.2. (line 3436) -\unrhd: See 16.2. (line 3439) -\uparrow: See 16.2. (line 3445) -\Uparrow: See 16.2. (line 3442) -\updownarrow: See 16.2. (line 3451) -\Updownarrow: See 16.2. (line 3448) -\uplus: See 16.2. (line 3454) +\twocolumn: See 5.2. (line 651) +\typein: See 25.1. (line 4954) +\typeout: See 25.2. (line 4968) +\u (breve accent): See 21.3. (line 4524) +\unboldmath: See 16. (line 2884) +\underbar: See 21.3. (line 4527) +\underbrace{math}: See 16.6. (line 3759) +\underline{text}: See 16.6. (line 3762) +\unitlength: See 8.18. (line 1431) +\unlhd: See 16.2. (line 3464) +\unrhd: See 16.2. (line 3467) +\uparrow: See 16.2. (line 3473) +\Uparrow: See 16.2. (line 3470) +\updownarrow: See 16.2. (line 3479) +\Updownarrow: See 16.2. (line 3476) +\uplus: See 16.2. (line 3482) \upshape: See 4.1. (line 453) -\upsilon: See 16.2. (line 3460) -\Upsilon: See 16.2. (line 3457) -\usebox: See 20.9. (line 4191) -\usecounter: See 11.2. (line 2466) -\usefont: See 4.3. (line 627) +\upsilon: See 16.2. (line 3488) +\Upsilon: See 16.2. (line 3485) +\usebox: See 20.9. (line 4220) +\usecounter: See 13.2. (line 2655) +\usefont: See 4.3. (line 632) \usepackage: See 3.1. (line 404) -\v (breve accent): See 21.3. (line 4335) -\value: See 11.3. (line 2477) -\varepsilon: See 16.2. (line 3463) -\varphi: See 16.2. (line 3466) -\varpi: See 16.2. (line 3469) -\varrho: See 16.2. (line 3472) -\varsigma: See 16.2. (line 3475) -\vartheta: See 16.2. (line 3478) -\vdash: See 16.2. (line 3481) -\vdots: See 16.6. (line 3738) -\vec: See 16.4. (line 3661) -\vector: See 8.18.14. (line 1662) -\vee: See 16.2. (line 3484) -\verb: See 8.27.1. (line 2135) -\vert: See 16.2. (line 3490) -\Vert: See 16.2. (line 3487) -\vfill: See 19.11. (line 4014) -\vline: See 8.23.4. (line 1975) -\vspace: See 19.12. (line 4021) -\wedge: See 16.2. (line 3493) -\widehat: See 16.4. (line 3664) -\width: See 12.6. (line 2572) -\wp: See 16.2. (line 3496) -\wr: See 16.2. (line 3499) -\xi: See 16.2. (line 3505) -\Xi: See 16.2. (line 3502) -\year: See 11.8. (line 2520) -\zeta: See 16.2. (line 3508) -\{: See 21.1. (line 4212) -\|: See 16.2. (line 2883) -\}: See 21.1. (line 4212) -\~: See 21.1. (line 4222) -\~ (tilde accent): See 21.3. (line 4307) -^: See 16.1. (line 2869) -_: See 16.1. (line 2869) +\v (breve accent): See 21.3. (line 4534) +\value: See 13.3. (line 2666) +\varepsilon: See 16.2. (line 3491) +\varphi: See 16.2. (line 3494) +\varpi: See 16.2. (line 3497) +\varrho: See 16.2. (line 3500) +\varsigma: See 16.2. (line 3503) +\vartheta: See 16.2. (line 3506) +\vdash: See 16.2. (line 3509) +\vdots: See 16.6. (line 3767) +\vec: See 16.4. (line 3689) +\vector: See 8.18.14. (line 1677) +\vee: See 16.2. (line 3512) +\verb: See 8.27.1. (line 2150) +\vert: See 16.2. (line 3518) +\Vert: See 16.2. (line 3515) +\vfill: See 19.11. (line 4043) +\vline: See 8.23.4. (line 1990) +\vspace: See 19.12. (line 4050) +\wedge: See 16.2. (line 3521) +\widehat: See 16.4. (line 3692) +\width: See 14.6. (line 2761) +\wp: See 16.2. (line 3524) +\wr: See 16.2. (line 3527) +\xi: See 16.2. (line 3533) +\Xi: See 16.2. (line 3530) +\year: See 13.8. (line 2709) +\zeta: See 16.2. (line 3536) +\{: See 21.1. (line 4241) +\|: See 16.2. (line 2911) +\}: See 21.1. (line 4241) +\~: See 21.1. (line 4251) +\~ (tilde accent): See 21.3. (line 4482) +^: See 16.1. (line 2897) +_: See 16.1. (line 2897) a4paper option: See 3.1. (line 349) a5paper option: See 3.1. (line 349) -abstract environment: See 8.1. (line 881) -array environment: See 8.2. (line 892) +abstract environment: See 8.1. (line 895) +array environment: See 8.2. (line 906) article class: See 3. (line 326) b5paper option: See 3.1. (line 349) book class: See 3. (line 326) -center environment: See 8.3. (line 939) -description environment: See 8.4. (line 976) -displaymath environment <1>: See 16. (line 2831) -displaymath environment: See 8.5. (line 999) -document environment: See 8.6. (line 1018) +center environment: See 8.3. (line 953) +description environment: See 8.4. (line 990) +displaymath environment <1>: See 16. (line 2859) +displaymath environment: See 8.5. (line 1013) +document environment: See 8.6. (line 1033) draft option: See 3.1. (line 354) -enumerate environment: See 8.7. (line 1024) -eqnarray environment: See 8.8. (line 1065) -equation environment <1>: See 16. (line 2831) -equation environment: See 8.9. (line 1091) +enumerate environment: See 8.7. (line 1039) +eqnarray environment: See 8.8. (line 1080) +equation environment <1>: See 16. (line 2859) +equation environment: See 8.9. (line 1106) executivepaper option: See 3.1. (line 349) -figure: See 8.10. (line 1104) +figure: See 8.10. (line 1119) final option: See 3.1. (line 354) fleqn option: See 3.1. (line 354) -flushleft environment: See 8.11. (line 1186) -flushright environment: See 8.12. (line 1212) -indexspace: See 23.3. (line 4568) -itemize environment: See 8.13. (line 1238) +flushleft environment: See 8.11. (line 1201) +flushright environment: See 8.12. (line 1227) +indexspace: See 23.3. (line 4788) +itemize environment: See 8.13. (line 1253) landscape option: See 3.1. (line 354) legalpaper option: See 3.1. (line 349) leqno option: See 3.1. (line 354) -letter: See 8.14. (line 1345) +letter: See 8.14. (line 1360) letter class: See 3. (line 326) letterpaper option: See 3.1. (line 349) -list: See 8.15. (line 1350) -lR box: See 8.18. (line 1470) -lrbox: See 20.3. (line 4069) -math environment <1>: See 16. (line 2831) -math environment: See 8.16. (line 1372) -minipage environment: See 8.17. (line 1384) +list: See 8.15. (line 1365) +lR box: See 8.18. (line 1485) +lrbox: See 20.3. (line 4098) +math environment <1>: See 16. (line 2859) +math environment: See 8.16. (line 1387) +minipage environment: See 8.17. (line 1399) notitlepage option: See 3.1. (line 354) onecolumn option: See 3.1. (line 379) oneside option: See 3.1. (line 379) openany option: See 3.1. (line 379) openbib option: See 3.1. (line 354) openright option: See 3.1. (line 379) -picture: See 8.18. (line 1412) -printindex: See 23.3. (line 4564) -quotation: See 8.19. (line 1673) -quote: See 8.20. (line 1688) +picture: See 8.18. (line 1427) +printindex: See 23.3. (line 4784) +quotation: See 8.19. (line 1688) +quote: See 8.20. (line 1703) report class: See 3. (line 326) +secnumdepth counter: See 6. (line 810) slides class: See 3. (line 326) -tabbing environment: See 8.21. (line 1703) -table: See 8.22. (line 1795) -tabular environment: See 8.23. (line 1822) -thebibliography: See 8.24. (line 1983) -theorem environment: See 8.25. (line 2088) -titlepage environment: See 8.26. (line 2101) +tabbing environment: See 8.21. (line 1718) +table: See 8.22. (line 1810) +tabular environment: See 8.23. (line 1837) +textcomp package: See 21.2. (line 4267) +thebibliography: See 8.24. (line 1998) +theorem environment: See 8.25. (line 2103) +titlepage environment: See 8.26. (line 2116) titlepage option: See 3.1. (line 354) twocolumn option: See 3.1. (line 379) twoside option: See 3.1. (line 379) -verbatim environment: See 8.27. (line 2118) -verse environment: See 8.28. (line 2152) +verbatim environment: See 8.27. (line 2133) +verse environment: See 8.28. (line 2167) diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.xml b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.xml index 14221cde150..6ca9b0e9b2a 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.xml +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.xml @@ -2,19 +2,24 @@ latex2e.xml -September 2009 -&latex;2e reference manual (September 2009) +July 2010 +&latex;2e reference manual (July 2010) + + + + + - - -This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a document preparation system, version as of September 2009. + + +This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a document preparation system, version of July 2010. This was originally translated from -LATEX.HLP v1.0a in the VMS Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by George D. Greenwade of Sam Houston State University. The &latex; 2.09 version was written by Stephen Gilmore. The &latex;2e version was adapted from this by Torsten Martinsen. Karl Berry made further updates and additions, and gratefully acknowledges using Hypertext Help with &latex;, by Sheldon Green, and the &latex; Command Summary (for &latex; 2.09) by L. Botway and C. Biemesderfer (published by the &tex; Users Group as &tex;niques number 10), as reference material (text was not directly copied).Copyright ©right; 2007, 2008, 2009 Karl Berry.&linebreak; Copyright ©right; 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore.&linebreak; Copyright ©right; 1994, 1995, 1996 Torsten Martinsen. +Copyright ©right; 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010 Karl Berry.&linebreak; Copyright ©right; 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore.&linebreak; Copyright ©right; 1994, 1995, 1996 Torsten Martinsen. Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved on all copies. Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission notice identical to this one. Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions. @@ -22,11 +27,11 @@&latex;: Structured documents for &tex; unofficial &latex; reference manual -September 2009 +July 2010 - This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a document preparation system, version as of September 2009. +This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a document preparation system, version of July 2010. This was originally translated from -LATEX.HLP v1.0a in the VMS Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by George D. Greenwade of Sam Houston State University. The &latex; 2.09 version was written by Stephen Gilmore. The &latex;2e version was adapted from this by Torsten Martinsen. Karl Berry made further updates and additions, and gratefully acknowledges using Hypertext Help with &latex;, by Sheldon Green, and the &latex; Command Summary (for &latex; 2.09) by L. Botway and C. Biemesderfer (published by the &tex; Users Group as &tex;niques number 10), as reference material (text was not directly copied).Copyright ©right; 2007, 2008, 2009 Karl Berry.&linebreak; Copyright ©right; 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore.&linebreak; Copyright ©right; 1994, 1995, 1996 Torsten Martinsen. +Copyright ©right; 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010 Karl Berry.&linebreak; Copyright ©right; 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore.&linebreak; Copyright ©right; 1994, 1995, 1996 Torsten Martinsen. Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved on all copies. Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission notice identical to this one. Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions. @@ -39,7 +44,7 @@(dir) @@ -731,13 +736,15 @@ &latex;2e -This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a document preparation system, version as of September 2009. It is intended to cover &latex;2e, which has been the standard version of &latex; for many years. +This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a document preparation system, version as of July 2010. It is intended to cover &latex;2e, which has been the standard version of &latex; for many years. Knuth, Donald E. Lamport, Leslie &latex; Project team &latex; is implemented as a macro package for Donald E. Knuth's &tex; typesetting program. &latex; was originally created by Leslie Lamport; it is now maintained by a group of volunteers (). The official documentation written by the &latex; project is available there. Again, the present document is unofficial and has not been reviewed by the &latex; maintainers. http://latex-project.org \fontsize{size}{skip}
\fontsize \baselineskip Set font size. The first parameter is the font size to switch to and the second is the line spacing to use; this is stored in a parameter named -\baselineskip
. The unit of both parameters defaults to pt. The default\baselineskip
for the Computer Modern typeface is 1.2 times the\fontsize
.+ \baselinestretch The line spacing is also multiplied by the value of the setspace
package\baselinestretch
parameter when the type size changes; the default is 1. However, the best way to “double space” a document, if you should be unlucky enough to have to produce such, is to use thesetspace
package; see. http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=linespace + \baselinestretch setspace
packagedouble spacing The line spacing is also multiplied by the value of the\baselinestretch
parameter when the type size changes; the default is 1. However, the best way to “double space” a document, if you should be unlucky enough to have to produce such, is to use thesetspace
package; see. http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=linespace \linespread - \selectfont
\selectfont +\linespread{factor}
- -
The changes made by calling the four font commands described above do not come into effect until +\selectfont
is called.Equivalent to +\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{factor}
, and therefore must be followed by\selectfont
to have any effect. Best specified in the preamble, or use thesetspace
package, as described just above.\selectfont The changes made by calling the font commands described above do not come into effect until\selectfont
is called.@@ -978,6 +985,9 @@ &dots; \appendix \chapter{The First Appendix} + + secnumdepth counter section numbers, printing Thesecnumdepth
counter controls printing of section numbers. The setting\setcounter{secnumdepth}{level} +suppresses heading numbers at any depth , where chapter
is level zero. (See.) \setcounter @@ -2329,7 +2339,7 @@ column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\ +@{text}
- -
This inserts text in every row. An @-expression suppresses the intercolumn space normally inserted between columns; any desired space between the inserted text and the adjacent items must be included in text. An +\extracolsep{wd}
command in an @-expression causes an extra space of widthwd
to appear to the left of all subsequent columns, until countermanded by another\extracolsep
command. Unlike ordinary intercolumn space, this extra space is not suppressed by an @-expression. An\extracolsep
command can be used only in an @-expression in thecols
argument.This inserts text in every row. An @-expression suppresses the intercolumn space normally inserted between columns; any desired space between the inserted text and the adjacent items must be included in text. An \extracolsep{wd}
command in an @-expression causes an extra space of widthwd
to appear to the left of all subsequent columns, until countermanded by another\extracolsep
command. Unlike ordinary intercolumn space, this extra space is not suppressed by an @-expression. An\extracolsep
command can be used only in an @-expression in thecols
argument.@@ -2656,6 +2666,241 @@ column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\ \\ The margins are indented on the left and the right, paragraphs are not indented, and the text is not justified. Separate the lines of each stanza withfor verse
\\
, and use one or more blank lines to separate the stanzas.+ +Line breaking +Page breaking +Environments +Top ++ +Line breaking ++ line breaking breaking lines The first thing &latex; does when processing ordinary text is to translate your input file into a sequence of glyphs and spaces. To produce a printed document, this sequence must be broken into lines (and these lines must be broken into pages).&latex; usually does the line (and page) breaking for you, but in some environments, you do the line breaking yourself with the + +\\
command, and you can always manually force breaks.+ +\\ +\obeycr & \restorecr +Line breaking ++ ++ \\
[*][morespace]+ \\ force line break new line, starting line break, forcing The\\
command tells &latex; to start a new line. It has an optional argument, morespace, that specifies how much extra vertical space is to be inserted before the next line. This can be a negative amount.The +\\*
command is the same as the ordinary\\
command except that it tells &latex; not to start a new page after the line.+ +\obeycr & \restorecr +\newline +\\ +Line breaking ++ ++ \obeycr
&\restorecr
+ \obeycr \restorecr new line, output as input The\obeycr
command makes a return in the input file (^^M, internally) the same as\\
(followed by\relax
). So each new line in the input will also be a new line in the output.+ \restorecr
restores normal line-breaking behavior.+ +\newline +\- (hyphenation) +\obeycr & \restorecr +Line breaking ++ ++ \newline
+ \newline new line, starting (paragraph mode) The\newline
command breaks the line at the present point, with no stretching of the text before it. It can only be used in paragraph mode.+ +\- (hyphenation) +\fussy +\newline +Line breaking ++ ++ \-
(discretionary hyphen)+ \- (hyphenation) hyphenation, forcing The\-
command tells &latex; that it may hyphenate the word at that point. &latex; is very good at hyphenating, and it will usually find most of the correct hyphenation points, and almost never use an incorrect one. The\-
command is used for the exceptional cases.When you insert +\-
commands in a word, the word will only be hyphenated at those points and not at any of the hyphenation points that &latex; might otherwise have chosen.+ +\fussy +\sloppy +\- (hyphenation) +Line breaking ++ ++ \fussy
+ \fussy The declaration\fussy
(which is the default) makes &tex; picky about line breaking. This usually avoids too much space between words, at the cost of an occasional overfull box.This command cancels the effect of a previous +\sloppy
command (see. \sloppy + +\sloppy +\hyphenation +\fussy +Line breaking ++ ++ \sloppy
The declaration +\sloppy
makes &tex; less fussy about line breaking. This will avoid overfull boxes, at the cost of loose interword spacing.Lasts until a +\fussy
command is issued (see). \fussy + +\hyphenation +\linebreak & \nolinebreak +\sloppy +Line breaking ++ ++ \hyphenation
+ \hyphenation hyphenation, defining Synopsis:\hyphenation{word-one word-two} +The +\hyphenation
command declares allowed hyphenation points with a-
character in the given words. The words are separated by spaces. &tex; will only hyphenate if the word matches exactly, no inflections are tried. Multiple\hyphenation
commands accumulate. Some examples (the default &tex; hyphenation patterns misses the hyphenations in these words):\hyphenation{ap-pen-dix col-umns data-base data-bases} ++ +\linebreak & \nolinebreak +\hyphenation +Line breaking ++ ++ \linebreak
&\nolinebreak
+ \linebreak \nolinebreak line breaks, forcing line breaks, preventing Synopses:\linebreak[priority] +\nolinebreak[priority] +By default, the +\linebreak
(\nolinebreak
) command forces (prevents) a line break at the current position. For\linebreak
, the spaces in the line are stretched out so that it extends to the right margin as usual.With the optional argument priority, you can convert the command from a demand to a request. The priority must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the number, the more insistent the request. ++ +Page breaking +Footnotes +Line breaking +Top ++ +Page breaking ++ + page breaking breaking pages &latex; starts new pages asynchronously, when enough material has accumulated to fill up a page. Usually this happens automatically, but sometimes you may want to influence the breaks.+ +\cleardoublepage +\clearpage +Page breaking ++ ++ \cleardoublepage
+ \cleardoublepage starting on a right-hand page The\cleardoublepage
command ends the current page and causes all figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed. In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the next page a right-hand (odd-numbered) page, producing a blank page if necessary.+ +\clearpage +\newpage +\cleardoublepage +Page breaking ++ ++ \clearpage
+ \clearpage flushing floats and starting a page starting a new page and clearing floats The\clearpage
command ends the current page and causes all figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed.+ +\newpage +\enlargethispage +\clearpage +Page breaking ++ ++ \newpage
+ \newpage new page, starting starting a new page The\newpage
command ends the current page, but does not clear floats (see\clearpage
above).+ +\enlargethispage +\pagebreak & \nopagebreak +\newpage +Page breaking ++ ++ \enlargethispage
+ \enlargethispage enlarge current page \enlargethispage{size}
+ \enlargethispage*{size}
Enlarge the +\textheight
for the current page by the specified amount; e.g.\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
will allow one additional line.The starred form tries to squeeze the material together on the page as much as possible. This is normally used together with an explicit +\pagebreak
.+ \pagebreak & \nopagebreak +\enlargethispage +Page breaking ++ ++ \pagebreak
&\nopagebreak
+ \pagebreak \nopagebreak page break, forcing page break, preventing Synopses:\pagebreak[priority] +\nopagebreak[priority] +By default, the +\pagebreak
(\nopagebreak
) command forces (prevents) a page break at the current position. For\linebreak
, the vertical space on the page is stretched out where possible so that it extends to the normal bottom margin.With the optional argument priority, you can convert the +\pagebreak
command from a demand to a request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the number, the more insistent the request is.Footnotes Definitions @@ -2680,6 +2925,11 @@ column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\\footnotetext Insert footnote text only. ++ Symbolic footnotes +Symbolic footnotes +Using symbols instead of numbers for footnotes. +Footnote parameters Footnote parameters @@ -2711,12 +2961,12 @@ column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\\footnotemark With no optional argument, the\footnotemark
command puts the current footnote number in the text. This command can be used in inner paragraph mode. You give the text of the footnote separately, with the\footnotetext
command.This command can be used to produce several consecutive footnote markers referring to the same footnote with \footnotemark[\value{footnote}] -after the first +\footnote
command.after the first \footnote
command.\footnotetext -Footnote parameters +Symbolic footnotes \footnotemark Footnotes @@ -2728,12 +2978,24 @@ column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\ - +Footnote parameters +Symbolic footnotes +Footnote parameters \footnotetext Footnotes ++ +Symbolic footnotes ++ footnotes, symbolic instead of numbered If you want to use symbols for footnotes, rather than increasing numbers, redefine\thefootnote
like this:\renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}} ++ \fnsymbol , and footnotes \@fnsymbol The\fnsymbol
command produces a predefined series of symbols (see). If you want to use a different symbol as your footnote mark, you'll need to also redefine \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol \@fnsymbol
.+ Footnote parameters +Symbolic footnotes +Footnotes Footnote parameters -+ footnote parameters footnote parameters parameters, for footnotes
@@ -3257,266 +3519,31 @@ double-asterix(**) double-dagger double-ddagger \footnoterule \footnoterule
\settoheight \settowidth \settodepth -Lengths -- - -- \settoheight
- \settoheight \settoheight{\gnat}{text}
The -\settoheight
command sets the value of alength
command equal to the height of thetext
argument.- -\settowidth -Predefined lengths -\settoheight -Lengths -- -- \settowidth{\len}{text}
- \settowidth The\settowidth
command sets the value of the command \len to the width of the text argument.- -Predefined lengths -\settowidth -Lengths -- -Predefined lengths -- lengths, predefined predefined lengths \width
\width \height
\height \depth
\depth \totalheight
\totalheight These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the box-making commands (see). They specify the natural width etc. of the text in the box. Boxes \totalheight
equals\height
+\depth
. To make a box with the text stretched to double the natural size, e.g., say- \makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}
- -Line breaking -Page breaking -Environments -Top -- -Line breaking -- line breaking breaking lines The first thing &latex; does when processing ordinary text is to translate your input file into a sequence of glyphs and spaces. To produce a printed document, this sequence must be broken into lines (and these lines must be broken into pages).&latex; usually does the line (and page) breaking for you, but in some environments, you do the line breaking yourself with the - -\\
command, and you can always manually force breaks.- -\\ -\obeycr & \restorecr -Line breaking -- -- \\
[*][morespace]- \\ force line break new line, starting line break, forcing The\\
command tells &latex; to start a new line. It has an optional argument, morespace, that specifies how much extra vertical space is to be inserted before the next line. This can be a negative amount.The -\\*
command is the same as the ordinary\\
command except that it tells &latex; not to start a new page after the line.- -\obeycr & \restorecr -\newline -\\ -Line breaking -- -- \obeycr
&\restorecr
- \obeycr \restorecr new line, output as input The\obeycr
command makes a return in the input file (^^M, internally) the same as\\
(followed by\relax
). So each new line in the input will also be a new line in the output.- \restorecr
restores normal line-breaking behavior.- -\newline -\- (hyphenation) -\obeycr & \restorecr -Line breaking -- -- \newline
- \newline new line, starting (paragraph mode) The\newline
command breaks the line at the present point, with no stretching of the text before it. It can only be used in paragraph mode.- -\- (hyphenation) -\fussy -\newline -Line breaking -- -- \-
(discretionary hyphen)- \- (hyphenation) hyphenation, forcing The\-
command tells &latex; that it may hyphenate the word at that point. &latex; is very good at hyphenating, and it will usually find most of the correct hyphenation points, and almost never use an incorrect one. The\-
command is used for the exceptional cases.When you insert -\-
commands in a word, the word will only be hyphenated at those points and not at any of the hyphenation points that &latex; might otherwise have chosen.- -\fussy -\hyphenation -\- (hyphenation) -Line breaking -- -- \fussy
- \fussy The declaration\fussy
(which is the default) makes &tex; picky about line breaking. This usually avoids too much space between words, at the cost of an occasional overfull box.This command cancels the effect of a previous -\sloppy
command (see. \sloppy - -\sloppy -\linebreak & \nolinebreak -Line breaking -- -- \sloppy
The declaration -\sloppy
makes &tex; less fussy about line breaking. This will avoid overfull boxes, at the cost of loose interword spacing.Lasts until a -\fussy
command is issued (see). \fussy - -\hyphenation -\linebreak & \nolinebreak -\fussy -Line breaking -- -- \hyphenation
- \hyphenation hyphenation, defining Synopsis:\hyphenation{word-one word-two} -The -\hyphenation
command declares allowed hyphenation points with a-
character in the given words. The words are separated by spaces. &tex; will only hyphenate if the word matches exactly, no inflections are tried. Multiple\hyphenation
commands accumulate. Some examples (the default &tex; hyphenation patterns misses the hyphenations in these words):\hyphenation{ap-pen-dix col-umns data-base data-bases} -- -\linebreak & \nolinebreak -\sloppy -\hyphenation -Line breaking -- -- \linebreak
&\nolinebreak
- \linebreak \nolinebreak line breaks, forcing line breaks, preventing Synopses:\linebreak[priority] -\nolinebreak[priority] -By default, the -\linebreak
(\nolinebreak
) command forces (prevents) a line break at the current position. For\linebreak
, the spaces in the line are stretched out so that it extends to the right margin as usual.With the optional argument priority, you can convert the command from a demand to a request. The priority must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the number, the more insistent the request. -- -Page breaking -Footnotes -Line breaking -Top -- -Page breaking -- - page breaking breaking pages &latex; starts new pages asynchronously, when enough material has accumulated to fill up a page. Usually this happens automatically, but sometimes you may want to influence the breaks.- -\cleardoublepage -\clearpage -Page breaking -- -- \cleardoublepage
- \cleardoublepage starting on a right-hand page The\cleardoublepage
command ends the current page and causes all figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed. In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the next page a right-hand (odd-numbered) page, producing a blank page if necessary.- -\clearpage -\newpage -\cleardoublepage -Page breaking -- -- \clearpage
- \clearpage flushing floats and starting a page starting a new page and clearing floats The\clearpage
command ends the current page and causes all figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed.- \newpage -\enlargethispage -\clearpage -Page breaking +Lengths - - \newpage
+ \newpage new page, starting starting a new page The\newpage
command ends the current page, but does not clear floats (see\clearpage
above).+ \settoheight
+ \settoheight \settoheight{\gnat}{text}
The \settoheight
command sets the value of alength
command equal to the height of thetext
argument.- \enlargethispage -\pagebreak & \nopagebreak -\newpage -Page breaking +\settowidth +Predefined lengths +\settoheight +Lengths - - \enlargethispage
- \enlargethispage enlarge current page \enlargethispage{size}
- \enlargethispage*{size}
Enlarge the -\textheight
for the current page by the specified amount; e.g.\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
will allow one additional line.The starred form tries to squeeze the material together on the page as much as possible. This is normally used together with an explicit +\pagebreak
.+ \settowidth{\len}{text}
\settowidth The\settowidth
command sets the value of the command \len to the width of the text argument.- \pagebreak & \nopagebreak -\enlargethispage -Page breaking +Predefined lengths +\settowidth +Lengths - - \pagebreak
&\nopagebreak
- \pagebreak \nopagebreak page break, forcing page break, preventing Synopses:\pagebreak[priority] -\nopagebreak[priority] -By default, the -\pagebreak
(\nopagebreak
) command forces (prevents) a page break at the current position. For\linebreak
, the vertical space on the page is stretched out where possible so that it extends to the normal bottom margin.With the optional argument priority, you can convert the +\pagebreak
command from a demand to a request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the number, the more insistent the request is.Predefined lengths ++ lengths, predefined predefined lengths \width
\width \height
\height \depth
\depth \totalheight
\totalheight These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the box-making commands (see). They specify the natural width etc. of the text in the box. Boxes \totalheight
equals\height
+\depth
. To make a box with the text stretched to double the natural size, e.g., say\makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}
@@ -3669,8 +3696,8 @@ double-asterix(**) double-dagger double-ddagger - Subscripts & Superscripts +Subscripts & superscripts Math symbols Math formulas - Subscripts & Superscripts +Subscripts & superscripts superscript subscript exponent _ ^ To get an expression exp to appear as a subscript, you just type_{
exp}
. To get exp to appear as a superscript, you type^{
exp}
. &latex; handles superscripted superscripts and all of that stuff in the natural way. It even does the right thing when something has both a subscript and a superscript.Math symbols Math functions -Subscripts & Superscripts +Subscripts & superscripts Math formulas Math symbols @@ -5305,7 +5332,7 @@ double-asterix(**) double-dagger double-ddaggerSpacing in math mode -Math Miscellany +Math miscellany Math accents Math formulas @@ -5341,12 +5368,12 @@ double-asterix(**) double-dagger double-ddagger - Math Miscellany +Math miscellany Spacing in math mode Math formulas - Math Miscellany -+ math Miscellany Math miscellany +math miscellany @@ -6653,7 +7003,7 @@ double-asterix(**) double-dagger double-ddagger
\* \*
discretionary multiplication multiplication symbol, discretionary line break @@ -5411,7 +5438,7 @@ double-asterix(**) double-dagger double-ddagger\underline{text} \underline{text}
- -
Causes text, which may be either math mode or not, to be underlined. +Causes text, which may be either math mode or not, to be underlined. The line is always below the text, taking account of descenders. @@ -5425,7 +5452,7 @@ double-asterix(**) double-dagger double-ddagger +Modes -Page Styles +Page styles Math formulas Top @@ -5450,12 +5477,12 @@ double-asterix(**) double-dagger double-ddagger - Page Styles +Page styles Spaces Modes Top - Page Styles +Page styles styles, page page styles The\documentclass
command determines the size and position of the page's head and foot. The page style determines what goes in them.\hspace -\SPACE +\hfill Spaces @@ -5711,8 +5738,8 @@ double-asterix(**) double-dagger double-ddagger \hspace
\hfill -\hrulefill -\/ +\SPACE +\hspace Spaces @@ -5723,7 +5750,7 @@ double-asterix(**) double-dagger double-ddagger \hfill
\SPACE \AT -\hspace +\hfill Spaces @@ -5760,7 +5787,7 @@ double-asterix(**) double-dagger double-ddagger \SPACE
\/ -\hfill +\hrulefill \thinspace Spaces @@ -5773,7 +5800,7 @@ double-asterix(**) double-dagger double-ddagger @@ -6234,16 +6514,19 @@ double-asterix(**) double-dagger double-ddagger \hrulefill \dotfill -\hfill +\/ Spaces @@ -6156,10 +6183,11 @@ double-asterix(**) double-dagger double-ddagger \hrulefill
Special insertions Text symbols -+ text symbols &latex; provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols in running text.text symbols textcomp &latex; provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols in running text. Some of these, especially the more obscure ones, are not available in OT1; you may need to load thepackage textcomp
package.
- \copyright \copyright
copyright symbol ++ \copyright \copyright
\textcopyright \textcopyright
copyright symbol - @@ -6183,9 +6211,20 @@ double-asterix(**) double-dagger double-ddagger
The copyright symbol, ©right;. - +\ldots \ldots
ellipsis ++ \guillemotleft («) \guillemotleft
(«) + \guillemotright (») \guillemotright
(») + \guilsinglleft (‹) \guilsinglleft
(‹) \guilsinglright (›) \guilsinglright
(›) double guillemets single guillemets left angle quotation marks right angle quotation marks double angle quotation marks single angle quotation marks French quotation marks quotation marks, French +- +
+Double and single angle quotation marks, commonly used in French: «, », ‹, ›. ++ + \ldots \ldots
+ \dots \dots
\textellipsis \textellipsis
ellipsis - -
An ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): `&dots;'. This command also works in math mode. +An ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): `&dots;'. \ldots
and\dots
also work in math mode.@@ -6195,15 +6234,24 @@ double-asterix(**) double-dagger double-ddagger - \P \P
paragraph sign pilcrow ++ \P \P
\textparagraph \textparagraph
paragraph symbol pilcrow Paragraph sign (pilcrow). - +\pounds \pounds
pounds symbol sterling symbol ++ \pounds \pounds
\textsterling \textsterling
pounds symbol sterling symbol +- +
+English pounds sterling: £. ++ + \quotedblbase („) \quotedblbase
(„) \quotesinglbase (‚) \quotesinglbase
(‚) double low-9 quotation mark single low-9 quotation mark low-9 quotation marks, single and double - -
English pounds sterling. +Double and single quotation marks on the baseline: „ and ‚. @@ -6224,6 +6272,238 @@ double-asterix(**) double-dagger double-ddagger +The &tex; logo. + +\textasciicircum \textasciicircum
circumflex, ASCII, in text ASCII circumflex, in text +- +
+ASCII circumflex: ^. ++ +\textasciitilde \textasciitilde
tilde, ASCII, in text ASCII tilde, in text +- +
+ASCII tilde: ~. ++ +\textasteriskcentered \textasteriskcentered
asterisk, centered, in text centered asterisk, in text +- +
+Centered asterisk: *. ++ +\textbackslash \textbackslash
backslash, in text +- +
+Backslash: \. ++ +\textbar \textbar
vertical bar, in text bar, vertical, in text +- +
+Vertical bar: |. ++ +\textbardbl \textbardbl
vertical bar, double, in text bar, double vertical, in text double vertical bar, in text +- +
+Double vertical bar. ++ +\textbigcircle \textbigcircle
big circle symbols, in text circle symbol, big, in text +- +
+Big circle symbol. ++ +\textbraceleft \textbraceleft
left brace, in text brace, left, in text +- +
+Left brace: {. ++ +\textbraceright \textbraceright
right brace, in text brace, right, in text +- +
+Right brace: }. ++ +\textbullet \textbullet
bullet, in text +- +
+Bullet: •. ++ +\textcircled{letter} \textcircled{letter}
circled letter, in text +- +
+letter in a circle, as in ®istered;. ++ ++ \textcompwordmark \textcompwordmark
+ \textcapitalwordmark \textcapitalwordmark
\textascenderwordmark \textascenderwordmark
composite word mark, in text cap height ascender height +- +
+Composite word mark (invisible). The +\textcapital...
form has the cap height of the font, while the\textascender...
form has the ascender height.+ +\textdagger \textdagger
dagger, in text +- +
+Dagger: . ++ +\textdaggerdbl \textdaggerdbl
dagger, double, in text double dagger, in text +- +
+Double dagger: . ++ +\textdollar (or $
)\textdollar
(or $
)dollar sign currency, dollar +- +
+Dollar sign: $. ++ +\textemdash (or ---
)\textemdash
(or ---
)em-dash +- +
+Em-dash: — (for punctuation). ++ +\textendash (or --
)\textendash
(or --
)e-dash +- +
+En-dash: — (for ranges). ++ +\texteuro \texteuro
euro symbol currency, euro +- +
+The Euro symbol: €. ++ +\textexclamdown (or !`
)\textexclamdown
(or !`
)exclamation point, upside-down +- +
+Upside down exclamation point: ¡. ++ +\textgreater \textgreater
greater than symbol, in text +- +
+Greater than: >. ++ +\textless \textless
less than symbol, in text +- +
+Less than: <. ++ +\textleftarrow \textleftarrow
arrow, left, in text left arrow, in text +- +
+Left arrow. ++ ++ \textordfeminine \textordfeminine
\textordmasculine \textordmasculine
feminine ordinal symbol masculine ordinal symbol ordinals, feminine and masculine Spanish ordinals, feminine and masculine +- +
+Feminine and masculine ordinal symbols: ª, º. ++ +\textordfeminine \textordfeminine
feminine ordinal symbol +- +
+Feminine ordinal symbol: ®istered;. ++ +\textperiodcentered \textperiodcentered
period, centered, in text centered period, in text +- +
+Centered period: . ++ +\textquestiondown (or ?`
)\textquestiondown
(or ?`
)questionation point, upside-down +- +
+Upside down questionation point: ¿. ++ +\textquotedblleft (or ``
)\textquotedblleft
(or ``
)left quote, double double left quote +- +
+Double left quote: “. ++ +\textquotedblright (or '
)\textquotedblright
(or '
)right quote, double double right quote +- +
+Double right quote: ”. ++ +\textquoteleft (or `
)\textquoteleft
(or `
)left quote, single single left quote +- +
+Single left quote: `. ++ +\textquoteright (or '
)\textquoteright
(or '
)right quote, single single right quote +- +
+Single right quote: '. ++ ++ \textquotestraightbase \textquotestraightbase
\textquotestraightdblbase \textquotestraightdblbase
quote, straight base straight quote, base double quote, straight base straight double quote, base +- +
+Single and double straight quotes on the baseline. ++ +\textregistered \textregistered
registered symbol +- +
+Registered symbol: ®istered;. ++ +\textrightarrow \textrightarrow
arrow, right, in text right arrow, in text +- +
+Right arrow. ++ +\textthreequartersemdash \textthreequartersemdash
three-quarters em-dash em-dash, three-quarters +- +
+“Three-quarters” em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash. ++ +\texttrademark \texttrademark
trademark symbol +- +
+Trademark symbol: . ++ ++ \texttwelveudash \texttwelveudash
- +
+Xx 12u-. ++ +\textunderscore \textunderscore
underscore, in text +- +
+Underscore: _. ++ \textvisiblespace \textvisiblespace
visible space symbol, in text +- +
+Visible space symbol. +Special insertions Accents -+ accents characters, accented letters, accented &latex; has wide support for many of the world's scripts and languages, through thebabel
package and related support. This section does not attempt to cover all that support. It merely the core &latex; commands for creating accented characters.+ accents characters, accented letters, accented &latex; has wide support for many of the world's scripts and languages, through thebabel
package and related support. This section does not attempt to cover all that support. It merely lists the core &latex; commands for creating accented characters.The \capital...
commands produce alternative forms for use with capital letters. These are not available with OT1.@@ -6359,6 +6673,27 @@ double-asterix(**) double-dagger double-ddagger
- \"
\" (umlaut accent) umlaut accent ++ \"
\capitaldieresis
\" (umlaut accent) \capitaldieresis umlaut accent dieresis accent - -
Produces an umlaut, as in ö. +Produces an umlaut (dieresis), as in ö. - \'
\' (acute accent) acute accent ++ \'
\capitalacute
\' (acute accent) \capitalacute acute accent - @@ -6255,25 +6538,29 @@ double-asterix(**) double-dagger double-ddagger
Produces an acute accent, as in ó. In the tabbing
environment, pushes current column to the right of the previous column (see). tabbing - \=
\= (macron accent) macron accent overbar accent bar-over accent ++ \=
\capitalmacron
\= (macron accent) \capitalmacron macron accent overbar accent bar-over accent Produces a macron (overbar) accent over the following, as in o¯. - \^
\^ (circumflex accent) circumflex accent hat accent ++ \^
\capitalcircumflex
\^ (circumflex accent) \capitalcircumflex circumflex accent hat accent Produces a circumflex (hat) accent over the following, as in ô. - \`
\` (grave accent) grave accent ++ \`
\capitalgrave
\` (grave accent) \capitalgrave grave accent Produces a grave accent over the following, as in ò. In the tabbing
environment, move following text to the right margin (see). tabbing - \~
\~ (tilde accent) tilde accent ++ \~
\capitaltilde
\~ (tilde accent) \capitaltilde tilde accent - @@ -6285,20 +6572,22 @@ double-asterix(**) double-dagger double-ddagger
Produces a tilde accent over the following, as in ñ. - \c
\c (cedilla accent) cedilla accent ++ \c
\capitalcedilla
\c (cedilla accent) \capitalcedilla cedilla accent - -
Produces a cedilla accent under the following, as in - +Produces a cedilla accent under the following, as in ç. - \d
\d (dot-under accent) dot-under accent ++ \d
\capitaldotaccent
\d (dot-under accent) \capitaldotaccent dot-under accent Produces a dot accent under the following, as in .o. - \H
\H (Hungarian umlaut accent) hungarian umlaut accent ++ \H
\capitalhungarumlaut
\H (Hungarian umlaut accent) \capitalhungarumlaut hungarian umlaut accent - @@ -6316,21 +6605,46 @@ double-asterix(**) double-dagger double-ddagger
Produces a long Hungarian umlaut accent over the following, as in o''. - +\t
\t (tie-after accent) tie-after accent ++ \k
\capitalogonek
\k (ogonek) \capitalogonek ogonek +- +
+Produces a letter with ogonek, as in `o'. Not available in the OT1 encoding. ++ ++ \r
\capitalring
\r (ring accent) \capitalring ring accent +- +
+Produces a ring accent, as in `o*'. ++ + \t
+ \capitaltie
+ \newtie
\capitalnewtie
\t (tie-after accent) \capitaltie \newtie \capitalnewtie tie-after accent - -
Produces a tie-after accent, as in `oo['. +Produces a tie-after accent, as in `oo['. The \newtie
form is centered in its box.- \u
\u (breve accent) breve accent ++ \u
\capitalbreve
\u (breve accent) \capitalbreve breve accent Produces a breve accent, as in `o('. - +\v
\v (breve accent) hacek accent check accent +\underbar
\underbar underbar +- +
+Not exactly an accent, this produces a bar under the argument text. The argument is always processed in horizontal mode. The bar is always a fixed position under the baseline, thus crossing through descenders. See also +\underline
in. Math miscellany + + \v
\capitalcaron
\v (breve accent) \capitalcaron hacek accent check accent caron accent - -
Produces a hác<ek (check) accent, as in `o<'. +Produces a hác<ek (check, caron) accent, as in `o<'. æ and Æ. + ++ \dh
\DH
\dh (æ) \DH (Æ) Icelandic eth eth, Icelandic letter +- +
+Icelandic letter eth: and . ++ ++ \dj
\DJ
\dj \DJ +- +
+xxxx ++ + \ij
\IJ
\ij (ij) \IJ (IJ) ij letter, Dutch +- +
+ij and IJ (except somewhat closer together than appears here). ++ \l
\L
\l (/l) \L (/L) polish l @@ -6366,6 +6701,13 @@ double-asterix(**) double-dagger double-ddagger/l and /L. + + \ng
\NG
\ng \NG +- +
+xxxx +\o
\O
\o (ø) \O (Ø) oslash @@ -6381,9 +6723,17 @@ double-asterix(**) double-dagger double-ddagger- +\ss
\ss (ß) es-zet German letter sharp S letters ++ \ss
\SS
\ss (ß) \SS (SS) es-zet German letter sharp S letters +- +
+ß and SS. ++ + \th
\TH
\th () \TH () Icelandic thorn thorn, Icelandic letter - -
ß. +Icelandic letter thorn: and . Letters -Terminal Input/Output +Terminal input/output Front/back matter Top @@ -6887,13 +7237,13 @@ double-asterix(**) double-dagger double-ddagger - Terminal Input/Output -Command Line +Terminal input/output +Command line Letters Top - Terminal Input/Output -+ input/Output terminal Input/Output Terminal input/output +input/output terminal input/output